Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black Plate (1,1)

Home , Chevrolet Express, Cutaway (filmmaking)

Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

2011 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual M

In Brief ...... 1-1 Storage ...... 4-1 Driving and Operating ...... 9-1 Instrument Panel ...... 1-2 Storage Compartments ...... 4-1 Driving Information ...... 9-2 Initial Drive Information ...... 1-4 Starting and Operating ...... 9-16 Vehicle Features ...... 1-17 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Engine Exhaust ...... 9-24 Performance and Controls ...... 5-2 Automatic Transmission ...... 9-25 Maintenance ...... 1-20 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Drive Systems ...... 9-32 Indicators ...... 5-11 Brakes ...... 9-32 Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Information Displays ...... 5-28 Ride Control Systems ...... 9-34 Keys and Locks ...... 2-2 Vehicle Messages ...... 5-33 Cruise Control ...... 9-37 Doors ...... 2-10 Vehicle Personalization ...... 5-42 Fuel ...... 9-40 Vehicle Security...... 2-13 Lighting ...... 6-1 Towing...... 9-46 Exterior Mirrors ...... 2-14 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-57 Interior Mirrors ...... 2-16 Exterior Lighting ...... 6-1 Windows ...... 2-16 Interior Lighting ...... 6-5 Vehicle Care ...... 10-1 Lighting Features ...... 6-7 General Information ...... 10-2 Seats and Restraints ...... 3-1 Infotainment System ...... 7-1 Vehicle Checks ...... 10-6 Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-40 Front Seats ...... 3-2 Introduction ...... 7-1 Radio ...... 7-8 Electrical System ...... 10-45 Rear Seats ...... 3-5 Wheels and Tires ...... 10-52 Safety Belts ...... 3-8 Audio Players ...... 7-13 Phone ...... 7-23 Jump Starting ...... 10-88 Airbag System ...... 3-25 Towing...... 10-93 Child Restraints ...... 3-43 Climate Controls ...... 8-1 Appearance Care ...... 10-96 Climate Control Systems ...... 8-1 Air Vents ...... 8-6 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

2011 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual M

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 General Information ...... 11-1 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 11-3 Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts ...... 11-8 Maintenance Records ...... 11-11 Technical Data ...... 12-1 Vehicle Identification ...... 12-1 Vehicle Data ...... 12-2 Customer Information ...... 13-1 Customer Information ...... 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-16 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy...... 13-17 Index ...... i-1 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

Introduction iii

Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm each of Propriétaires Canadiens the features found on your vehicle. A French language copy of this For vehicles first sold in Canada, manual can be obtained from your substitute the name “General dealer or from: Motors of Canada Limited” for The names, logos, emblems, Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it On peut obtenir un exemplaire de slogans, vehicle model names, and appears in this manual. ce guide en français auprès du vehicle body designs appearing in ® concessionnaire ou à l'adresse this manual including, but not limited If the vehicle has the Duramax suivante: to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, Diesel engine, see the Duramax the CHEVROLET Emblem, and diesel supplement for additional and Helm, Incorporated EXPRESS are trademarks and/or specific information on this engine. P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 service marks of General Motors Keep this manual in the vehicle for LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, quick reference. 1-800-551-4123 or licensors. Numéro de poste 6438 de langue This manual describes features that française may or may not be on your specific www.helminc.com vehicle either because they are options that you did not purchase or due to changes subsequent to the printing of this owner manual.

iv Introduction

Using this Manual Symbols { WARNING To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or manual and the page number where information relating to a specific it can be found. component, control, message, Notice: This means there is gauge, or indicator. something that could result in Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. M : This symbol is shown Cautions This would not be covered by the when you need to see the owner vehicle's warranty. manual for additional instructions Warning messages found on vehicle or information. labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown reduce them. when you need to see a service manual for additional instructions Danger indicates a hazard with a or information. high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death. Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it hazard that could result in injury is a safety symbol which means or death. “Do Not,”“Do not do this,” or “Do not let this happen.” Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart $ : Brake System Warning Light * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp Here are some additional symbols " : Charging System : : Oil Pressure that may be found on the vehicle } and what they mean. For more I : Cruise Control : Power information on the symbol, refer B : Engine Coolant Temperature / : Remote Vehicle Start to the Index. O : Exterior Lamps > : Safety Belt Reminders : Airbag Readiness Light 9 # : Fog Lamps 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor : Air Conditioning # . : Fuel Gauge _ : Tow/Haul Mode ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) + : Fuses d : Traction Control : Audio Steering Wheel Controls g 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam : Windshield Washer Fluid or OnStar® M Changer j : LATCH System Child Restraints Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

vi Introduction

2 NOTES Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

In Brief 1-1

Mirror Adjustment ...... 1-9 Performance and Maintenance In Brief Steering Wheel StabiliTrak® System ...... 1-20 Adjustment ...... 1-10 Tire Pressure Monitor ...... 1-21 Instrument Panel Interior Lighting ...... 1-11 Engine Oil Life System ...... 1-21 Exterior Lighting ...... 1-12 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-21 Instrument Panel ...... 1-2 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13 Driving for Better Fuel Initial Drive Information Climate Controls ...... 1-14 Economy ...... 1-22 Initial Drive Information ...... 1-4 Transmission ...... 1-16 Roadside Assistance Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Program ...... 1-22 Vehicle Features OnStar® ...... 1-23 System ...... 1-4 Radio(s) ...... 1-17 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 1-4 Satellite Radio ...... 1-18 Door Locks ...... 1-5 Portable Audio Devices ...... 1-19 Windows ...... 1-6 Bluetooth® ...... 1-19 Seat Adjustment ...... 1-6 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-19 Safety Belts ...... 1-8 Cruise Control ...... 1-20 Airbag On-Off Switch ...... 1-8 Power Outlets ...... 1-20 Sensing System for Passenger Airbag ...... 1-8 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑6. H. Infotainment on page 7‑1. O. Steering Wheel Controls on B. Driver Information Center (DIC) I. Exterior Lamp Controls on page 5‑2. Buttons. See Driver Information page 6‑1. P. Tow/Haul Mode Button. See Center (DIC) on page 5‑28. J. Instrument Panel Illumination “Tow/Haul Mode” under Towing Equipment on page 9 54. C. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever. Control on page 6‑5. ‑ See Turn and Lane-Change Dome Lamp Override. See Q. Power Outlets on page 5‑9. Signals on page 6 5. ® ‑ Dome Lamps on page 6‑6. R. StabiliTrak System on Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 9 34 (If Equipped). K. Cruise Control on page 9‑37 ‑ page 5‑4. (If Equipped). S. Airbag On-Off Switch on D. Hazard Warning Flashers on Fast Idle System (If Equipped). page 3‑32 (If Equipped). page 6 4. ‑ See the Duramax diesel T. Front Storage on page 4‑1. E. Instrument Cluster on supplement for more U. Passenger Airbag Status page 5 12. information. ‑ Indicator on page 5‑20 F. Shift Lever. See Starting the L. Steering Wheel Adjustment on (If Equipped). Engine on page 9‑18. page 5‑2. OnStar® System Button. Manual Mode on page 9‑30 M. Data Link Connector (DLC). (If Equipped). (If Equipped). See Malfunction Indicator Lamp V. Rear Heating System on on page 5 21. G. Climate Control Systems on ‑ page 8‑3 (If Equipped). page 8‑1. N. Horn on page 5‑4. W. USB Port. See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑18. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

1-4 In Brief

Initial Drive Press L and hold for more than Information 2 seconds to sound the panic alarm. Press again to cancel the This section provides a brief L overview about some of the panic alarm. important features that may or may See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote not be on your specific vehicle. Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2 3. For more detailed information, refer ‑ to each of the features which can be found later in this owner manual. Remote Vehicle Start With this feature the engine can be Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter With Remote started from outside of the vehicle. (RKE) System Start Shown Starting the Vehicle The RKE transmitter is used to Press K to unlock the driver door. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the remotely lock and unlock the doors vehicle. from up to 60 m (195 feet) away Press K again within 5 seconds to from the vehicle. unlock all remaining doors. 2. Press Q. Press j to unlock only the 3. Immediately after completing cargo doors. Step 2, press and hold / until the turn signal lamps flash. Press Q to lock all doors. When the vehicle starts, the parking Lock and unlock feedback can lamps will turn on and remain on as be personalized. long as the engine is running. The Press L and release to locate doors will be locked and the climate the vehicle. control system may come on. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

In Brief 1-5

The engine will continue to run for Door Locks Power Door Locks 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a On vehicles with power door locks, 10-minute time extension. Remote Manual Door Locks the switches are located on the start can be extended only once. doors. Canceling a Remote Start T : Press to lock and unlock To cancel a remote start: the doors. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the See Power Door Locks on page 2‑8. vehicle and press and hold / until the parking lamps turn off. . Turn on the hazard warning flashers. . Turn the ignition on and then back off. See Remote Vehicle Start on Lock and unlock the door from the page 2 5. ‑ outside using the key or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if available. From the inside, slide the manual lever on the door up or down. See Door Locks on page 2‑7. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

1-6 In Brief

Windows Power Windows Seat Adjustment Manual Windows Manual Seats Operate the manual windows by turning the hand crank on each door to raise or lower the side door windows. See Manual Windows on page 2‑17.

If the vehicle has power windows, the controls are located on each of the side doors. The driver door To adjust a manual seat: also has a control to operate the 1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. front passenger window. 2. Slide the seat to the desired Press or pull up on the switch to position and release the bar. lower or raise the window. 3. Try to move the seat back and See Power Windows on page 2‑17. forth to be sure the seat is locked in place. See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑2. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

In Brief 1-7

Power Seats Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to the upright position: 1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback, and the seatback will return to the upright position. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑3.

To adjust a power seat, if available, To recline the seatback: use the controls on the front of 1. Lift the lever on the inboard side the seat: of the seat. . Adjust the seat by moving the 2. Move the seatback to the center knob up, down, right, desired position, and then or left. release the lever to lock the . Raise and lower the front or rear seatback in place. of the seat cushion by moving 3. Push and pull on the seatback to the right or left lever up or down. make sure it is locked. See Power Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

1-8 In Brief

Safety Belts Airbag On-Off Switch If the instrument panel has one of the switches pictured in the following illustrations, the vehicle has an airbag on-off switch that you can use to manually turn on or off the right front passenger airbag.

Canada and Mexico To operate the airbag on‐off switch, Refer to the following sections for use the vehicle key. important information on how to use See Airbag On-Off Switch on safety belts properly. page 3‑32 for important information. . Safety Belts on page 3‑8. . How to Wear Safety Belts Sensing System for Properly on page 3‑12. United States Passenger Airbag . Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑18. The passenger sensing system, if equipped, will turn off the right . Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. The driver airbag page 3‑52. and roof‐rail airbags, if equipped, are not affected by this. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

In Brief 1-9

If the vehicle has a passenger Mirror Adjustment Select each mirror by turning the sensing system, the passenger knob clockwise for the passenger airbag status indicator will be visible Exterior Mirrors side mirror or counterclockwise for on the instrument panel when the Vehicles with outside manual the driver side mirror. Adjust the vehicle is started. mirrors can be adjusted by moving mirror angle by moving the knob in the mirror up and down or left to the desired direction. right so you can see a little of the Keep the selector switch in the side of your vehicle, and have a center position when not adjusting clear view of objects behind you. either outside mirror.

United States

Canada and Mexico See Passenger Sensing System on page 3‑35 for important information. Vehicles with outside power mirrors Vehicles with towing mirrors can be have controls located on the driver adjusted manually for a clear view side door. of the objects behind you. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

1-10 In Brief

Manually fold the mirrors inward to Steering Wheel To adjust the steering wheel: prevent damage when going Adjustment 1. Pull the lever to move the through an automatic car wash. steering wheel up or down into a To fold, pull the mirror toward the comfortable position. vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to return it to the original position. 2. Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in place. Interior Mirror See Steering Wheel Adjustment on Hold the inside rearview mirror in page 5‑2. the center to move it for a clearer view behind the vehicle. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind. Push the tab, located at the base of the mirror, forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use. See Manual Rearview Mirror on For vehicles with a tilt steering page 2‑16. wheel, the lever is located on the left side of the steering column. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

In Brief 1-11

Interior Lighting To manually turn on the dome Reading Lamps lamps, press D then turn the knob Dome Lamp For vehicles with reading lamps, clockwise to the farthest position. press the button located next to The dome lamps come on when any In this position, the dome lamps each lamp to turn it on or off. door is opened. They turn off after remain on whether a door is all the doors are closed. opened or closed. The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other locations. The lamps E DOME OFF : This button is cannot be adjusted. located above the instrument panel brightness knob. For more information on interior lighting, see: Press the button in and the dome . lamps remain off when a door is Instrument Panel Illumination opened. Press the button again so Control on page 6‑5. that the dome lamps come on when . Entry/Exit Lighting on page 6‑7. a door is opened.

The instrument panel brightness knob extends when D is pressed. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

1-12 In Brief

Exterior Lighting For vehicles first sold in Canada, For more information, see: the off position only works for . Exterior Lamp Controls on vehicles that are shifted into the page 6‑1. P (Park) position. . Exterior Lamps Off Reminder on AUTO: Automatically turns on page 6‑2. the headlamps, parking lamps, taillamps, instrument panel lights, . Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and license plate lamps. on page 6‑3. ; : Turns on the parking lamps, . Automatic Headlamp System on taillamps, instrument panel lights, page 6‑4. and license plate lamps. 2 : Turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, taillamps, instrument panel lights, and The exterior lamps control is located license plate lamps. on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. O : Briefly turn the control to this position to turn the automatic headlamps and Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) off or back on. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

In Brief 1-13

Windshield Wiper/Washer 8 : Use for a single wiping cycle. 9 : Use to turn the wipers off. 6 : Use to adjust the delay time L : Push the paddle on top of the between wipes. Turn the band up or multifunction lever to spray washer down for more frequent wipes or fluid on the windshield. less frequent wipes. See Windshield Wiper/Washer on d : Slow wipes. page 5‑4. a : Fast wipes. The lever is located on the left side of the steering column. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (14,1)

1-14 In Brief

Climate Controls The vehicle's heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled with these systems.

Vehicles Without Air Conditioning

A. Fan Control B. Temperature Control C. Air Delivery Mode Control Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (15,1)

In Brief 1-15

See Climate Control Systems on page 8‑1. See Rear Heating System on page 8‑3 (If Equipped) or Rear Climate Control System on page 8‑4 (If Equipped).

Vehicles With Air Conditioning

A. Fan Control C. Air Delivery Mode Control B. Temperature Control D. Rear Window Defogger Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (16,1)

1-16 In Brief

Transmission To use this feature, do the following: Grade Braking is not available when Range Selection Mode is active. Range Selection Mode 1. Move the shift lever to M (Manual Mode). See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑31. 2. Press the plus/minus buttons, While using Range Selection Mode, located on the steering column Cruise Control and the Tow/Haul shift lever, to select the desired Mode can be used. range of gears for current driving conditions. When M (Manual Mode) is selected The vehicle may have a Range a number displays in the DIC next to Selection Mode. The Range the M indicating the current gear. Selection Mode helps control the vehicle's transmission and vehicle speed while driving down hill or towing a trailer by letting you select a desired range of gears. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (17,1)

In Brief 1-17

Vehicle Features © ¨ : Seek or scan stations. 4 : Press to switch the display Radio(s) between the radio station frequency and the time. While the ignition is off, press this button to display the time. Press to display additional text information related to the current FM-RDS station or MP3 song. A choice of additional information such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) can display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired tab, or press the softkey located under any one of the tabs and the information about that tab displays. For more information about these and other radio features, see Infotainment on page 7‑1.

Radio with CD (MP3)

O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between and off. Turn to increase or FM1, FM2, AM, and XM™. decrease the volume. f : Select radio stations. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (18,1)

1-18 In Brief

Storing a Favorite Station Setting the Clock Satellite Radio Depending on which radio the To set the time and date for XM is a satellite radio service vehicle has, radio stations are the Radio with CD (MP3): that is based in the 48 contiguous stored as either favorites or presets. United States and 10 Canadian 1. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, provinces. XM satellite radio has a For vehicles with a FAV button, a DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, wide variety of programming and maximum of 36 stations can be day, and year) displays. stored as favorites using the commercial-free music, coast to six softkeys located below the 2. Press the softkey located below coast, and in digital-quality sound. any one of the tabs that you radio station frequency tabs and by A fee is required to receive the want to change. using the radio FAV button. Press XM service. FAV to go through up to six pages of 3. Increase or decrease the time or For more information, refer to: favorites, each having six favorite date, depending on the radio, by stations available per page. Each pressing the © SEEK ¨ arrows, . www.xmradio.com or call page of favorites can contain any s / \ REV/FWD buttons or by 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.) combination of AM and FM stations. turning f clockwise or . www.xmradio.ca or call If the radio does not have a counterclockwise. 1-877-438-9677 (Canada) FAV button, up to 18 stations See Satellite Radio on page 7 10. (6 FM1, 6 FM2, and 6 AM), can For detailed instructions on setting ‑ be programmed on the the clock for your specific audio six numbered buttons. system, see Clock on page 5‑6. See Operation on page 7‑3. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (19,1)

In Brief 1-19

Portable Audio Devices vehicle. Not all phones will support w /c x : Press to change all functions. For more information, favorite radio stations, select tracks This vehicle may have an auxiliary visit www.gm.com/bluetooth. on a CD, or to navigate tracks or input located on the radio faceplate folders on an iPod® or USB device. and a USB port located on the For more information, see Bluetooth instrument panel. External devices on page 7‑23. b g : Press to silence the vehicle such as an iPod®, laptop computer, speakers only. Press again to turn MP3 player, CD changer, or USB Steering Wheel Controls the sound on. Press and hold longer storage device can be connected to than two seconds to interact with the auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm OnStar® or Bluetooth systems, (1/8 in) input cable or the USB port if equipped. depending on the audio system. + e − e : Press to increase or See "Using the Auxiliary Input Jack" decrease volume. and "Using the USB Port" in : Press to reject an Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑18. c x incoming call, or to end a call. Bluetooth® SRCE: Press to switch between the radio and CD, and for equipped For vehicles with a Bluetooth vehicles, the front auxiliary. system, it allows users with a Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone to ¨ : Press to seek the next radio make and receive hands-free calls station, the next track while sourced For vehicles with audio steering using the vehicle’s audio system to the CD, or to select tracks and wheel controls, some audio controls ® and controls. folders on an iPod or USB device. can be adjusted at the steering The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone wheel. For more information, see Steering must be paired with the Bluetooth Wheel Controls on page 5‑2. system before it can be used in the Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (20,1)

1-20 In Brief

Cruise Control [ : Press to disengage cruise Performance and control without erasing the set speed from memory. Maintenance For more information, see Cruise StabiliTrak® System Control on page 9‑37. The vehicle may have a traction Power Outlets control system that limits wheel spin and the StabiliTrak system that The accessory power outlets assists with directional control of the can be used to plug in electrical vehicle in difficult driving conditions. equipment, such as a cell phone or Both systems turn on automatically an MP3 player. every time the vehicle is started. The vehicle may have two . To turn off both traction control accessory power outlets located on and StabiliTrak, press and hold For vehicles with cruise control, the the instrument panel. d until d illuminates and the buttons are located on the left side Remove the cover to access and appropriate DIC message of the steering wheel. replace when not in use. displays. See Ride Control System Messages on page 5‑38. J : Turns the system on or off. See Power Outlets on page 5‑9. +RES: Press briefly to make the . Press and release the button vehicle resume to a previously again to turn on both systems. set speed, or press and hold to For more information, see accelerate. StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑34. SET−: Press to set the speed and activate cruise control or press and hold to decelerate. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (21,1)

In Brief 1-21

Tire Pressure Monitor During cooler conditions, the low tire Resetting the Oil Life System pressure warning light may appear This vehicle may have a Tire 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, when the vehicle is first started and with the engine off. Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). then turn off. This may be an early indicator that the tire pressures are 2. Fully press and release the getting low and the tires need to be accelerator pedal three times inflated to the proper pressure. within five seconds. The TPMS does not replace normal 3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. monthly tire maintenance. It is the See Engine Oil Life System on driver’s responsibility to maintain page 10‑13. correct tire pressures. The TPMS warning light alerts you to a significant loss in pressure of See Tire Pressure Monitor System Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 10 62. one of the vehicle's tires. If the ‑ Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge warning light comes on, stop as and a yellow fuel cap can use either soon as possible and inflate the Engine Oil Life System unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel tires to the recommended pressure The engine oil life system calculates containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). shown on the Tire and Loading engine oil life based on vehicle use See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on Information label. See Vehicle Load and displays a DIC message when page 9‑42. For all other vehicles, Limits on page 9‑12. The warning it is necessary to change the engine use only the unleaded gasoline light will remain on until the tire oil and filter. The oil life system described under Recommended pressure is corrected. should be reset to 100% only Fuel on page 9‑40. following an oil change. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (22,1)

1-22 In Brief

Driving for Better Fuel . Replace the vehicle's tires with Roadside Assistance and OnStar the same TPC Spec number (U.S. and Canada) Economy molded into the tire's sidewall If you have an active OnStar Driving habits can affect fuel near the size. subscription, press the Q button mileage. Here are some driving tips . Follow recommended scheduled and the current GPS location will be to get the best fuel economy maintenance. possible. sent to an OnStar advisor who will assess your problem, contact . Avoid fast starts and accelerate Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance, and relay smoothly. Program your exact location to get the . Brake gradually and avoid U.S.: 1-800-243-8872 help you need. abrupt stops. TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438 Online Owner Center (U.S. and . Avoid idling the engine for long Canada) Canada: 1-800-268-6800 periods of time. The Online Owner Center is a . When road and weather Mexico: 01-800-466-0800 complimentary service that includes conditions are appropriate, use As the owner of a new Chevrolet, online service reminders, vehicle cruise control. you are automatically enrolled in the maintenance tips, online owner manual, special privileges, . Always follow posted speed Roadside Assistance program. and more. limits or drive more slowly when See Roadside Assistance Program conditions require. (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or Sign up today at: www.chevyownercenter.com . Keep vehicle tires properly Roadside Assistance Program (U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada). inflated. (Mexico) on page 13‑10 for more information. . Combine several trips into a single trip. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (23,1)

In Brief 1-23

OnStar® How OnStar Service Works Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles. For more Q : Push this blue button to information, see the OnStar Owner's connect to a specially trained Guide; visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) OnStar Advisor to verify your or www.onstar.ca (Canada); account information and to contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR answer questions. (1‐888‐466‐7827) or ] : Push this red emergency TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080; or push the button to get priority help Q button to speak with an For vehicles with an active OnStar from specially trained OnStar Advisor 24 hours a day, subscription, OnStar uses several OnStar Emergency Advisors. 7 days a week. innovative technologies and live X : Push this button for For a full description of OnStar Advisors to provide a wide range of hands‐free, voice‐activated calling services and system limitations, see safety, security, navigation, and to give voice commands the OnStar Owner's Guide in the diagnostics, and calling services. for Hands‐Free Calling and glove box. Turn by Turn Navigation. Automatic Crash Response ‐ ‐ OnStar service is subject to the In a crash, built‐in sensors can Automatic Crash Response, OnStar Terms and Conditions automatically alert an OnStar Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, included in the OnStar Glove Advisor who is immediately Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle Box Kit. Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, connected to the vehicle to see if OnStar service requires wireless Roadside Assistance, Turn by Turn you need help. ‐ ‐ communication networks and the Navigation, and Hands Free Calling ‐ Global Positioning System (GPS) are available on most vehicles. satellite network. Not all OnStar services are available everywhere or on all vehicles at all times. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (24,1)

1-24 In Brief

OnStar service can’t work unless Other problems OnStar can’t control On some vehicles, the the vehicle is in a place where may prevent service to you, such as c x button can be used OnStar has an agreement with a hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather, to dial numbers into voice mail wireless service provider for service electrical system design and systems, or to dial phone in that area, and the wireless architecture of the vehicle, damage extensions. See the OnStar service provider has coverage, to important parts of the vehicle in a Owner's Guide for more information. network capacity, reception, and crash, or wireless phone network technology compatible with OnStar's congestion or jamming. Your Responsibility service. Service involving location See Radio Frequency Statement on Increase the volume of the information about the vehicle can t ’ page 13‑19 for information radio if the OnStar Advisor work unless GPS signals are regarding Part 15 of the Federal cannot be heard. available, unobstructed, and Communications Commission (FCC) If the light next to the OnStar compatible with the OnStar rules and Industry Canada buttons is red, the system may not hardware. The vehicle has to Standards RSS-210/220/310. be functioning properly. Push the have a working electrical system Q button and request a vehicle and adequate battery power for OnStar Steering Wheel diagnostic. If the light appears clear the OnStar equipment to operate. Controls (no light appears), your OnStar OnStar service may not work if the This vehicle may have a subscription has expired and all OnStar equipment isn’t properly / Talk/Mute button services have been deactivated. installed or you haven’t maintained b g c x it and the vehicle is in good working that can be used to interact with Push the Q button to confirm that order and in compliance with all OnStar Hands-Free calling. the OnStar equipment is active. government regulations. If you try to See Steering Wheel Controls on add, connect, or modify any page 5‑2 for more information. equipment or software in the vehicle, OnStar service may not work. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Doors Interior Mirrors Keys, Doors and Side Door Manual Rearview Mirror ...... 2-16 Windows (60/40 Swing-Out) ...... 2-10 Sliding Door ...... 2-11 Windows Rear Doors ...... 2-12 Windows ...... 2-16 Keys and Locks Manual Windows ...... 2-17 Vehicle Security Power Windows ...... 2-17 Keys ...... 2-2 Vehicle Security ...... 2-13 Swing-Out Windows ...... 2-18 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Immobilizer ...... 2-13 Enhanced Technology System ...... 2-2 Immobilizer Operation ...... 2-13 Glass ...... 2-19 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Sun Visors ...... 2-19 System Operation ...... 2-3 Exterior Mirrors Remote Vehicle Start ...... 2-5 Convex Mirrors ...... 2-14 Door Locks ...... 2-7 Manual Mirrors ...... 2-15 Power Door Locks ...... 2-8 Trailer-Tow Mirrors ...... 2-15 Cargo Door Relocking ...... 2-8 Power Mirrors ...... 2-15 Delayed Locking ...... 2-8 Heated Mirrors ...... 2-16 Automatic Door Locks ...... 2-8 Lockout Protection ...... 2-9 Safety Locks ...... 2-9 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks If you are locked out of the vehicle, call the Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Keys Program (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside Assistance { WARNING Program (Mexico) on page 13‑10. Leaving children in a vehicle with Remote Keyless Entry the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. Children or others (RKE) System could be badly injured or even See Radio Frequency Statement on killed. They could operate the page 13‑19 for information power windows or other controls regarding Part 15 of the Federal The key is used for the ignition and or even make the vehicle move. Communications Commission (FCC) all door locks. The windows will function with the rules and Industry Canada keys in the ignition and children The key has a bar-coded key tag Standards RSS-210/220/310. could be seriously injured or killed that the dealer or qualified locksmith If there is a decrease in the if caught in the path of a closing can use to make new keys. Store RKE operating range: window. Do not leave the keys in this information in a safe place, not in the vehicle. . Check the distance. The a vehicle with children. transmitter may be too far from See your dealer if a replacement the vehicle. key or additional key is needed. . Check the location. Other Notice: If the keys get locked in vehicles or objects may be the vehicle, it may have to be blocking the signal. damaged to get them out. Always carry a spare key. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3

. Check the transmitter's battery. K (Unlock): Press to unlock the See “Battery Replacement” later K in this section. driver door. If is pressed again within five seconds, all remaining . If the transmitter is still not doors unlock. working correctly, see your dealer or a qualified technician The interior lamps come on and for service. stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled Remote Keyless Entry through the DIC, the parking lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking (RKE) System Operation has occurred. See Vehicle The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Personalization on page 5‑42 for transmitter functions work up to RKE Transmitter With Remote additional information. 60 m (195 feet) away from the Start Shown j (Cargo Door): Press to unlock vehicle. only the cargo doors. Q (Lock): Press once to lock all There are other conditions which doors. If enabled through the Driver / (Remote Vehicle Start): can affect the performance of the Information Center (DIC), the For vehicles with this feature, transmitter. See Remote Keyless parking lamps flash once to indicate press and then press and hold / Entry (RKE) System on page 2 2. Q ‑ locking has occurred. within five seconds to start the The horn may chirp when is engine from outside the vehicle Q using the RKE transmitter. See pressed again within five seconds. Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 5 See Vehicle Personalization on ‑ for additional information. page 5‑42 for additional information. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Programming Transmitters to Battery Replacement Alarm): Press and release to the Vehicle Replace the battery if the locate the vehicle. The turn signal Only RKE transmitters programmed REPLACE BATTERY IN lamps flash and the horn sounds to the vehicle will work. If a REMOTE KEY message displays three times. transmitter is lost or stolen, a in the DIC. See “REPLACE Press and hold L for more than replacement can be purchased and BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” two seconds to activate the panic programmed through your dealer. under Key and Lock Messages on alarm. The turn signal lamps flash When the replacement transmitter is page 5‑37 for additional information. and the horn sounds repeatedly for programmed to the vehicle, all Notice: When replacing the 30 seconds. The alarm turns off remaining transmitters must also be battery, do not touch any of the when the ignition is moved to programmed. Any lost or stolen circuitry on the transmitter. transmitters no longer work once the ON/RUN or L is pressed again. Static from your body could new transmitter is programmed. damage the transmitter. The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF Each vehicle can have up to for the panic alarm to work. four transmitters programmed to it. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5

2. Remove the old battery. Do not Check local regulations for any use a metal object. requirements on remote starting 3. Insert the new battery, positive of vehicles. side facing down. Replace with a Do not use the remote start CR2032 or equivalent battery. feature if the vehicle is low on fuel. 4. Snap the transmitter back The vehicle may run out of fuel. together. If the vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE transmitter Remote Vehicle Start functions will have an increased range of operation. However, the This vehicle may have a remote range may be less while the vehicle start feature. This feature allows you is running. To replace the battery: to start the engine from outside the vehicle. It may also start the There are other conditions which 1. Separate the transmitter with a vehicle's heating or air conditioning can affect the performance of the flat, thin object, such as a flat systems. See Climate Control transmitter, see Remote Keyless head screwdriver. Systems on page 8‑1 for additional Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 for . Carefully insert the tool into information. additional information. the notch located along the Laws in some local communities parting line of the may restrict the use of remote transmitter. Do not insert starters. For example, some laws the tool too far. Stop as may require a person using remote soon as resistance is felt. start to have the vehicle in view . Twist the tool until the when doing so. transmitter is separated. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): 3. If it is the first remote start since After the engine has been remote This button will be on the RKE the vehicle has been driven, started two times, the ignition switch transmitter if you have remote start. repeat these steps, while the must be turned to ON/RUN and then engine is still running, to extend back to LOCK/OFF using the key To start the engine using the remote the engine running time by before the remote start procedure start feature: 10 minutes. Remote start can be can be used again. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at extended one time. To manually shut off the engine after the vehicle. After entering the vehicle during a a remote start: remote start, insert and turn the key 2. Press and release Q on the . Aim the RKE transmitter at the to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle. transmitter, then immediately vehicle and press / until the press and hold / for After a remote start, the engine parking lamps turn off. four seconds or until the turn will automatically shut off after . Turn on the hazard warning signal lamps flash. 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done or the key is flashers. See Hazard Warning When the engine starts, the inserted into the ignition switch Flashers on page 6‑4. parking lamps will turn on and and turned to ON/RUN. . Insert the key into the ignition remain on while the engine is switch and turn the switch to running. The doors will be The maximum number of remote ON/RUN and then back to locked. The airbag readiness starts between ignition cycles with LOCK/OFF. light will be on during a remote the key is two. start. It should turn off when the If the remote start procedure The remote vehicle start feature will ignition is turned to ON/RUN. is used again before the first not operate if: See Airbag Readiness Light on 10 minute time frame has ended, . The key is in the ignition. page 5‑18 for more information. the first 10 minutes will immediately . expire and the second 10 minute The hood is open. time frame will start. . The hazard warning flashers are on. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7

. There is an emission control system malfunction. See WARNING (Continued) Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 5‑21. So, all passengers should wear safety belts properly . The engine coolant temperature and the doors should be is too high. locked whenever the . The oil pressure is low. vehicle is driven. . Two remote vehicle starts have . Young children who get into already been provided. unlocked vehicles may be To lock the door from the inside, unable to get out. A child can slide the manual lever on the door Door Locks be overcome by extreme heat down. To unlock the door, slide the and can suffer permanent manual lever up. { injuries or even death from WARNING heat stroke. Always lock the From the outside, use the key. Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it. If the vehicle is equipped with dangerous. . Outsiders can easily enter keyless entry, see Remote Keyless through an unlocked door Entry (RKE) System Operation on . Passengers, especially page 2‑3. children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors vehicle. When a door is can help prevent this from locked, the handle will not happening. open it. The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked. (Continued) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Power Door Locks Delayed Locking Automatic Door Locks On vehicles with power door When locking the doors with the The vehicle may have an automatic locks, the switches are located power lock switch and a door open, lock/unlock feature. This feature can on the doors. the doors will lock five seconds after be programmed using the Driver T : Press the bottom of the switch the last door is closed. You will hear Information Center (DIC). See to lock all the doors at once. Press three chimes to signal that the Vehicle Personalization on the top of the switch to unlock all delayed locking feature is in use. page 5‑42 for more information on DIC programming. the doors at once. Pressing the power lock switch e When a door is locked, the inside twice or the lock button Q on the door handle will not work. RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed locking feature and Cargo Door Relocking immediately lock all the doors. If the cargo door is open when the This feature will not operate if the lock button is pressed on the door key is in the ignition. or the RKE transmitter, all doors will This feature can be programmed lock except the cargo door. The using the Driver Information cargo door will only lock when they Center (DIC). See “Door Lock are closed or when the delayed Delay” under Vehicle locking feature functions. Personalization on page 5‑42. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9

Lockout Protection Safety Locks Move the button to the left for the driver side door or to the right for This feature protects you from Security locks are located on the the passenger side door to return locking the key in the vehicle front portion of the 60/40 side the door locks to normal operation. when the key is in the ignition and swing-out door or the side a door is open. sliding door. If the power lock switch is pressed when either the driver, passenger, or rear door is open, all the doors will lock and then the driver door will unlock. This feature does not include the side cargo door. If the vehicle has an ambulance package, this feature is disabled.

Side Sliding Door 60/40 Swing-Out Side For the side sliding door, move the button up to engage the security Door — Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar feature. Move the button down to return the door locks to normal For the 60/40 side swing-out door, operation. move the button to the right for the driver side door or to the left for the passenger side door to engage the security feature. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

Doors Side Door (60/40 Swing-Out)

To open the front portion of a To open the rear portion of a 60/40 door from the inside, pull the 60/40 door from the outside, pull the handle toward you and push the handle on the side of the rear door door open. and pull the door toward you. To close the 60/40 side doors, close the rear door first. Then close the To open the front portion of a front door. Check to make sure that 60/40 door from the outside, pull out both doors are completely closed. on the handle and open the door. The swing-out doors have a check strap assembly in the door frame to keep the door from opening beyond 90 degrees. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11

To open the door beyond To close the sliding side door from Then, slide the door toward the 90 degrees, close the door partially, the outside, use the handle to slide rear of the vehicle. pull the check strap toward you and the door toward the front of To close the sliding side door from then open the door. When the door the vehicle. the inside, grasp the handle and is closed, the check strap will When the door is closed, it will be slide the door toward the front of automatically re-engage. flush with the side of the body. the vehicle. Sliding Door Make sure the door is completely closed before driving away.

To open the sliding side door from the inside, pull the handle toward To open the sliding side door from the rear of the vehicle. the outside, pull the handle toward the rear of the vehicle and slide the door open. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

Rear Doors WARNING (Continued) { WARNING . Young children who get into Unlocked doors can be unlocked vehicles may be dangerous. unable to get out. A child can . Passengers, especially be overcome by extreme heat children, can easily open the and can suffer permanent doors and fall out of a moving injuries or even death from vehicle. When a door is heat stroke. Always lock the locked, the handle will not vehicle whenever leaving it. open it. The chance of being . Outsiders can easily enter To open the driver side rear door, thrown out of the vehicle in a through an unlocked door pull the latch release at the inside crash is increased if the when you slow down or stop edge of the door. doors are not locked. So, all the vehicle. Locking the doors passengers should wear can help prevent this from To close the rear doors, close the safety belts properly and the happening. driver side rear door first. Then doors should be locked close the passenger side rear door. whenever the vehicle Check to make sure both doors are is driven. To open the rear doors from the completely closed. outside, pull the handle toward you (Continued) to open the passenger side rear door first. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-13

Vehicle Security You do not have to manually arm or If the engine still does not start with disarm the system. the other key, the vehicle needs This vehicle has theft-deterrent The security light will come on if service. If the vehicle does start, the features; however, they do not make there is a problem with arming or first key may be faulty. See your it impossible to steal. disarming the theft-deterrent dealer or a locksmith who can system. service the PASS-Key III+ to have a Immobilizer new key made. See Fuses and When the PASS-Key III+ system Circuit Breakers on page 10‑45. See Radio Frequency Statement on senses that someone is using the page 13‑19 for information wrong key, it shuts down the It is possible for the PASS-Key III+ regarding Part 15 of the Federal vehicle's starter and fuel systems. decoder to learn the transponder Communications Commission (FCC) The starter will not work and fuel will value of a new or replacement key. rules and Industry Canada stop being delivered to the engine. Up to 10 keys may be programmed Standards RSS-210/220/310. Anyone using a trial-and-error for the vehicle. This procedure is for method to start the vehicle will be learning additional keys only. If all Immobilizer Operation discouraged because of the high the currently programmed keys are number of electrical key codes. lost or do not operate, you must see This vehicle is equipped with the your dealer or a locksmith who ® PASS-Key III+ (Personalized If the engine does not start and can service PASS-Key III+ to have Automotive Security System) the security message comes on, keys made and programmed to theft-deterrent system. the key may have a damaged the system. PASS-Key III+ is a passive transponder. Turn the ignition off theft deterrent system. and try again. See your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key III+ to get a The system is automatically If the engine still does not start, and new key blank that is cut exactly armed when the key is removed the key appears to be undamaged, as the ignition key that operates from the ignition. try another ignition key. At this time, the system. you may also want to check the instrument panel PASS KEY fuse. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (14,1)

2-14 Keys, Doors and Windows

To program the new key: 4. Insert the key to be programmed Exterior Mirrors 1 and turn it to ON/RUN within 1. Verify the new key has 10 seconds of removing the stamped on it. previous key. Convex Mirrors 2. Insert the original, already The security message will turn programmed key into the ignition off once the key has been { WARNING lock cylinder and start the programmed. It may not be engine. If the engine will A convex mirror can make things, apparent that the security like other vehicles, look farther not start, see your dealer message went on due to how away than they really are. If you for service. quickly the key is programmed. cut too sharply into the right lane, 3. After the engine has started, turn 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if you could hit a vehicle on the the key to LOCK/OFF and additional keys are to be right. Check the inside mirror or remove the key. programmed. glance over your shoulder before If you lose or damage a changing lanes. PASS-Key III+ key, see your dealer or a locksmith who can service The passenger side mirror is convex PASS-Key III+ to have a new shaped. A convex mirror's surface is key made. curved so more can be seen from Do not leave the key or device the driver seat. that disarms or deactivates the theft-deterrent system in the vehicle. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (15,1)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-15

Manual Mirrors Trailer-Tow Mirrors Power Mirrors Adjust the mirrors by pressing the mirror up and down and left and right. The mirrors can be manually folded in or out. On the lower portion of each mirror is an auxiliary convex mirror. A convex mirror's surface is curved so you can see more from the driver seat. The auxiliary convex mirrors can be adjusted manually by pressing the mirror. Vehicles with towing mirrors can be Vehicles with outside power mirrors adjusted manually for a clear view have controls located on the driver of the objects behind you. side door. On the lower portion of each mirror Select each mirror by turning the there is an auxiliary convex mirror knob clockwise for the passenger that can be adjusted manually to side mirror or counterclockwise for provide an extended field of view. the driver side mirror. The center The mirrors can be manually folded position is neutral. in or out. Then, adjust the mirror angle by moving the knob in the desired direction. The auxiliary convex mirrors can only be adjusted manually. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (16,1)

2-16 Keys, Doors and Windows

Heated Mirrors Interior Mirrors Windows For vehicles with heated mirrors: Manual Rearview Mirror { < (Rear Defogger): Press to heat WARNING the mirrors. Hold the inside rearview mirror in Leaving children, helpless adults, the center to move it for a clearer An indicator light in the button lights or pets in a vehicle with the view behind the vehicle. Adjust the when the outside heated mirrors are windows closed is dangerous. activated. mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind. Push the They can be overcome by the See “Rear Window Defogger” tab forward for daytime use and extreme heat and suffer under Climate Control Systems on pull it for nighttime use. permanent injuries or even page 8‑1 for more information. death from heat stroke. If you have a cargo van without the rear door glass, the vehicle may (Continued) not have an inside rearview mirror. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (17,1)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-17

Manual Windows WARNING (Continued) Operate the manual windows Never leave a child, a helpless by turning the hand crank on adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, each door to raise or lower the especially with the windows side door windows. closed in warm or hot weather. Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many If the vehicle has power windows, reasons. Children or others could the controls are located on each of be badly injured or even killed. the side doors. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even The driver door has a switch for the make the vehicle move. The passenger window also. The power windows will function and they windows will work when the ignition could be seriously injured or killed has been turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when if caught in the path of a closing Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is window. Do not leave keys in a active. See Retained Accessory vehicle with children. Power (RAP) on page 9‑21. When there are children in the Press the switch to lower rear seat use the window lockout the window. button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows. Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the window. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (18,1)

2-18 Keys, Doors and Windows

Express‐Down Swing-Out Windows The driver window switch also has an express-down feature that allows the window to be lowered without holding the switch. Press fully and release the window switch marked AUTO to activate the express-down mode. This mode can be cancelled at any time by pulling up on the switch. To open the window part way, lightly tap the switch until the window is at the desired position. Rear Swing‐Out Windows Side Swing-Out Window The vehicle also has rear swing‐out windows. The rear swing-out To open the side door swing-out windows work the same way as the window, pull up on the latch at the side swing out window, but the latch edge of the window. Swing the is located at the bottom edge of window out and push down on the the window. latch to lock the window into place. To close the window, pull the latch toward you and push down on the latch to lock it. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (19,1)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-19

Enhanced Technology The following table shows laminated glass location, based on vehicle model Glass and options. The vehicle may be equipped with Vehicle Configuration ETG Locations Enhanced Technology Glass (ETG). Eight Seat Passenger Vans Sliding door forward window ETG is part of the overall occupant Twelve and Fifteen Seat Sliding door forward window and protection system on passenger Passenger Vans rear-most side windows vans. ETG may help to keep passengers sitting next to these Long Wheelbase Cargo Vans Rear-most side windows fixed windows from being ejected through the glass in some, but not in all crashes. Even with this glass, Sun Visors Visor Vanity Mirror safety belts must still be worn at all times. For passenger vans, use only To block out glare, swing down the The vehicle may have visor vanity ETG glass approved for the vehicle sun visors. You can also swing them mirrors, with or without lamps. for replacement when damaged. to the side. Lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on, if equipped. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (20,1)

2-20 Keys, Doors and Windows

2 NOTES Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-1

Airbag System Lower Anchors and Tethers Seats and Airbag System ...... 3-25 for Children (LATCH Restraints Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-27 System) ...... 3-52 When Should an Airbag Replacing LATCH System Inflate? ...... 3-28 Parts After a Crash ...... 3-59 Head Restraints What Makes an Airbag Securing Child Restraints Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Inflate? ...... 3-30 (Rear Seat Position) ...... 3-60 How Does an Airbag Securing Child Restraints Front Seats Restrain? ...... 3-30 (Front Seat-Passenger Seat Adjustment ...... 3-2 What Will You See After an Sensing System) ...... 3-62 Power Seat Adjustment ...... 3-3 Airbag Inflates? ...... 3-31 Securing Child Restraints Reclining Seatbacks ...... 3-3 Airbag On-Off Switch ...... 3-32 (Front Seat-Airbag On/Off Passenger Sensing Switch) ...... 3-65 Rear Seats System ...... 3-35 Rear Seats ...... 3-5 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Safety Belts Vehicle ...... 3-40 Safety Belts ...... 3-8 Adding Equipment to the How to Wear Safety Belts Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-41 Properly ...... 3-12 Airbag System Check ...... 3-42 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 3-18 Replacing Airbag System Safety Belt Use During Parts After a Crash ...... 3-42 Pregnancy ...... 3-23 Child Restraints Safety Belt Extender ...... 3-23 Older Children ...... 3-43 Safety System Check ...... 3-23 Infants and Young Safety Belt Care ...... 3-24 Children ...... 3-46 Replacing Safety Belt System Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-48 Parts After a Crash ...... 3-24 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-50 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints Front Seats On vehicles with factory installed seats, the front seats have built-in Seat Adjustment head restraints that are not adjustable in the outboard { WARNING seating positions. You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a To adjust the seat: pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver seat only when 1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. the vehicle is not moving. 2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar. 3. Try to move the seat back and forth to be sure the seat is locked in place. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-3

Power Seat Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving. To recline the seatback: 1. Lift the lever on the inboard To adjust a power seat, if available, side of the seat. use the controls on the front of 2. Move the seatback to the the seat: { WARNING desired position, and then . Move the center knob to the If either seatback is not locked, it release the lever to lock the right or left to move the seat could move forward in a sudden seatback in place. forward or rearward. stop or crash. That could cause 3. Push and pull on the seatback to . Move the center knob up or injury to the person sitting there. make sure it is locked. down to raise or lower the seat. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they . Move the right or left lever up or are locked. down to raise or lower the front or rear of the seat cushion. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

3-4 Seats and Restraints

To return the seatback to the upright position: WARNING (Continued) 1. Lift the lever fully without The lap belt cannot do its job applying pressure to the either. In a crash, the belt could seatback, and the seatback will go up over your abdomen. The return to the upright position. belt forces would be there, not at 2. Push and pull on the seatback to your pelvic bones. This could make sure it is locked. cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the { WARNING vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well Sitting in a reclined position when back in the seat and wear the the vehicle is in motion can be Do not have a seatback reclined if safety belt properly. the vehicle is moving. dangerous. Even when buckled up, the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined like this. The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. (Continued) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-5

Rear Seats Removing the Rear Seat Disconnect the mini-latch plates for the lap‐shoulder belts on the bench seat to be removed.

Three-Passenger Seat Shown Three-Passenger Seat Shown The left side pin has a gray cap The right side pin has a with a black “L” marked on it. black cap with a white “R” marked on it. On a four-passenger seat, each half of the seat has a set of pins. The left side has a set 1. To do this, press the tip of a marked “L,” and the right side key into the release hole of the has a set marked “R”. safety belt buckle while pulling up on the safety belt. If the vehicle has floor mats, the pins are under a flap that has 2. Locate the pins. been cut into the mat. On a three-passenger seat there are two pins on the inboard sides of the rear seats. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

3-6 Seats and Restraints

3. Pull the pin handle up to Reinstalling the Rear Seats disengage the pin from the retaining clip, and then pull { WARNING the pin out. 4. Repeat this procedure for A seat that is not locked into the other pins. place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop. 5. Pull the seat rearward about People in the vehicle could be 5 cm (2 in), and then lift the injured. Be sure to lock the seat seat from the floor rails. into place properly when 6. Remove the seat from installing it. the vehicle. 7. For the second- and third-row seats, stow the safety belt latch by attaching the clip on the { WARNING safety belt latch to the trim just A safety belt that is improperly inside the side door. routed, not properly attached, For the last row of seats, stow or twisted will not provide the the safety belt latch plate on the protection needed in a crash. clip at the window trim. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear seatback, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-7

1. Position the seat into the open slots in both rails. Push the seat forward in the rail, hooking both seat bases onto the pins inside of the rails. 2. Locate the hole in the rail to install the locking pins at the rear of the seat base. If the vehicle has floor mats, pull the flap that has been cut into the mat. 3. Insert the locking pins into the seat base and push the seat to Three-Passenger Seat Shown Three-Passenger Seat Shown line up the pins with the base. 4. Push the pin(s) marked 5. Push the pin(s) marked On a three-passenger seat, R down until they are in L down until they are in the pin with the black cap “ ” “ ” the retaining clip. the retaining clip. marked “R” must be installed on the right side and the pin with 6. If the vehicle has a floor mat, the gray cap marked “L” on put the flap back to its original the left side. position. On a four-passenger seat, 7. Repeat this procedure for the pins marked “R” must be the other seat base. installed on the half of the seat on the right side. The pins marked “L” must be installed on the half of the seat on the left side. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

3-8 Seats and Restraints

8. Connect the mini-latch plates Safety Belts for the lap-shoulder belts by { WARNING inserting the latch plates into the This section of the manual mini-buckles attached at the describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride outboard positions of the bench properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside seat. Do not twist the belt. things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more 9. Check that all locking pins are { WARNING likely to be seriously injured or locked into place before killed. Do not allow people to ride operating the vehicle. Do not let anyone ride where a in any area of your vehicle that is safety belt cannot be worn not equipped with seats and properly. In a crash, if you or your safety belts. Be sure everyone in passenger(s) are not wearing the vehicle is in a seat and using safety belts, the injuries can be a safety belt properly. much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be This vehicle has indicators as a ejected from the vehicle. You and reminder to buckle the safety belts. your passenger(s) can be See Safety Belt Reminders on seriously injured or killed. In the page 5‑17 for additional information. same crash, you might not be, In most states and in all Canadian if you are buckled up. Always provinces, the law requires wearing fasten your safety belt, and check safety belts. Here is why: that your passenger(s) are restrained properly too. You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-9

A few crashes are mild, and some Why Safety Belts Work crashes can be so serious that even When you ride in or on anything, buckled up, a person would not you go as fast as it goes. survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without safety belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot! Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

3-10 Seats and Restraints

Get it up to speed. Then stop the The person keeps going until or the instrument panel... vehicle. The rider does not stop. stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-11

Questions and Answers About Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Safety Belts should I have to wear safety belts? Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a A: Airbags are supplemental safety belt? systems only; so they work with safety belts — not instead of A: You could be — whether you are them. Whether or not an airbag wearing a safety belt or not. But is provided, all occupants still your chance of being conscious have to buckle up to get the during and after an accident, so most protection. That is true not you can unbuckle and get out, is only in frontal collisions, but much greater if you are belted. especially in side and other And you can unbuckle a safety or the safety belts! collisions. belt, even if you are With safety belts, you slow down upside down. as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

3-12 Seats and Restraints

Q: If I am a good driver, and I How to Wear Safety Belts It is very important for all occupants never drive far from home, to buckle up. Statistics show that why should I wear safety Properly unbelted people are hurt more often belts? This section is only for people of in crashes than those who are A: You may be an excellent driver, adult size. wearing safety belts. but if you are in a crash — even Be aware that there are special Occupants who are not buckled up one that is not your fault — you things to know about safety belts can be thrown out of the vehicle in a and your passenger(s) can be and children. And there are different crash. And they can strike others hurt. Being a good driver does rules for smaller children and in the vehicle who are wearing not protect you from things infants. If a child will be riding in safety belts. beyond your control, such as the vehicle, see Older Children on First, before you or your bad drivers. page 3‑43 or Infants and Young passenger(s) wear a safety belt, Most accidents occur within Children on page 3‑46. Follow those there is important information you 40 km (25 miles) of home. rules for everyone's protection. should know. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 65 km/h (40 mph). Safety belts are for everyone. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-13

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. { WARNING These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. You can be seriously hurt if the shoulder belt is too loose. In a The shoulder belt locks if there is a crash, you would move forward sudden stop or crash. too much, which could increase Q: What is wrong with this? injury. The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body.

Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause A: The shoulder belt is too loose. serious or even fatal injuries. It will not give as much protection this way. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (14,1)

3-14 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if the lap belt is too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will A: The belt is buckled in the not give nearly as much wrong buckle. protection this way. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (15,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-15

Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING { WARNING

You can be seriously injured if the You can be seriously injured if the belt is buckled in the wrong place belt goes over an armrest like like this. In a crash, the belt would this. The belt would be much too go up over your abdomen. The high. In a crash, you can slide belt forces would be there, not on under the belt. The belt force the pelvic bones. This could would then be applied on the cause serious internal injuries. abdomen, not on the pelvic Always buckle the belt into the bones, and that could cause buckle nearest you. serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (16,1)

3-16 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING

You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. A: The shoulder belt is worn under The shoulder belt should go A: The belt is behind the body. the arm. It should be worn over over the shoulder and across the shoulder at all times. the chest. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (17,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-17

Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING { WARNING

You can be seriously injured by You can be seriously injured by a not wearing the lap-shoulder belt twisted belt. In a crash, you would properly. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt not be restrained by the shoulder to spread impact forces. If a belt belt. Your body could move too is twisted, make it straight so it far forward increasing the chance can work properly, or ask your of head and neck injury. You dealer to fix it. might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is twisted across go over the shoulder and across the body. the chest. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (18,1)

3-18 Seats and Restraints

Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let All seating positions in the vehicle it get twisted. have a lap-shoulder belt. If you are using a rear seating position with The lap-shoulder belt may lock if a detachable safety belt and the you pull the belt across you very safety belt is not attached, see quickly. If this happens, let the “Reinstalling the Rear Seats” belt go back slightly to unlock it. under Rear Seats on page 3‑5 for Then pull the belt across you instructions on reconnecting the more slowly. safety belt to the mini-buckle. If the shoulder portion of a The following instructions explain passenger belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint how to wear a lap-shoulder belt 3. Push the latch plate into the properly. locking feature may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go buckle until it clicks. 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is back all the way and start again. Pull up on the latch plate to adjustable, so you can sit up make sure it is secure. If the belt straight. To see how, see is not long enough, see Safety Seats in the Index. “ ” Belt Extender on page 3‑23. Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (19,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-19

4. If equipped with a shoulder belt Safety Belt Height Adjuster height adjuster, move it to the The vehicle has a safety belt height height that is right for you. adjuster for the driver and right front See Safety Belt Height “ passenger positions. Adjuster” later in this section for instructions on use and Adjust the height so the shoulder important safety information. portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt should be close to, but not contacting, the neck. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See How To unlatch the belt, push the button to Wear Safety Belts Properly on on the buckle. The belt should page 3‑12. return to its stowed position. Slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt is not in use. The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall. 5. To make the lap part tight, pull Before a door is closed, be sure the up on the shoulder belt. safety belt is out of the way. If a It may be necessary to pull door is slammed against a safety stitching on the safety belt belt, damage can occur to both the through the latch plate to fully safety belt and the vehicle. tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (20,1)

3-20 Seats and Restraints

After the adjuster is set to the Although the safety belt desired position, try to move it down pretensioners cannot be seen, they without pushing in to make sure it are part of the safety belt assembly. has locked into position. They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a Safety Belt Pretensioners moderate to severe frontal, near If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle frontal, or rear crash if the threshold Weight Rating) of the vehicle conditions for pretensioner is below 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) activation are met. And, if the then the vehicle has safety belt vehicle has side impact airbags, pretensioners for the front outboard safety belt pretensioners can help occupants. See Vehicle Load Limits tighten the safety belts in a side on page 9 12 to locate the crash or a rollover event. To move it down, pull on the ‑ certification label which contains center adjuster control labeled Pretensioners work only once. the GVWR. PULL. You can move the height If the pretensioners are activated in adjuster up just by pushing up on a crash, the pretensioners and the shoulder belt guide. possibly other parts of the safety belt system will need to be replaced. See Replacing Safety Belt System Parts After a Crash on page 3‑24. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (21,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-21

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides. If not, they are available through your dealer. The guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed and properly adjusted, the comfort guide positions the shoulder belt away from the neck and head. Here is how to install a comfort 2. Place the guide over the belt, guide to the safety belt: and insert the two edges of the 1. Locate the guide in a pocket on belt into the slots of the guide. the side of the seatback. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (22,1)

3-22 Seats and Restraints

Make sure the shoulder portion WARNING (Continued) of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt The person wearing the belt could should be close to, but not be seriously injured. The shoulder contacting, the neck. belt should go over the shoulder To remove and store the comfort and across the chest. These parts guide, squeeze the belt edges of the body are best able to take together so that the safety belt can belt restraining forces. be removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the side of the seatback.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. (Continued) 4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as described previously in this section. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (23,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-23

Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check to protect the mother. When a safety Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely Now and then, check that the safety Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a belt reminder light, safety belts, including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for buckles, latch plates, retractors, and occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety anchorages are working properly. be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them Look for any other loose or wear safety belts. properly. damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn or frayed If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in a around you, you should use it. crash. They can rip apart under But if a safety belt is not long impact forces. If a belt is torn or enough, your dealer will order you frayed, get a new one right away. an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5‑17 for more long enough for you. To help avoid information. personal injury, do not let someone Keep safety belts clean and dry. else use it, and use it only for the See Safety Belt Care on page 3 24. seat it is made to fit. The extender ‑ A pregnant woman should wear a has been designed for adults. Never lap-shoulder belt, and the lap use it for securing child seats. To portion should be worn as low as wear it, attach it to the regular safety possible, below the rounding, belt. For more information, see the throughout the pregnancy. instruction sheet that comes with the extender. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (24,1)

3-24 Seats and Restraints

Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt See your dealer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts After a or replaced. Crash New parts and repairs may be { WARNING necessary even if the safety belt { WARNING Do not bleach or dye safety belts. system was not being used at the time of the crash. It may severely weaken them. In A crash can damage the a crash, they might not be able to safety belt system in the vehicle. Have the safety belt pretensioners provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system checked if the vehicle has been in a Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the crash, or if the airbag readiness light soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in stays on after you start the vehicle serious injury or even death in or while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 18. a crash. To help make sure the ‑ safety belt systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.

After a minor crash, replacement of safety belts may not be necessary. But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (25,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-25

Airbag System . A roof-rail airbag for the driver, Here are the most important things the passenger seated directly to know about the airbag system: The vehicle has the following behind the driver, and the third airbag: row outboard passenger position { WARNING (passenger van equipped with a . A frontal airbag for the driver. sliding or hinged door). You can be severely injured or The vehicle may have the following . A roof-rail airbag for the right killed in a crash if you are not airbags: front passenger, the passenger wearing your safety belt — even . A frontal airbag for the right front seated directly behind the if you have airbags. Airbags are passenger. right front passenger, and the designed to work with safety third row outboard passenger . A roof-rail airbag for the driver belts, but do not replace them. position (passenger van (cargo van). Also, airbags are not designed to equipped with a hinged door). deploy in every crash. In some . A roof-rail airbag for the right crashes safety belts are your only front passenger position All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed restraint. See When Should an (cargo or passenger van in the trim or on an attached label Airbag Inflate? on page 3 28. equipped with a sliding door). ‑ near the deployment opening. If you have a passenger van Wearing your safety belt during a with a right front passenger For frontal airbags, the word crash helps reduce your chance AIRBAG will appear on the middle roof-rail airbag and a sliding of hitting things inside the vehicle part of the steering wheel for the door, you will also have a or being ejected from it. Airbags separate roof-rail airbag for the driver and on the instrument panel are “supplemental restraints” to for the right front passenger. passenger seated directly the safety belts. Everyone in your behind the right front passenger With roof-rail airbags, the word vehicle should wear a safety belt and the third row outboard AIRBAG will appear along the properly — whether or not there is passenger position. headliner or trim. an airbag for that person. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (26,1)

3-26 Seats and Restraints

{ WARNING { WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against, faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag Anyone who is up against, or when it inflates can be seriously very close to, any airbag when it injured or killed. Airbags plus There is an airbag readiness light inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection on the instrument panel, which or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children, but shows the airbag symbol. close to the airbag, as you would not for young children and infants. be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle safety belt The system checks the airbag of your seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system is electrical system for malfunctions. Safety belts help keep you in designed for them. Young The light tells you if there is an position before and during a children and infants need the electrical problem. See Airbag crash. Always wear your safety protection that a child restraint Readiness Light on page 5‑18 for belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always more information. should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in the while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older the vehicle. Children on page 3‑43 or Infants Occupants should not lean on or and Young Children on sleep against the door or side page 3‑46. windows in seating positions with roof-rail airbags. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (27,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-27

Where Are the Airbags?

If the vehicle has one, the right front Driver Side Shown, Passenger passenger airbag is in the Side Similar The driver frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the If the vehicle is a cargo or middle of the steering wheel. passenger side. passenger van with a sliding door and it has a roof-rail airbag for the driver and right front passenger position, the roof-rail airbags are in the ceiling above the side window. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (28,1)

3-28 Seats and Restraints

For passenger vans with a sliding door, on the passenger side of the WARNING (Continued) vehicle, you will have a separate roof-rail airbag for the passenger through any door or window seated directly behind the right front opening. If you do, the path of passenger and the third row an inflating roof-rail airbag will outboard passenger position. be blocked.

{ WARNING When Should an Airbag If something is between an Inflate? occupant and an airbag, the Frontal airbags are designed to Driver Side Shown, Passenger airbag might not inflate properly inflate in moderate to severe frontal Side Similar or it might force the object into or near-frontal crashes to help that person causing severe injury reduce the potential for severe If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags or even death. The path of an injuries mainly to the driver or right for the driver, right front passenger, inflating airbag must be kept front passenger head and chest. passengers behind the driver and However, they are only designed to right front passenger, and the third clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an inflate if the impact exceeds a row outboard passengers, the predetermined deployment roof-rail airbags are in the ceiling airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel threshold. Deployment thresholds above the side windows. On the are used to predict how severe a driver side of the vehicle, there is hub or on or near any other airbag covering. crash is likely to be in time for the one single roof-rail airbag for either airbags to inflate and help restrain vehicles with a hinged door or a Never secure anything to the roof the occupants. sliding door. of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags Whether the frontal airbags will or by routing a rope or tie down should deploy is not based on how (Continued) fast the vehicle is traveling. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (29,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-29

It depends largely on what you hit, Thresholds can also vary with Dual-stage airbags adjust the the direction of the impact, and how specific vehicle design. restraint according to crash severity. quickly the vehicle slows down. Frontal airbags are not intended to The vehicle has electronic frontal Frontal airbags may inflate at inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear sensors, which help the sensing different crash speeds. impacts, or in many side impacts. system distinguish between a For example: moderate frontal impact and a more Single Stage vs. Dual Stage severe frontal impact. For moderate . If the vehicle hits a stationary Airbags frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags object, the airbags could inflate inflate at a level less than full at a different crash speed than if Depending on the weight of the vehicle, you will have either deployment. For more severe frontal the vehicle hits a moving object. impacts, full deployment occurs. “Single Stage Airbags” or . If the vehicle hits an object that “Dual Stage Airbags.” Vehicles that The vehicle may or may not have deforms, the airbags could have a passenger sensing system roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System inflate at a different crash speed also have dual stage airbags. See on page 3‑25. Roof-rail airbags are than if the vehicle hits an object Passenger Airbag Status Indicator intended to inflate in moderate to that does not deform. on page 5‑20 or Passenger Sensing severe side crashes. In addition, . If the vehicle hits a narrow object System on page 3‑35. these roof-rail airbags are intended (like a pole), the airbags could If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight to inflate during a rollover. Roof-rail inflate at a different crash speed Rating) of the vehicle is 3 855 kg airbags will inflate if the crash than if the vehicle hits a wide (8,500 lb) or above, the vehicle may severity is above the system's object (like a wall). have single stage airbags. If the designed threshold level. The GVWR is below 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) threshold level can vary with . If the vehicle goes into an object specific vehicle design. at an angle, the airbags could then the vehicle may have dual inflate at a different crash speed stage airbags. You can find the Roof-rail airbags are not intended to than if the vehicle goes straight GVWR on the certification label on inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal into the object. the rear edge of the driver door. See impacts, or rear impacts. All roof-rail Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12 airbags will deploy when either side for more information. of the vehicle is struck. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (30,1)

3-30 Seats and Restraints

In any particular crash, no one can Frontal airbag modules are located Roof-rail airbags distribute the force say whether an airbag should have inside the steering wheel and of the impact more evenly over the inflated simply because of the instrument panel. For vehicles with occupant's upper body. damage to a vehicle or because roof-rail airbags, there are airbag Rollover capable roof-rail airbags of what the repair costs were. modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, are designed to help contain the For frontal airbags, inflation is near the side windows for the first, head and chest of occupants in the determined by what the vehicle hits, second, and third rows (if equipped). outboard seating positions in the the angle of the impact, and how See Where Are the Airbags? on first, second, and third rows, quickly the vehicle slows down. page 3‑27 for more information. if equipped. The rollover capable For roof-rail airbags, deployment is roof-rail airbags are designed to determined by the location and How Does an Airbag help reduce the risk of full or partial severity of the side impact. Restrain? ejection in rollover events, although In a rollover event, roof rail airbag no system can prevent all such ‐ In moderate to severe frontal or deployment is determined by the ejections. near frontal collisions, even belted direction of the roll. occupants can contact the steering But airbags would not help in wheel or the instrument panel. In many types of collisions, primarily What Makes an Airbag moderate to severe side collisions, because the occupant's motion is Inflate? even belted occupants can contact not toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on In a deployment event, the sensing the inside of the vehicle. page 3 28 for more information. system sends an electrical signal Airbags supplement the protection ‑ triggering a release of gas from the provided by safety belts. Frontal Airbags should never be regarded inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbags distribute the force of the as anything more than a supplement airbag causing the bag to break out impact more evenly over the to safety belts. of the cover and deploy. The inflator, occupant's upper body, stopping the airbag, and related hardware are the occupant more gradually. all part of the airbag module. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (31,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-31

What Will You See After You can lock the doors, and turn off { WARNING the interior lamps and the hazard an Airbag Inflates? warning flashers by using the After the frontal airbags inflate, they When an airbag inflates, there controls for those features. quickly deflate, so quickly that some may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems people may not even realize an { WARNING airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags for people with a history of may still be at least partially inflated asthma or other breathing trouble. A crash severe enough to inflate for some time after they deploy. To avoid this, everyone in the the airbags may have also Some components of the airbag vehicle should get out as soon as damaged important functions in module may be hot for several it is safe to do so. If you have the vehicle, such as the fuel minutes. For location of the airbag breathing problems but cannot system, brake and steering modules, see What Makes an get out of the vehicle after an systems, etc. Even if the vehicle Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑30. airbag inflates, then get fresh air appears to be drivable after a The parts of the airbag that come by opening a window or a door. moderate crash, there may be into contact with you may be warm, If you experience breathing concealed damage that could but not too hot to touch. There may problems following an airbag make it difficult to safely operate be some smoke and dust coming deployment, you should seek the vehicle. from the vents in the deflated medical attention. airbags. Airbag inflation does not Use caution if you should attempt prevent the driver from seeing out of to restart the engine after a crash The vehicle has a feature that may has occurred. the windshield or being able to steer automatically unlock the doors the vehicle, nor does it prevent (if equipped with power door locks), people from leaving the vehicle. turn on the interior lamps and In many crashes severe enough to hazard warning flashers, and inflate the airbag, windshields are shut off the fuel system after the broken by vehicle deformation. airbags inflate. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (32,1)

3-32 Seats and Restraints

Additional windshield breakage may an airbag system will not work also occur from the right front properly. See your dealer passenger airbag. for service. . Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag Airbag On-Off Switch inflates, you will need some new If the instrument panel has one of parts for the airbag system. the switches pictured in the If you do not get them, the airbag following illustrations, the vehicle system will not be there to help has an airbag on-off switch that you protect you in another crash. can use to manually turn on or off A new system will include airbag the right front passenger airbag. modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for Canada and Mexico the vehicle covers the need to If the vehicle does not have an replace other parts. airbag on-off switch, it may have a . The vehicle has a crash sensing passenger sensing system. See and diagnostic module which Passenger Sensing System on records information after a page 3‑35. crash. See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 13‑17 and Event Data Recorders on page 13‑18. . Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems. United States Improper service can mean that Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (33,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-33

This switch should only be turned to Child age 1 to 12. A child . Makes the potential harm from the off position if the person in the age 1 to 12 must ride in the the passenger airbag in a crash right front passenger position is a front seat because: greater than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and member of a passenger risk group . My vehicle has no rear seat; identified by the national allowing the passenger, even if government as follows: . Although children ages 1 to belted, to hit the dashboard or 12 ride in the rear seat(s) windshield in a crash. Infant. An infant (less than whenever possible, children 1 year old) must ride in the ages 1 to 12 sometimes must { WARNING front seat because: ride in the front because no . My vehicle has no rear seat; space is available in the rear If the right front passenger airbag seat(s) of my vehicle; or is turned off for a person who is . My vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a . The child has a medical not in a risk group identified by rear-facing infant seat; or condition which, according to the the national government, that child's physician, makes it person will not have the extra . The infant has a medical necessary for the child to ride in protection of an airbag. In a condition which, according to the the front seat so that the driver crash, the airbag will not be able infant's physician, makes it can constantly monitor the to inflate and help protect the necessary for the infant to ride in child's condition. person sitting there. Do not turn the front seat so that the driver off the passenger airbag unless can constantly monitor the Medical Condition. A passenger the person sitting there is in a child's condition. has a medical condition which, according to his or her physician: risk group. . Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger; and Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (34,1)

3-34 Seats and Restraints

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. For example, the right front passenger airbag could inflate even though the airbag on-off switch is turned off. To help avoid injury to yourself or United States Canada and Mexico others, have the vehicle serviced To turn off the right front passenger right away. See Airbag Readiness frontal airbag, insert the ignition key Light on page 5‑18 for more into the switch, push in, and move information, including important the switch to the off position. safety information. The airbag off light will come on to let you know the right front passenger airbag is off. The airbag off light will stay on to remind you that the airbag is off. See Airbag On-Off Light on page 5‑18. The right front passenger airbag will remain off until you turn it back on again. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (35,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-35

Passenger Sensing System If the instrument panel has one of the indicators pictured in the following illustrations, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system unless there is an airbag off switch located on the instrument panel. If there is an airbag off switch, the vehicle does not have a passenger sensing system. See Airbag On-Off United States Canada and Mexico Switch on page 3‑32 for more information. To turn the right front passenger airbag on again, insert the ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the switch to the on position. The right front passenger frontal airbag is now enabled, and may inflate. See Airbag On-Off Light on page 5‑18 for more information. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (36,1)

3-36 Seats and Restraints

When the system check is We recommend that children be complete, either the word ON or the secured in a rear seat, including: word OFF, or the symbol for on or an infant or a child riding in a the symbol for off, will be visible. rear-facing child restraint; a child See Passenger Airbag Status riding in a forward-facing child seat; Indicator on page 5‑20. an older child riding in a booster United States The passenger sensing system seat; and children, who are large will turn off the right front passenger enough, using safety belts. frontal airbag under certain A label on the sun visor says, conditions. The driver airbag and “Never put a rear-facing child seat in roof-rail airbags, if equipped, the front.” This is because the risk to are not part of the passenger the rear-facing child is so great, sensing system. if the airbag deploys. Canada and Mexico The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of { WARNING The passenger airbag status the right front passenger seat. The indicator will be visible on the sensors are designed to detect the A child in a rear-facing child instrument panel when the presence of a properly seated restraint can be seriously vehicle is started. occupant and determine if the right injured or killed if the right front The words ON and OFF, or the front passenger frontal airbag passenger airbag inflates. symbol for on and off, will be visible should be enabled (may inflate) This is because the back of the during the system check. If you are or not. rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the using remote start, if equipped, According to accident statistics, to start the vehicle from a Children are safer when properly inflating airbag. distance, you may not see secured in a rear seat in the correct (Continued) the system check. child restraint for their weight and size. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (37,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-37

If the vehicle does not have a . The right front passenger seat is WARNING (Continued) rear seat that will accommodate occupied by a smaller person, a rear-facing child restraint, a such as a child who has A child in a forward-facing rear-facing child restraint should outgrown child restraints. child restraint can be seriously not be installed in the vehicle, even . Or, if there is a critical problem injured or killed if the right front if the airbag is off. with the airbag system or the passenger airbag inflates and The passenger sensing system is passenger sensing system. the passenger seat is in a designed to turn off the right front When the passenger sensing forward position. passenger frontal airbag if: system has turned off the right front Even if the passenger sensing . The right front passenger seat is passenger frontal airbag, the off system has turned off the right unoccupied. indicator will light and stay lit to front passenger frontal airbag, no remind you that the airbag is off. . The system determines that an system is fail-safe. No one can See Passenger Airbag Status infant is present in a rear-facing Indicator on page 5‑20. guarantee that an airbag will not infant seat. deploy under some unusual The passenger sensing system is circumstance, even though the . The system determines that a designed to turn on (may inflate) the airbag is turned off. small child is present in a child right front passenger frontal airbag restraint. Secure rear-facing child anytime the system senses that a . person of adult size is sitting restraints in a rear seat, even if The system determines that a properly in the right front the airbag is off. If you secure a small child is present in a booster seat. passenger seat. forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move . A right front passenger takes When the passenger sensing the front passenger seat as far his/her weight off of the seat for system has allowed the airbag to be back as it will go. It is better to a period of time. enabled, the on indicator will light secure the child restraint in a and stay lit to remind you that the rear seat. airbag is active. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (38,1)

3-38 Seats and Restraints

For some children who have If the On Indicator is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child outgrown child restraints and for Child Restraint restraint and restarting the very small adults, the passenger vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, sensing system may or may not If a child restraint has been installed turn the vehicle off. Then slightly turn off the right front passenger and the on indicator is lit: recline the vehicle seatback frontal airbag, depending upon the 1. Turn the vehicle off. and adjust the seat cushion, person's seating posture and body if adjustable, to make sure that 2. Remove the child restraint from build. Everyone in the vehicle the vehicle seatback is not the vehicle. who has outgrown child restraints pushing the child restraint into should wear a safety belt 3. Remove any additional items the seat cushion. from the seat such as blankets, properly — whether or not there 6. Restart the vehicle. is an airbag for that person. cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers. If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child { WARNING 4. Reinstall the child restraint restraint in a rear seat position following the directions in the vehicle, and check with If the airbag readiness light ever provided by the child restraint your dealer. comes on and stays on, it means manufacturer and refer to that something may be wrong Securing Child Restraints (Rear If no rear seat is available, do with the airbag system. To help Seat Position) on page 3‑60 or not install a child restraint in avoid injury to yourself or others, Securing Child Restraints (Front this vehicle. have the vehicle serviced right Seat-Passenger Sensing away. See Airbag Readiness System) on page 3‑62 or Light on page 5‑18 for more Securing Child Restraints (Front information, including important Seat-Airbag On/Off Switch) on safety information. page 3‑65. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (39,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-39

If the Off Indicator is Lit for an If this happens, use the following Additional Factors Affecting Adult-Size Occupant steps to allow the system to detect System Operation that person and enable the right front passenger frontal airbag: Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat 1. Turn the vehicle off. during vehicle maneuvers and 2. Remove any additional material braking, which helps the passenger from the seat, such as blankets, sensing system maintain the cushions, seat covers, seat passenger airbag status. See heaters, or seat massagers. “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in the Index for additional 3. Place the seatback in the fully information about the importance upright position. of proper restraint use. 4. Have the person sit upright in A thick layer of additional material, the seat, centered on the seat such as a blanket or cushion, cushion, with legs comfortably or aftermarket equipment such as If a person of adult-size is sitting in extended. seat covers, seat heaters, and the right front passenger seat, but 5. Restart the vehicle and have the seat massagers can affect how the off indicator is lit, it could be person remain in this position for well the passenger sensing system because that person is not sitting two to three minutes after the on operates. We recommend that you properly in the seat. indicator is lit. not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when This allows the system to detect that approved by GM for your specific person and then enable the right vehicle. See Adding Equipment to front passenger frontal airbag. the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3‑41 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (40,1)

3-40 Seats and Restraints

The on indicator may be lit if an Servicing the object, such as a briefcase, { WARNING handbag, grocery bag, laptop or Airbag-Equipped Vehicle other electronic device, is put on an Airbags affect how the vehicle For up to 10 seconds after the unoccupied seat. If this is not should be serviced. There are parts ignition is turned off and the desired remove the object from of the airbag system in several battery is disconnected, an airbag the seat. places around the vehicle. Your can still inflate during improper dealer and the service manual have service. You can be injured if you { WARNING information about servicing the are close to an airbag when it vehicle and the airbag system. inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. Stowing of articles under the To purchase a service manual, see They are probably part of the passenger seat or between the Service Publications Ordering airbag system. Be sure to follow passenger seat cushion and Information on page 13‑15. proper service procedures, and seatback may interfere with the make sure the person performing proper operation of the passenger work for you is qualified to do so. sensing system. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (41,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-41

Adding Equipment to the In addition, the vehicle may If you have any questions have a passenger sensing about this, you should contact Airbag-Equipped Vehicle system for the right front Customer Assistance before you Q: Is there anything I might add passenger position, which modify the vehicle. The phone to or change about the vehicle includes sensors that are numbers and addresses for that could keep the airbags part of the passenger seat. Customer Assistance are in from working properly? The passenger sensing system Step Two of the Customer may not operate properly if the Satisfaction Procedure in A: Yes. If you add things that original seat trim is replaced this manual. See Customer change the vehicle's frame, with non-GM covers, upholstery Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and bumper system, height, front end or trim, or with GM covers, Canada) on page 13 1 or or side sheet metal, they may ‑ upholstery or trim designed for Customer Satisfaction keep the airbag system from a different vehicle. Any object, Procedure (Mexico) on working properly. Changing or such as an aftermarket seat page 13 4. moving any parts of the front ‑ heater or a comfort enhancing seats, safety belts, the airbag If the vehicle has rollover pad or device, installed under or sensing and diagnostic module, roof-rail airbags, see Different on top of the seat fabric, could steering wheel, instrument Size Tires and Wheels on also interfere with the operation panel, roof-rail airbag modules, page 10‑71 for additional of the passenger sensing ceiling headliner or pillar garnish important information. system. This could either trim, front sensors, rollover prevent proper deployment of sensor module, or airbag wiring the passenger airbag(s) or can affect the operation of the prevent the passenger sensing airbag system. system from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing System on page 3‑35. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (42,1)

3-42 Seats and Restraints

Q: Because I have a disability, Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System I have to get my vehicle modified. How can I find out The airbag system does not need Parts After a Crash whether this will affect my regularly scheduled maintenance or airbag system? replacement. Make sure the { WARNING airbag readiness light is working. A: If you have questions, call See Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the Customer Assistance. The page 5‑18 for more information. airbag systems in the vehicle. phone numbers and addresses Notice: If an airbag covering is A damaged airbag system for Customer Assistance are in may not work properly and Step Two of the Customer damaged, opened, or broken, the may not protect you and your Satisfaction Procedure in this airbag may not work properly. passenger(s) in a crash, resulting manual. See Customer Do not open or break the airbag Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death. To help make sure the airbag Canada) on page 13‑1 or opened or broken airbag covers, Customer Satisfaction have the airbag covering and/or systems are working properly Procedure (Mexico) on airbag module replaced. For the after a crash, have them page 13‑4. location of the airbag modules, inspected and any necessary see What Makes an Airbag replacements made as soon In addition, your dealer and the Inflate? on page 3‑30. as possible. service manual have information See your dealer for service. about the location of the airbag sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (43,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-43

If an airbag inflates, you will need Child Restraints Use a booster seat with a to replace airbag system parts. lap-shoulder belt until the child See your dealer for service. Older Children passes the fit test below: If the airbag readiness light stays on . Sit all the way back on the seat. after the vehicle is started or comes Do the knees bend at the seat on when you are driving, the airbag edge? If yes, continue. If no, system may not work properly. return to the booster seat. Have the vehicle serviced right . Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. away. See Airbag Readiness Light Does the shoulder belt rest on on page 5‑18 for more information. the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑18 for more information. If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder, then return Older children who have outgrown to the booster seat. booster seats should wear the vehicle safety belts. . Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips, touching the The manufacturer's instructions that thighs? If yes, continue. If no, come with the booster seat state the return to the booster seat. weight and height limitations for that booster. . Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (44,1)

3-44 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is the proper way to Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort wear safety belts? Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on { WARNING page 3‑18. A: An older child should wear a Never do this. lap-shoulder belt and get the According to accident statistics, additional restraint a shoulder children and infants are safer Never allow two children to wear belt can provide. The shoulder when properly restrained in a the same safety belt. The safety belt should not cross the face or child restraint system or infant belt can not properly spread the neck. The lap belt should fit restraint system secured in a impact forces. In a crash, the two snugly below the hips, just rear seating position. children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A safety touching the top of the thighs. In a crash, children who are not belt must be used by only This applies belt force to the buckled up can strike other people child's pelvic bones in a crash. who are buckled up, or can be one person at a time. It should never be worn over the thrown out of the vehicle. abdomen, which could cause Older children need to use severe or even fatal internal safety belts properly. injuries in a crash. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (45,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-45

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Never do this. The child might also slide under Never allow a child to wear the the lap belt. The belt force would safety belt with the shoulder belt then be applied right on the behind their back. A child can be abdomen. That could cause seriously injured by not wearing serious or fatal injuries. The the lap-shoulder belt properly. shoulder belt should go over the In a crash, the child would not be shoulder and across the chest. restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. (Continued) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (46,1)

3-46 Seats and Restraints

Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older WARNING (Continued) Children children, but not for young children Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's For example, in a crash at only protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every infant will suddenly become a distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride 110 kg (240 lb) force on a size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the person's arms. An infant should need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate be secured in an appropriate restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints. restraint. state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained every Canadian province says properly can strike other people, children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle. restrained while in a vehicle. { WARNING { WARNING Never do this. Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder Never hold an infant or a child belt is wrapped around their while riding in a vehicle. Due to neck and the safety belt crash forces, an infant or a child continues to tighten. Never leave will become so heavy it is not children unattended in a vehicle possible to hold it during a crash. and never allow children to play (Continued) with the safety belts. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (47,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-47

Q: What are the different types of { WARNING WARNING (Continued) add-on child restraints? A: Add-on child restraints, which Never do this. If you must secure a are purchased by the vehicle forward-facing child restraint in Children who are up against, owner, are available in four basic or very close to, any airbag when the right front seat, always move types. Selection of a particular it inflates can be seriously injured the front passenger seat as far restraint should take into or killed. Never put a rear-facing back as it will go. consideration not only the child's child restraint in the right front weight, height, and age but also seat. Secure a rear-facing child whether or not the restraint will restraint in a rear seat. It is also be compatible with the motor better to secure a forward-facing vehicle in which it will be used. child restraint in a rear seat. For most basic types of child (Continued) restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (48,1)

3-48 Seats and Restraints

The restraint manufacturer's Child Restraint Systems instructions that come with the { WARNING restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular A young child's hip bones are still child restraint. In addition, there so small that the vehicle's regular are many kinds of restraints safety belt may not remain low on available for children with the hip bones, as it should. special needs. Instead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, { WARNING the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by To reduce the risk of neck and any bony structure. This alone head injury during a crash, infants could cause serious or fatal need complete support. This is injuries. To reduce the risk of because an infant's neck is not serious or fatal injuries during a (A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat fully developed and its head crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat (A) weighs so much compared with always be secured in appropriate provides restraint with the seating the rest of its body. In a crash, child restraints. surface against the back of an infant in a rear-facing child the infant. restraint settles into the restraint, The harness system holds the so the crash forces can be infant in place and, in a crash, acts distributed across the strongest to keep the infant positioned in part of an infant's body, the back the restraint. and shoulders. Infants should always be secured in rear-facing child restraints. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (49,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-49

Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle safety belt or LATCH system, following the (B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the in this manual. body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system. A booster seat can also help a To help reduce the chance of injury, child to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3‑52 for more information. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (50,1)

3-50 Seats and Restraints

Children can be endangered in a In some areas of the United States Where to Put the crash if the child restraint is not and Canada, Certified Child properly secured in the vehicle. Passenger Safety Technicians Restraint When securing an add-on child (CPSTs) are available to inspect According to accident statistics, restraint, refer to the instructions and demonstrate how to correctly children and infants are safer when that come with the restraint which use and install child restraints. properly restrained in a child may be on the restraint itself or in a In the U.S., refer to the National restraint system or infant restraint booklet, or both, and to this manual. Highway Traffic Safety system secured in a rear seating The child restraint instructions are Administration (NHTSA) website to position. locate the nearest child safety seat important, so if they are not We recommend that children and inspection station. For CPST available, obtain a replacement child restraints be secured in a rear availability in Canada, check with copy from the manufacturer. seat, including: an infant or a child Transport Canada or the Provincial riding in a rear-facing child restraint; Keep in mind that an unsecured Ministry of Transportation office. child restraint can move around in a a child riding in a forward-facing collision or sudden stop and injure Securing the Child Within the child seat; an older child riding in a people in the vehicle. Be sure to Child Restraint booster seat; and children, who are properly secure any child restraint in large enough, using safety belts. the vehicle — even when no child { WARNING If a child restraint is secured in the is in it. right front passenger seat, and there A child can be seriously injured or is a switch on the instrument panel killed in a crash if the child is not to manually turn off the right front properly secured in the child passenger airbag. See Airbag restraint. Secure the child On-Off Switch on page 3‑32 and properly following the instructions Securing Child Restraints (Rear that came with that child restraint. Seat Position) on page 3‑60 or Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat-Passenger Sensing System) on page 3‑62 or Securing Child Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (51,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-51

Restraints (Front Seat-Airbag On/Off When securing a child restraint in a Switch) on page 3‑65 for more WARNING (Continued) rear seating position, study the information, including important instructions that came with the safety information. Even if the passenger sensing child restraint to make sure it is system or airbag switch has compatible with this vehicle. A label on the sun visor says, turned off the right front “Never put a rear-facing child seat in passenger frontal airbag, no Child restraints and booster seats the front.” This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can vary considerably in size, and some the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not may fit in certain seating positions if the airbag deploys. better than others. Always make deploy under some unusual sure the child restraint is properly circumstance, even though it secured. { WARNING is turned off. Depending on where you place the A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child child restraint and the size of the restraint can be seriously restraints in a rear seat, even if child restraint, you may not be able injured or killed if the right front the airbag is off. If you secure a to access adjacent safety belt passenger airbag inflates. forward-facing child restraint in assemblies or LATCH anchors for This is because the back of the the right front seat, always move additional passengers or child rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far restraints. Adjacent seating be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to positions should not be used airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a if the child restraint prevents access child restraint can be seriously rear seat. to or interferes with the routing of injured or killed if the right front the safety belt. passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position. (Continued) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (52,1)

3-52 Seats and Restraints

If the vehicle does not have a Lower Anchors and A child restraint must never be rear seat that will accommodate installed using only the a rear-facing child restraint, a Tethers for Children top tether strap and anchor. (LATCH System) rear-facing child restraint should In order to use the LATCH system not be installed in the vehicle, even The LATCH system holds a child in your vehicle, you need a if the airbag is off. restraint during driving or in a crash. child restraint that has LATCH Wherever a child restraint is This system is designed to make attachments. The child restraint installed, be sure to secure the installation of a child restraint easier. manufacturer will provide you with child restraint properly. The LATCH system uses anchors in instructions on how to use the the vehicle and attachments on the Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint and its attachments. child restraint that are made for use child restraint can move around in a The following explains how to attach with the LATCH system. collision or sudden stop and injure a child restraint with these people in the vehicle. Be sure to Make sure that a LATCH-compatible attachments in your vehicle. properly secure any child restraint in child restraint is properly installed Not all vehicle seating positions or the vehicle — even when no child using the anchors, or use the child restraints have lower anchors is in it. vehicle's safety belts to secure the and attachments or top tether restraint, following the instructions anchors and attachments. that came with that restraint, and also the instructions in this manual. When installing a child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (53,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-53

Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor. Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that Lower anchors (A) are metal bars A top tether (A, C) anchors the top forward-facing child restraints have built into the vehicle. There are of the child restraint to the vehicle. a top tether, and that the tether be two lower anchors for each A top tether anchor is built into attached. Be sure to read and LATCH seating position that will the vehicle. The top tether follow the instructions for your accommodate a child restraint with attachment (B) on the child restraint child restraint. lower attachments (B). connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (54,1)

3-54 Seats and Restraints

Lower Anchor and Top Tether Do not install three child restraints in Anchor Locations the same row at the same time and never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor.

Second, Third, and Fourth Row with Three-Passenger Second, Third, and Fourth Row Seat — Passenger Van with Three-Passenger Seat There are two top tether anchors in Front Passenger Position the second , third , and fourth-row i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating ‐ ‐ i three-passenger seats. To install a positions with top tether anchors. (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. child restraint in the rear driver-side j (Lower Anchor): Seating seating positions, use anchor positions with two lower anchors. The second, third, and fourth row point (A). To install a child restraint with three-passenger seats have in the rear passenger-side seating See the information following for exposed metal lower anchors installing a child restraint with a positions, use anchor point (B). located in the crease between the To install a child restraint in the rear top tether in the second, third, and seatback and the seat cushion. fourth row center positions. center seating positions, use anchor point (B). Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (55,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-55

If the vehicle is equipped with a Do not secure a child restraint in a four-passenger fourth‐ or fifth-row position without a top tether anchor seat, it does not have upper or if a national or local law requires lower anchors. If a child restraint is that the top tether be attached, or if placed in the four-passenger fourth the instructions that come with the or fifth-row seat, it must be secured child restraint say that the top tether using the vehicle safety belts. must be attached. See “Rear Seat Position” under According to accident statistics, Securing Child Restraints (Rear children and infants are safer Seat Position) on page 3‑60 or when properly restrained in a child Securing Child Restraints (Front restraint system or infant restraint Seat-Passenger Sensing System) system secured in a rear seating on page 3‑62 or Securing Child Front Passenger Position position. See Where to Put the Restraints (Front Seat-Airbag On/Off There is a top tether anchor for Restraint on page 3‑50 for Switch) on page 3‑65 for more additional information. information. the front passenger position with a front passenger seat. The anchor is located at the rear of the seat cushion on the right front passenger seat. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (56,1)

3-56 Seats and Restraints

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH { WARNING { WARNING System Do not attach more than one child Children can be seriously injured restraint to a single anchor. or strangled if a shoulder belt is { WARNING Attaching more than one child wrapped around their neck and restraint to a single anchor could the safety belt continues to If a LATCH-type child restraint is cause the anchor or attachment tighten. Buckle any unused safety not attached to anchors, the child to come loose or even break belts behind the child restraint so restraint will not be able to protect during a crash. A child or others children cannot reach them. Pull the child correctly. In a crash, the could be injured. To reduce the the shoulder belt all the way out child could be seriously injured or risk of serious or fatal injuries of the retractor to set the lock, killed. Install a LATCH-type child during a crash, attach only one if the vehicle has one, after the restraint properly using the child restraint per anchor. child restraint has been installed. anchors, or use the vehicle safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (57,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-57

Notice: Do not let the LATCH 1. Attach and tighten the lower 2. If the child restraint manufacturer attachments rub against the attachments to the lower recommends that the top tether vehicle’s safety belts. This may anchors. If the child restraint be attached, attach and tighten damage these parts. If necessary, does not have lower the top tether to the top tether move buckled safety belts to attachments or the desired anchor, if equipped. Refer to the avoid rubbing the LATCH seating position does not have child restraint instructions and attachments. lower anchors, secure the child the following steps: Do not fold the empty rear seat restraint with the top tether and 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. with a safety belt buckled. This the safety belts. Refer to your child restraint manufacturer 2.2. For the second, third, could damage the safety belt or and fourth row with the seat. Unbuckle and return the instructions and the instructions in this manual. three-passenger seats only, safety belt to its stowed position, in the rear driver-side before folding the seat. 1.1. Find the lower anchors seating positions, use for the desired seating anchor point (A). For the position. rear passenger-side seating 1.2. Put the child restraint on positions, use anchor the seat. point (B). For the center 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower seating positions, use attachments on the child anchor point (B). Never restraint to the lower install two top tethers using anchors. the same top tether anchor. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (58,1)

3-58 Seats and Restraints

2.3. Route and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions:

If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, If the position you are using route the tether over has an integrated headrest the seatback. or head restraint and you If the position you are using are using a dual tether, does not have a headrest route the tether around the or head restraint and you headrest or head restraint. are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (59,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-59

3. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is WARNING (Continued) securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the To help make sure the LATCH LATCH path and attempt to system is working properly after a move it side to side and back crash, see your dealer to have and forth. There should be no the system inspected and any more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of necessary replacements made movement for proper installation. as soon as possible. Replacing LATCH System If the vehicle has the LATCH system Parts After a Crash and it was being used during a If the position you are using crash, new LATCH system parts has an integrated headrest { WARNING may be needed. or head restraint and you New parts and repairs may be are using a single tether, A crash can damage the LATCH necessary even if the LATCH route the tether over the system in the vehicle. A damaged system was not being used at the headrest or head restraint. LATCH system may not properly time of the crash. secure the child restraint, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. (Continued) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (60,1)

3-60 Seats and Restraints

Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have (Rear Seat Position) a top tether, and that the tether When securing a child restraint in a be attached. rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have instructions that came with the the LATCH system, you will be child restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position. If the child restraint has the Be sure to follow the instructions LATCH system, see Lower Anchors that came with the child restraint. and Tethers for Children (LATCH Secure the child in the child restraint System) on page 3‑52 for how and when and as the instructions say. where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint 3. Push the latch plate into the using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear buckle until it clicks. secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3‑50. the buckle so that the safety belt see Lower Anchors and Tethers for could be quickly unbuckled if Children (LATCH System) on 1. Put the child restraint on necessary. page 3‑52 for top tether anchor the seat. locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of position without a top tether anchor the vehicle safety belt through or if a national or local law requires around the restraint. The child that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show the instructions that come with the you how. child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (61,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-61

6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3‑52 for more information. 7. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the to move it side‐to‐side and lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to back‐and‐forth. When the child set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed, not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint, may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position. restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a Try to pull the belt out of the top tether anchor, disconnect it. retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 4 and 5. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (62,1)

3-62 Seats and Restraints

Securing Child Restraints { WARNING WARNING (Continued) (Front Seat-Passenger Sensing System) A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints restraint can be seriously in a rear seat, even if the This vehicle has airbags. injured or killed if the right airbag is off. If you secure a A rear seat is a safer place to front passenger airbag inflates. forward-facing child restraint in secure a forward-facing child This is because the back of the the right front seat, always move restraint. See Where to Put the rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far Restraint on page 3 50. ‑ be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to On vehicles with a passenger airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a sensing system, the system is child restraint can be seriously rear seat. designed to turn off the right front injured or killed if the right See Passenger Sensing System passenger frontal airbag under front passenger airbag inflates certain conditions. See Passenger on page 3‑35 for additional and the passenger seat is in a information. Sensing System on page 3‑35 and forward position. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 5‑20 for more information, Even if the passenger sensing If the vehicle does not have a rear including important safety system has turned off the right seat that will accommodate a information. front passenger frontal airbag, no rear-facing child restraint, a A label on the sun visor says, system is fail-safe. No one can rear-facing child restraint should not guarantee that an airbag will not “Never put a rear-facing child seat in be installed in the vehicle, even if the front.” This is because the risk to deploy under some unusual the airbag is off. the rear-facing child is so great, circumstance, even though it is if the airbag deploys. turned off. (Continued) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (63,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-63

If the child restraint has the You will be using the lap-shoulder LATCH system, see Lower Anchors belt to secure the child restraint in and Tethers for Children (LATCH this position. Follow the instructions System) on page 3‑52 for how and that came with the child restraint. where to install the child restraint 1. Move the seat as far back as it using LATCH. If a child restraint is will go before securing the secured using a safety belt and it forward-facing child restraint. uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children When the passenger sensing (LATCH System) on page 3‑52 for system has turned off the right top tether anchor locations. front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator on the Do not secure a child seat in a passenger airbag status position without a top tether anchor indicator should light and stay 4. Push the latch plate into the if a national or local law requires lit when the vehicle is started. buckle until it clicks. that the top tether be anchored, or if See Passenger Airbag Status the instructions that come with the Position the release button on Indicator on page 5‑20. child restraint say that the top strap the buckle so that the safety belt must be anchored. 2. Put the child restraint on could be quickly unbuckled if the seat. necessary. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run have a top tether, and that the the lap and shoulder portions of tether be attached. the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (64,1)

3-64 Seats and Restraints

7. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3‑52 for more information. 8. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down grasp the child restraint at the out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the safety belt path and attempt to lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to move it side to side and back set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, and forth. When the child not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back restraint is properly installed, into the retractor. When installing there should be no more than a forward-facing child restraint, it 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. may be helpful to use your knee If the airbag is off, the off indicator in to push down on the child the passenger airbag status restraint as you tighten the belt. indicator will come on and stay on Try to pull the belt out of the when the vehicle is started. retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (65,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-65

If the child restraint has been See Airbag On-Off Switch on installed and the on indicator is lit, page 3‑32 for more information, WARNING (Continued) see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a including important safety Even if the airbag switch Child Restraint” under Passenger information. has turned off the right front Sensing System on page 3‑35 for A label on the sun visor says, more information. passenger frontal airbag, no “Never put a rear-facing child seat in system is fail-safe. No one can To remove the child restraint, the front.” This is because the risk to guarantee that an airbag will not unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and the rear-facing child is so great, deploy under some unusual let it return to the stowed position. if the airbag deploys. circumstance, even though it If the top tether is attached to a is turned off. top tether anchor, disconnect it. { WARNING Secure rear-facing child Securing Child Restraints A child in a rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if restraint can be seriously the airbag is off. If you secure a (Front Seat-Airbag injured or killed if the right front forward-facing child restraint in On/Off Switch) passenger airbag inflates. the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far This vehicle has airbags. A rear This is because the back of the seat is a safer place to secure a rear-facing child restraint would back as it will go. It is better to forward-facing child restraint. be very close to the inflating secure the child restraint in a See Where to Put the Restraint on airbag. A child in a forward-facing rear seat. page 3‑50. child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front On vehicles with an airbag on/off passenger airbag inflates and switch, you can use this feature to the passenger seat is in a turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag. The switch is located forward position. on the instrument panel. (Continued) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (66,1)

3-66 Seats and Restraints

If the child restraint has the You will be using the lap-shoulder { WARNING LATCH system, see Lower Anchors belt to secure the child restraint in and Tethers for Children (LATCH this position. Follow the instructions If the airbag readiness light ever System) on page 3‑52 for how and that came with the child restraint. comes on and stays on, it means where to install the child restraint 1. Move the seat as far back as it that something may be wrong using LATCH. If a child restraint is with the airbag system. will go before securing the secured using a safety belt and it forward-facing child restraint. For example, the right front uses a top tether, see Lower passenger airbag could inflate Anchors and Tethers for Children If you have no other choice but even though the airbag on-off (LATCH System) on page 3‑52 for to install a rear-facing child switch is turned off. top tether anchor locations. restraint in this seat, make sure the airbag is off once the child To help avoid injury to yourself or Do not secure a child seat in a restraint has been installed. others, have the vehicle serviced position without a top tether anchor right away. See Airbag Readiness if a national or local law requires When the airbag off switch has Light on page 5‑18 for more that the top tether be anchored, or if turned off the right front information, including important the instructions that come with the passenger frontal airbag, the off safety information. child restraint say that the top strap indicator in the airbag off light must be anchored. should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started. See Airbag In Canada, the law requires that If the vehicle does not have a On-Off Light on page 5‑18. rear seat that will accommodate forward-facing child restraints have 2. Put the child restraint on a rear-facing child restraint, a a top tether, and that the tether the seat. rear-facing child restraint should be attached. not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (67,1)

Seats and Restraints 3-67

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it 4. Push the latch plate into the may be helpful to use your knee buckle until it clicks. to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt Try to pull the belt out of the could be quickly unbuckled retractor to make sure the if necessary. retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (68,1)

3-68 Seats and Restraints

7. If the vehicle does not have a To remove the child restraint, rear seat and the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and has a top tether, follow the let it return to the stowed position. child restraint manufacturer's If the top tether is attached to a instructions regarding the use top tether anchor, disconnect it. of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for If you turned the airbag off with Children (LATCH System) on the switch, turn on the right front page 3‑52 for more information. passenger airbag when you remove the child restraint from the vehicle 8. Before placing a child in the unless the person who will be sitting child restraint, make sure it is there is a member of a passenger securely held in place. To check, airbag risk group. See Airbag grasp the child restraint at the On-Off Switch on page 3‑32 for safety belt path and attempt to more information, including move it side to side and back important safety information. and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Storage 4-1

Storage Storage Compartments Storage Compartments Front Storage ...... 4-1 Front Storage This vehicle may have a front storage compartment. It is located at the center of the instrument panel extension, by the floor. To open the compartment, pull up on the latch. The compartment will open automatically. Storage compartments may also be included on the inside of each front door. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

4-2 Storage

2 NOTES Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-1

Engine Coolant Temperature Vehicle Messages Instruments and Gauge ...... 5-16 Vehicle Messages ...... 5-33 Controls Voltmeter Gauge ...... 5-16 Battery Voltage and Charging Safety Belt Reminders ...... 5-17 Messages ...... 5-34 Airbag Readiness Light ...... 5-18 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-34 Controls Airbag On-Off Light ...... 5-18 Compass Messages ...... 5-34 Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Passenger Airbag Status Door Ajar Messages ...... 5-34 Steering Wheel Controls ...... 5-2 Indicator ...... 5-20 Engine Cooling System Horn ...... 5-4 Charging System Light ...... 5-21 Messages ...... 5-35 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Malfunction Engine Oil Messages ...... 5-36 Compass ...... 5-5 Indicator Lamp ...... 5-21 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-37 Clock ...... 5-6 Brake System Warning Fuel System Messages ...... 5-37 Power Outlets ...... 5-9 Light ...... 5-24 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-37 Cigarette Lighter ...... 5-10 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Lamp Messages ...... 5-37 Ashtrays ...... 5-10 Warning Light ...... 5-25 Ride Control System Tow/Haul Mode Light ...... 5-25 Messages ...... 5-38 Warning Lights, Gauges, and StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-25 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-39 Indicators Tire Pressure Light ...... 5-26 Anti-Theft Alarm System Warning Lights, Gauges, and Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-27 Messages ...... 5-39 Indicators ...... 5-11 Security Light ...... 5-27 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-40 Instrument Cluster ...... 5-12 High-Beam On Light ...... 5-28 Tire Messages ...... 5-40 Speedometer ...... 5-13 Cruise Control Light ...... 5-28 Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-41 Vehicle Reminder Odometer ...... 5-13 Information Displays Trip Odometer ...... 5-13 Messages ...... 5-41 Fuel Gauge ...... 5-14 Driver Information Engine Oil Pressure Center (DIC) ...... 5-28 Vehicle Personalization Gauge ...... 5-15 Vehicle Personalization ...... 5-42 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

5-2 Instruments and Controls

Controls 2. Release the lever to lock the w / c x (Next/Previous): steering wheel in place. Press to select preset or favorite Do not adjust the steering wheel radio stations, select tracks on a Steering Wheel ® while driving. CD, or navigate an iPod or Adjustment USB device. Steering Wheel Controls Radio To select preset or favorite radio stations: Press and release w or c x to go to the next or previous radio station stored as a preset or favorite. CD To select tracks on a CD: Press and release w or c x to For vehicles with a tilt steering go to the next or previous track. wheel, the lever is located on the left side of the steering column. If available, some audio controls can be adjusted at To adjust the steering wheel: the steering wheel. 1. Pull the lever to move the See Cruise Control on page 9‑37 for steering wheel up or down more information on other steering into a comfortable position. wheel control. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-3

Selecting Tracks on an iPod or 3. Press and release w or c x SRCE (Source/Voice USB Device to scroll up or down the list. Recognition): Press to switch between the radio and CD, and 1. Press and hold w or c x . To select a folder, press for equipped vehicles, the while listening to a song until the and hold w, or press ¨ front auxiliary. contents of the current folder when the folder is display on the radio display. ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the highlighted. next radio station while in AM, 2. Press and release w or c x . To go back further in the FM, or XM™. to scroll up or down the list, then folder list, press and For vehicles with a CD Player or press and hold w, or press ¨ to hold c x. USB port: play the highlighted track. b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press ¨ to go to the next track or Navigating Folders on an iPod or Press to silence the vehicle chapter while sourced to the CD. USB Device speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on. Press ¨ to select a track or a 1. Press and hold w or c x For vehicles with Bluetooth or folder when navigating folders on while listening to a song until the ® an iPod or USB device. contents of the current folder OnStar systems, press and hold display on the radio display. for longer than two seconds to While listening to a CD, press and interact with those systems. See hold ¨ to quickly move forward 2. Press and hold c x to go Bluetooth on page 7‑23 and the through the tracks. Release to stop back to the previous folder list. OnStar Owner's Guide for more on the desired track. information. e e c x (End): Press to reject an + − (Volume): Press to incoming call, or end a current call. increase or to decrease the volume. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

5-4 Instruments and Controls

Horn 6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Windshield Washer Use to adjust the delay time Press the horn symbol in the middle The windshield wiper paddle between wipes. Turn the band up of the steering wheel to sound is located on top of the for more frequent wipes or down for the horn. multifunction lever. less frequent wipes. L (Washer Fluid): Push the Windshield Wiper/Washer d (Low Speed): Slow wipes. paddle to spray washer fluid on the a (High Speed): Fast wipes. windshield. The wipers will clear the 9 window and then either stop or (Off): Use to turn the return to the preset speed. wipers off. When driving during the day and { WARNING the wipers are activated, the head lamps automatically turn on after In freezing weather, do not use completing eight wipe cycles. the washer until the windshield is The windshield wiper control is located on the multifunction lever on Clear ice and snow from the wiper warmed. Otherwise the washer the left side of the steering wheel. blades before using them. If frozen fluid can form ice on the to the windshield, carefully loosen or windshield, blocking your vision. Turn the band with N on it to select thaw them. Damaged blades should the wiper speed. be replaced. 8 (Mist): Use for a single wipe. Hold the band on z, then release. For several wipes, hold the band on z longer. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-5

Compass To adjust for compass variance, use 2. Find the vehicle's current the following procedure: location and variance zone This vehicle may have a compass in number on the map. the Driver Information Center (DIC). Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure Zones 1 through 15 are Compass Zone available. 1. Do not set the compass zone Your dealer will set the correct zone when the vehicle is moving. 3. Press V to scroll through for your location. Only set it when the vehicle is and select the appropriate Under certain circumstances, such in P (Park). variance zone. as during a long distance Press T until PRESS V TO 3 cross-country trip or moving to a 4. Press until the vehicle new state or province, it will be CHANGE COMPASS ZONE heading, for example, N for necessary to compensate for displays. North, is displayed in the DIC. compass variance by resetting the 5. If calibration is necessary, zone through the DIC if the zone is calibrate the compass. not set correctly. See “Compass Calibration Compass variance is the difference Procedure” following. between the earth's magnetic north and true geographic north. If the compass is not set to the zone where you live, the compass may give false readings. The compass must be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

5-6 Instruments and Controls

Compass Calibration Turn off the vehicle, move the 4. The DIC will display The compass can be manually magnetic item, then turn on the CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN calibrated. Only calibrate the vehicle and calibrate the compass. CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle compass in a magnetically clean To calibrate the compass, use the in tight circles at less than and safe location, such as an following procedure: 8 km/h (5 mph) to complete the open parking lot, where driving the calibration. The DIC will display vehicle in circles is not a danger. Compass Calibration Procedure CALIBRATION COMPLETE for It is suggested to calibrate away 1. Before calibrating the compass, a few seconds when the from tall buildings, utility wires, make sure the compass zone calibration is complete. manhole covers, or other industrial is set to the variance zone in The DIC display will then structures, if possible. which the vehicle is located. return to PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPASS. If CAL should ever appear in the See “Compass Variance (Zone) DIC display, the compass should Procedure” earlier in be calibrated. this section. Clock If the DIC display does not show a Do not operate any switches AM/FM Radio with Optional heading, for example, N for North, such as window, sunroof, CD Player or the heading does not change climate controls, seats, etc. during the calibration procedure. If the vehicle has an AM/FM radio after making turns, there may be a with an optional CD player, it has a strong magnetic field interfering with 2. Press T until PRESS V TO H button for setting the time. With the compass. Such interference CALIBRATE COMPASS these types of radios, the clock can may be caused by a magnetic displays. be set with either the radio turned CB or cell phone antenna mount, on or off. a magnetic emergency light, 3. Press V to start the compass magnetic note pad holder, or calibration. any other magnetic item. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-7

Set the time by following these 3. Press H again until the clock 2. Press the softkey located under steps: display stops flashing to set the any one of the tabs that you H currently displayed time; want to change. Every time the 1. Press until the hour begins softkey is pressed again, the flashing on display. Press this otherwise, the flashing stops after five seconds and the time or the date if selected, button a second time and the increases by one. minutes begin flashing on current time displayed is display. automatically set. Another way to increase the time or date, is to press the Press H a third time and the MP3 Radio with a Single CD Player right ¨ SEEK arrow or the 12HR or 24HR time format \ FWD (forward) button. begins flashing. If the vehicle has a radio with a 3. To decrease, press the 2. While either the hour or the single CD (MP3) player, the radio left SEEK arrow or minutes are flashing, turn the has a H button for setting the © f knob, located on the upper time and date. the s REV button. You can right side of the radio, clockwise To set the time and date, follow also turn the f knob, located on or counterclockwise to increase the instructions: the upper right side of the radio, or decrease the time. While the to adjust the selected setting. 12HR or 24HR time format is 1. Press the H button and the flashing, turn the f knob HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY clockwise or counterclockwise to (hour, minute, month, day, select the default time settings. and year) displays. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

5-8 Instruments and Controls

Changing the Time and Date MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc 3. To decrease, press the Default Settings CD Player left © SEEK arrow or You can change the time default If the vehicle has a radio with a the s REV button, or turn setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or six-disc CD player, the radio the f knob, located on the change the date default setting from has a MENU button instead of the upper right side of the radio, month/day/year to day/month/year. H button to set the time and date. to adjust the selected setting. To change the time or date default To set the time and date, follow Changing the Time and Date settings, follow these instructions: these instructions: Default Settings 1. Press H and then the softkey 1. Press the MENU button. To change the time default setting located under the forward H Once the option displays, from 12 hours to 24 hours or arrow that is currently displayed press the softkey located under change the date default setting from on the radio screen until the that tab. The HR, MIN, MM, DD, month/day/year to day/month/year. time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and the date MM/DD (month and and year) displays. To change the time or date default day) and DD/MM (day and settings, follow these instructions: month) are displayed. 2. Press the softkey located under any one of the tabs to change. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Press the softkey located under Every time the softkey is Once the H option displays, the desired option. pressed again, the time or press the softkey located 3. Press the H button again to the date if selected, under the forward arrow that increases by one. is currently displayed on the apply the selected default, or let radio screen until the 12H (hour) the screen time out. Another way to increase the time or date, is to press and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD (month and day) and the right ¨ SEEK arrow or DD/MM (day and month) the \ FWD (forward) button. displays. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-9

2. Press the softkey located under When adding electrical equipment, the desired option. { WARNING be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included 3. Press the MENU button again to Power is always supplied to the apply the selected default, or let with the equipment. See Add-On outlets. Do not leave electrical Electrical Equipment on page 9‑57. the screen time out. equipment plugged in when the vehicle is not in use because the Notice: Hanging heavy Power Outlets vehicle could catch fire and cause equipment from the power outlet injury or death. can cause damage not covered The accessory power outlets by the vehicle warranty. The can be used to plug in electrical power outlets are designed for equipment, such as a cell phone or Notice: Leaving electrical accessory power plugs only, such an MP3 player. equipment plugged in for an as cell phone charge cords. The vehicle may have extended period of time while two accessory power outlets the vehicle is off will drain the located on the instrument panel. battery. Always unplug electrical equipment when not in use and Remove the cover to access and do not plug in equipment replace when not in use. that exceeds the maximum Certain power accessory plugs may 20 ampere rating. not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and could overload vehicle or adapter fuses. If a problem is experienced, see your dealer. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

5-10 Instruments and Controls

Cigarette Lighter Ashtrays To remove the ashtray, pull it out from the console or from the slide To use the cigarette lighter, if the For vehicles with an ashtray it is out door. To reinstall the ashtray, vehicle has one, push it in all the located in the center console or on slide it back to the original position. way, and let go. When it is ready for the instrument panel. Pull up on the use, it will pop back out by itself. ashtray door to open it if it is in the Do not use the lighter to plug in console or pull the door open it if it accessory devices. Use the power is on the instrument panel. outlets provided. Notice: If papers, pins, or other Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter flammable items are put in the in while it is heating does not let ashtray, hot cigarettes or other the lighter back away from the smoking materials could ignite heating element when it is hot. them and possibly damage the Damage from overheating can vehicle. Never put flammable occur to the lighter or heating items in the ashtray. element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-11

Warning Lights, Warning lights come on when there When one of the warning lights could be a problem with a vehicle comes on and stays on while Gauges, and function. Some warning lights come driving, or when one of the gauges on briefly when the engine is started shows there may be a problem, Indicators to indicate they are working. check the section that explains what Warning lights and gauges can Gauges can indicate when there to do. Follow this manual's advice. signal that something is wrong could be a problem with a vehicle Waiting to do repairs can be costly before it becomes serious enough function. Often gauges and warning and even dangerous. to cause an expensive repair or lights work together to indicate a replacement. Paying attention to the problem with the vehicle. warning lights and gauges could prevent injury. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

5-12 Instruments and Controls

Instrument Cluster

English 4‐Speed Version Shown, 6‐Speed and Metric Similar Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-13

If the vehicle has a diesel engine, If the vehicle needs a new odometer See Driver Information Center (DIC) see the Duramax diesel supplement installed, it must be set to the on page 5‑28 for more information for more information. mileage total of the old odometer. on resetting the trip odometer. If that is not possible, then it must To display the odometer reading Speedometer be set at zero and a label must be with the ignition off, press the put on the driver door to show the The speedometer shows the 3 on the Driver Information old mileage reading when the Center (DIC) switch. vehicle speed in both kilometers new odometer was installed. per hour (km/h) and miles per hour (mph). Trip Odometer Odometer The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has been driven since The odometer shows how far the the trip odometer was last set vehicle has been driven, in either to zero. miles or kilometers. 3 This vehicle has a tamper-resistant Press the on the Driver odometer. The digital odometer will Information Center (DIC) switch to read 999,999 if it is turned back. display the trip odometer and the regular odometer information. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (14,1)

5-14 Instruments and Controls

Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge, when the ignition is . The gauge moves a little while on, indicates how much fuel is left in turning a corner or speeding up. the vehicle fuel tank. . The gauge does not go back to An arrow on the fuel gauge empty when the ignition is indicates the side of the vehicle turned off. the fuel door is on. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, The gauge first indicates empty see the Duramax diesel supplement before the vehicle is out of fuel, and for more information. the fuel tank should be refueled soon. Listed are four situations customers might experience with the fuel gauge. None of these indicate a Metric problem with the fuel gauge: . At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gauge reads full. . It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank's capacity to fill the tank. English Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (15,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-15

Engine Oil Pressure A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously Gauge low oil level or other problem causing low oil pressure. Check the oil as soon as possible.

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The engine can become so hot that it catches fire. Someone could be burned. English Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced. The oil pressure gauge shows the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds Metric per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals) Notice: Lack of proper engine oil when the engine is running. maintenance can damage the Oil pressure may vary with engine engine. The repairs would not be speed, outside temperature and oil covered by the vehicle warranty. viscosity, but readings above the Always follow the maintenance low pressure zone indicate the schedule for changing engine oil. normal operating range. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (16,1)

5-16 Instruments and Controls

Engine Coolant See Engine Overheating on Temperature Gauge page 10‑25. Voltmeter Gauge

English This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature. Metric It also provides an indicator of how hard the vehicle is working. During a majority of the operation, the gauge When the engine is not running, but wil read 100°C (210°F) or less. If the the ignition is on, this gauge shows vehicle is pulling a load or going up the battery's state of charge in hills, it is normal for the temperature DC volts. to fluctuate and approach the When the engine is running, the 122°C (250°F) mark. If the gauge gauge shows the condition of the reaches the 125°C (260°F) mark, it charging system. Readings between indicates that the cooling system is the low and high warning zones working beyond its capacity. indicate the normal operating range. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (17,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-17

Readings in the low warning zone Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt may occur when a large number of Reminder Light electrical accessories are operating Driver Safety Belt Reminder in the vehicle and the engine is left Light at an idle for an extended period. There is a driver safety belt This condition is normal since the reminder light on the instrument charging system is not able to panel cluster. provide full power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow For vehicles equipped with the the charging system to create passenger safety belt reminder light, maximum power. several seconds after the engine is started, a chime sounds for several The vehicle can be only driven for a seconds to remind the front short time with the reading in either When the vehicle is started, this passenger to buckle their safety warning zone. If it must be driven, light flashes and a chime may come belt. The passenger safety belt light turn off all unnecessary on to remind drivers to fasten their flashes and then stays on solid until accessories. safety belts. Then the light stays on the belt is buckled. This cycle Readings in either warning zone solid until the belt is buckled. This continues several times if the indicate a possible problem in the cycle may continue several times if passenger remains or becomes electrical system. Have the vehicle the driver remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle serviced as soon as possible. unbuckled while the vehicle is is moving. moving. If the passenger safety belt is If the driver safety belt is buckled, buckled, neither the chime nor neither the light nor chime come on. the light comes on. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (18,1)

5-18 Instruments and Controls

The front passenger safety belt For vehicles with a remote start, the warning light and chime may turn on airbag readiness light will stay on if an object is put on the seat such until the driver places the ignition as a briefcase, handbag, grocery switch to the ON/RUN position. bag, laptop or other electronic If there is a problem with the airbag device. To turn off the warning light system, an airbag Driver Information and or chime, remove the object The airbag readiness light flashes Center (DIC) message can also from the seat or buckle the for a few seconds when the engine come on. See Airbag System safety belt is started. If the light does not come Messages on page 5‑39 for more on then, have it fixed immediately. information. Airbag Readiness Light The system checks the airbag's { WARNING Airbag On-Off Light electrical system for possible When the right front passenger malfunctions. If the light stays on If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or airbag is manually turned off using it indicates there is an electrical the airbag on-off switch on the comes on while driving, it means problem. The system check instrument panel, if equipped, the the airbag system might not be includes the airbag sensor, the indicator light OFF or the off symbol pretensioners, the airbag modules, working properly. The airbags in will come on and stay on as a the wiring and the crash sensing the vehicle might not inflate in a reminder that the airbag has been and diagnostic module. For more crash, or they could even inflate turned off. This light will go off when information on the airbag system, without a crash. To help avoid the airbag has been turned on. See see Airbag System on page 3 25. ‑ injury, have the vehicle serviced Airbag On-Off Switch on page 3‑32 right away. for more information, including important safety information. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (19,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-19

{ WARNING { WARNING

If the right front passenger airbag If the airbag readiness light ever is turned off for a person who is comes on and stays on, it means not in a risk group identified by that something may be wrong the national government, that with the airbag system. person will not have the extra For example, the right front protection of an airbag. In a passenger airbag could inflate crash, the airbag will not be able even though the airbag on-off to inflate and help protect the switch is turned off. person sitting there. To help avoid injury to yourself or United States Do not turn off the passenger others, have the vehicle serviced airbag unless the person sitting right away. See Airbag Readiness there is in a risk group identified Light on page 5‑18 for more by the national government. See information, including important Airbag On-Off Switch on safety information. page 3‑32 for more on this, including important safety If the word ON or the on symbol is information. lit, it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled, and may inflate. See Airbag On-Off Switch on page 3‑32 for more information, including important safety information. Canada and Mexico Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (20,1)

5-20 Instruments and Controls

Passenger Airbag Status When the vehicle is started, the If, after several seconds, both status passenger airbag status indicator indicator lights remain on, or if there Indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol are no lights at all, there may be a If the vehicle has a passenger for on and off, for several seconds problem with the lights or the sensing system, the instrument as a system check. If you are passenger sensing system. panel will have a passenger airbag using remote start, if equipped, to See your dealer for service. status indicator. See Passenger start the vehicle from a distance, Sensing System on page 3‑35 for you may not see the system check. { WARNING important safety information. Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator will light either If the airbag readiness light ever ON or OFF, or either the on or comes on and stays on, it means off symbol to let you know the that something may be wrong status of the right front passenger with the airbag system. To help frontal airbag. avoid injury to yourself or others, If the word ON or the on symbol is have the vehicle serviced right United States lit on the passenger airbag status away. See Airbag Readiness indicator, it means that the right Light on page 5‑18 for more front passenger frontal airbag is information, including important enabled, and may inflate. safety information. If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front Canada and Mexico passenger frontal airbag. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (21,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-21

Charging System Light See Battery Voltage and Charging Messages on page 5‑34 for more information. This light could indicate that there are problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the vehicle This light should come on when the must be driven a short distance with ignition is on, but the engine is not the light on, turn off accessories, This light comes on briefly when the running, as a check to show it is such as the radio and air working. If it does not, have the ignition key is turned to START, but conditioner. the engine is not running, as a vehicle serviced by your dealer. check to show it is working. Malfunction If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp comes on and stays on while the If it does not, have the vehicle Indicator Lamp serviced by your dealer. engine is running, this indicates that A computer system called OBD II there is an OBD II problem and The light should go out once the (On-Board Diagnostics-Second service is required. engine starts. If it stays on, Generation) monitors operation of or comes on while driving, there Malfunctions often are indicated by the fuel, ignition, and emission the system before any problem is could be a problem with the control systems. It ensures that charging system. A charging system apparent. Being aware of the light emissions are at acceptable levels can prevent more serious damage message in the Driver Information for the life of the vehicle, helping to Center (DIC) can also appear. to the vehicle. This system assists produce a cleaner environment. the service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (22,1)

5-22 Instruments and Controls

Notice: If the vehicle is This light comes on during a Light On Steady: An emission continually driven with this light malfunction in one of two ways: control system malfunction has on, after a while, the emission Light Flashing: A misfire condition been detected on the vehicle. controls might not work as well, has been detected. A misfire Diagnosis and service might the vehicle fuel economy might increases vehicle emissions and be required. not be as good, and the engine could damage the emission control The following may correct an might not run as smoothly. This system on the vehicle. Diagnosis emissions system malfunction: could lead to costly repairs that and service might be required. might not be covered by the . Make sure the fuel cap is fully vehicle warranty. To prevent more serious damage to installed. See Filling the Tank on the vehicle: page 9‑44. The diagnostic Notice: Modifications made to system can determine if the . Reduce vehicle speed. the engine, transmission, fuel cap has been left off or exhaust, intake, or fuel system of . Avoid hard accelerations. improperly installed. A loose or the vehicle or the replacement of . Avoid steep uphill grades. missing fuel cap allows fuel to the original tires with other evaporate into the atmosphere. than those of the same Tire . If towing a trailer, reduce the A few driving trips with the cap Performance Criteria (TPC) can amount of cargo being hauled as properly installed should turn affect the vehicle's emission soon as it is possible. the light off. controls and can cause this light to come on. Modifications to If the light continues to flash, when . Make sure the electrical system these systems could lead to it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. is not wet. The system could be costly repairs not covered by Find a safe place to park the wet if the vehicle was driven the vehicle warranty. This could vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at through a deep puddle of also result in a failure to pass a least 10 seconds, and restart the water. The condition is usually required Emission Inspection/ engine. If the light is still flashing, corrected when the electrical Maintenance test. See follow the previous steps and see system dries out. A few driving Accessories and Modifications on your dealer for service as soon trips should turn the light off. as possible. page 10‑3. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (23,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-23

. Make sure to fuel the vehicle Emissions Inspection and The vehicle may not pass with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality Maintenance Programs inspection if: causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed and can Some state/provincial and local . The malfunction indicator lamp is cause: stalling after start-up, governments may have programs on with the engine running, or if stalling when the vehicle is to inspect the on-vehicle emission the light does not come on when changed into gear, misfiring, control equipment. For the the ignition is turned to ON/RUN hesitation on acceleration, inspection, the emission system while the engine is off. or stumbling on acceleration. test equipment is connected . The critical emission control These conditions might go away to the vehicle’s Data Link systems have not been once the engine is warmed up. Connector (DLC). completely diagnosed by the If one or more of these system. This can happen if conditions occurs, change the the battery has recently been fuel brand used. It will require at replaced or if the battery has least one full tank of the proper run down. The diagnostic fuel to turn the light off. system evaluates critical emission control systems See Recommended Fuel on during normal driving. This can page 9‑40. The DLC is under the instrument take several days of routine If none of the above have made the panel to the left of the steering driving. If this has been done light turn off, your dealer can check wheel. See your dealer if assistance and the vehicle still does not the vehicle. The dealer has the is needed. pass the inspection, your dealer proper test equipment and can prepare the vehicle for diagnostic tools to fix any inspection. mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (24,1)

5-24 Instruments and Controls

Brake System When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light also comes on { WARNING Warning Light when the parking brake is set. See The brake system might not be The vehicle brake system consists Parking Brake on page 9‑34 for of two hydraulic circuits. If one more information. The light stays on working properly if the brake circuit is not working, the remaining if the parking brake does not fully system warning light is on. circuit can still work to stop the release. If it stays on after the Driving with the brake system vehicle. For normal braking parking brake is fully released, warning light on can lead to a performance, both circuits need it means the vehicle has a crash. If the light is still on after to be working. brake problem. the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped, If the warning light comes on, there If the light comes on while driving, have the vehicle towed could be a brake problem. Have the pull off the road and stop carefully. brake system inspected right away. The pedal might be harder to push, for service. or the pedal might go closer to the floor. It could take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑93.

Metric English

This light should come on briefly when ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (25,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-25

Antilock Brake System If the regular brake system warning StabiliTrak® Indicator light is also on, the vehicle does not (ABS) Warning Light have antilock brakes and there is a Light problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 5‑24. Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Antilock Brake For vehicles with the StabiliTrak® System (ABS), this light comes on system, this light comes on briefly when the engine is started. or flashes. If it does not, have the vehicle For more information, see serviced by your dealer. If the StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑34. system is working normally the For vehicles with the Tow/Haul Three chimes sound if the light indicator light then goes off. Mode feature, this light comes on turns on and one chime if the If the ABS light stays on, turn the when the Tow/Haul Mode has light turns off. been activated. ignition off. If the light comes on If this light remains on steady, while driving, stop as soon as it is For more information, see Tow/Haul the vehicle needs to be taken in safely possible and turn the ignition Mode on page 9‑31. for service. off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (26,1)

5-26 Instruments and Controls

Tire Pressure Light When the Light is On Steady When the Light Flashes First and This indicates that one or more Then is On Steady of the tires are significantly This indicates that there may be a underinflated. problem with the Tire Pressure A tire pressure message can Monitor System. The light flashes accompany the light. See Tire for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the Messages on page 5‑40 for more information. Stop as soon as ignition cycle. This sequence For vehicles with a Tire Pressure possible, and inflate the tires to the repeats with every ignition cycle. Monitor System (TPMS), this light pressure value shown on the Tire See Tire Pressure Monitor comes on briefly when the engine is and Loading Information Label. See Operation on page 10‑63 for more information. started. It provides information Tire Pressure on page 10‑60 for about tire pressures and the TPMS. more information. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (27,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-27

Engine Oil Pressure Light Notice: Lack of proper engine oil Security Light maintenance can damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the maintenance schedule for changing engine oil. This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your For information regarding this light { WARNING dealer. If the system is working and the vehicle's security system, normally, the indicator light then see Immobilizer Operation on Do not keep driving if the oil goes off. pressure is low. The engine can page 2‑13. become so hot that it catches fire. If the light comes on and stays on, it Someone could be burned. Check means that oil is not flowing through the oil as soon as possible and the engine properly. The vehicle have the vehicle serviced. could be low on oil and it might have some other system problem. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (28,1)

5-28 Instruments and Controls

High-Beam On Light Cruise Control Light Information Displays Driver Information Center (DIC) This vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC). All messages will appear in the This light comes on when the The cruise control light comes on DIC display located at the bottom high-beam headlamps are in use. whenever the cruise control is set. of the instrument panel cluster. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam The light goes out when the cruise The DIC buttons are located on Changer on page 6‑3 for more control is turned off. See Cruise the instrument panel, next to the information. Control on page 9‑37 for more instrument panel cluster. information. The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off. The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system information, and warning messages if a system problem is detected. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (29,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-29

If the vehicle has these features, DIC Operation and Displays 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button the DIC also displays the compass The DIC has different displays to display the odometer, trip direction and the outside air which can be accessed by pressing odometers, fuel range, average temperature when viewing the trip the DIC buttons located on the economy, fuel used, timer, average and fuel information. The compass instrument panel, next to the speed, and digital tachometer. direction appears on the top right instrument panel cluster. T corner of the DIC display. (Vehicle Information): The outside air temperature DIC Buttons Press this button to display the automatically appears in the bottom oil life, units, tire pressure readings right corner of the DIC display. for vehicles with the Tire Pressure If there is a problem with the system Monitor System (TPMS), engine that controls the temperature hours, Tire Pressure Monitor display, the numbers will be System (TPMS) programming for replaced with dashes. If this vehicles with the TPMS and without occurs, have the vehicle serviced a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) by your dealer. transmitter, and compass zone and compass calibration on vehicles If the vehicle has the Duramax with this feature. ® Diesel engine, see the Duramax U Diesel manual for more information. (Customization): Press this button to customize the feature settings on the vehicle. See Vehicle The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle Personalization on page 5‑42 for information, customization, and set/ more information. reset buttons. The button functions V (Set/Reset): Press this button to are detailed in the following pages. set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (30,1)

5-30 Instruments and Controls

Trip/Fuel Menu Items The trip odometer has a feature If the retro-active reset feature is called the retro-active reset. This activated after the vehicle is started, 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this can be used to set the trip odometer but before it begins moving, the button to scroll through the to the number of kilometers (miles) display will show the number of following menu items: driven since the ignition was last kilometers (km) or miles (mi) that Odometer turned on. This can be used if the were driven during the last trip odometer is not reset at the ignition cycle. Press 3 until XX km (mi) beginning of the trip. displays. This display shows the Fuel Range To use the retro-active reset feature, distance the vehicle has been Press 3 until FUEL RANGE driven in either kilometers (km) or press and hold V for at least displays. This display shows the miles (mi). four seconds. The trip odometer will display the number of approximate number of remaining Trip Odometers kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven kilometers (km) or miles (mi) the vehicle can be driven without Press 3 until A or B displays. since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving. Once refueling. The display will show This display shows the current LOW if the fuel level is low. distance traveled in either the vehicle begins moving, the trip kilometers (km) or miles (mi) since odometer will accumulate mileage. The fuel range estimate is based on the last reset for each trip odometer. For example, if the vehicle was an average of the fuel economy Both trip odometers can be used at driven 8 km (5 miles) before it is over recent driving history and the the same time. started again, and then the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel retro-active reset feature is tank. This estimate will change if Each trip odometer can be reset to activated, the display will show driving conditions change. For zero separately by pressing V while 8 km (5 miles). As the vehicle example, if driving in traffic and the desired trip odometer is begins moving, the display will making frequent stops, this display displayed. then increase to 8.1 km (5.1 miles), may read one number, but if the 8.2 km (5.2 miles), etc. vehicle is driven on a freeway, the Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (31,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-31

number may change even though Fuel Used To reset the timer to zero, press and the same amount of fuel is in the 3 hold V while TIMER is displayed. fuel tank. This is because different Press until FUEL USED driving conditions produce different displays. This display shows the Average Speed fuel economies. Generally, freeway number of liters (L) or gallons (gal) Press 3 until AVERAGE SPEED driving produces better fuel of fuel used since the last reset of economy than city driving. this menu item. To reset the fuel displays. This display shows the used information, press and hold V average speed of the vehicle in If the vehicle is low on fuel, the while FUEL USED is displayed. kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles FUEL LEVEL LOW message will be per hour (mph). This average is displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW” Timer calculated based on the various under Fuel System Messages on 3 vehicle speeds recorded since the page 5‑37 for more information. Press until TIMER displays. last reset of this value. To reset This display can be used as a timer. Average Economy the value, press and hold V. To start the timer, press V while The display will return to zero. Press 3 until AVG ECONOMY TIMER is displayed. The display will Digital Tachometer displays. This display shows the show the amount of time that has approximate average liters per passed since the timer was last Press 3 until 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles reset, not including time the ignition Tachometer ##00 RPM displays. per gallon (mpg). This number is is off. Time will continue to be This display shows the engine calculated based on the number of counted as long as the ignition is speed in revolutions per L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the on, even if another display is being minute (RPM). last time this menu item was reset. shown on the DIC. The timer will To reset AVG ECONOMY, press record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes Blank Display and hold V. The display will and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after This display shows no information. return to zero. which the display will return to zero. To stop the timer, press V briefly while TIMER is displayed. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (32,1)

5-32 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle Information Menu In addition to the engine oil life Tire Pressure Items system monitoring the oil life, If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure additional maintenance is T (Vehicle Information): Monitor System (TPMS), the recommended in the Maintenance pressure for each tire can be viewed Press this button to scroll through Schedule in this manual. the following menu items: in the DIC. The tire pressure will be See Scheduled Maintenance on shown in either kilopascals (kPa) or Oil Life page 11‑3 for more information. pounds per square inch (psi). Press T until OIL LIFE Remember, you must reset the OIL Press T until the DIC displays LIFE yourself after each oil change. REMAINING displays. This display FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## It will not reset itself. Also, be shows an estimate of the oil's RIGHT ##. Press T again until careful not to reset the OIL LIFE remaining useful life. If you see accidentally at any time other than the DIC displays REAR TIRES 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the when the oil has just been changed. PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. display, that means 99% of the It cannot be reset accurately until If a low tire pressure condition is current oil life remains. The engine the next oil change. To reset the detected by the system while oil life system will alert you to engine oil life system, see Engine driving, a message advising you to change the oil on a schedule Oil Life System on page 10 13. check the pressure in a specific tire consistent with your driving ‑ will appear in the display. See Tire conditions. Units Pressure on page 10‑60 and Tire When the remaining oil life is low, Press T until UNITS displays. Messages on page 5‑40 for more the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This display allows you to select information. message will appear on the display. between metric or English units of If the tire pressure display shows See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON “ ” measurement. Once in this display, dashes instead of a value, there under Engine Oil Messages on V may be a problem with the vehicle. page 5 36. You should change the press to select between METRIC ‑ If this consistently occurs, see your oil as soon as possible. See Engine or ENGLISH units. dealer for service. Oil on page 10‑10. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (33,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-33

Engine Hours Change Compass Zone Vehicle Messages T The vehicle may have this feature. Press until ENGINE HOURS Messages displayed on the DIC To change the compass zone displays. This display shows the indicate the status of the vehicle or through the DIC, see Compass on total number of hours the engine some action may be needed to page 5 5. has run. ‑ correct a condition. Multiple Relearn Tire Positions Calibrate Compass messages may appear one after another. The vehicle may have this display. The vehicle may have this feature. To access this display, the vehicle The compass can be manually The messages that do not must be in P (Park). If the vehicle calibrated. To calibrate the compass require immediate action can be has the Tire Pressure Monitor through the DIC, see Compass on acknowledged and cleared by System (TPMS), after rotating the page 5‑5. pressing V (Set/Reset). tires or after replacing a tire or Blank Display The messages that require sensor, the system must re-learn This display shows no information. immediate action cannot be cleared the tire positions. To re-learn the tire until that action is performed. positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 10‑62. See Tire All messages should be taken Inspection on page 10‑66, Tire seriously and clearing the message Rotation on page 10‑67 and Tire does not correct the problem. Messages on page 5‑40 for more The following are the possible information. messages and some information about them. If the vehicle has the Duramax Diesel engine, see the Duramax® Diesel manual for more information. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (34,1)

5-34 Instruments and Controls

Battery Voltage and If this message appears, stop as Door Ajar Messages soon as possible and turn off the Charging Messages vehicle. Restart the vehicle and CARGO DOOR OPEN SERVICE BATTERY check for the message on the DIC This message displays and a chime CHARGING SYSTEM display. If the message is still sounds if the cargo door is open displayed or appears again when while the ignition is in ON/RUN. On some vehicles, this message you begin driving, the brake system displays if there is a problem with Turn off the vehicle and check the needs service as soon as possible. cargo door. Restart the vehicle the battery charging system. See your dealer. Under certain conditions, the and check for the message on the DIC display. charging system light may also turn Compass Messages on in the instrument panel cluster. DRIVER DOOR OPEN See Charging System Light on CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN page 5‑21. Driving with this problem CIRCLES This message displays and a chime could drain the battery. Turn off all sounds if the driver door is not fully unnecessary accessories. Have the This message displays when closed and the vehicle is in a drive electrical system checked as soon calibrating the compass. Drive the gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, as possible. See your dealer. vehicle in circles at less than 8 km/h check the door for obstructions, and (5 mph) to complete the calibration. close the door again. Check to see Brake System Messages See Compass on page 5‑5 for more if the message still appears on information. the DIC. SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM CALIBRATION COMPLETE This message displays along with This message displays when the the brake system warning light if compass calibration is complete. there is a problem with the brake See Compass on page 5‑5 for system. See Brake System Warning more information. Light on page 5‑24. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (35,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-35

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air On some vehicles, this message On some vehicles, this message conditioning compressor turns displays and a chime sounds if the displays and a chime sounds if the back on. You can continue to driver side rear door is not fully passenger side rear door is not fully drive the vehicle. closed and the vehicle is in a drive closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, If this message continues to appear, check the door for obstructions, and check the door for obstructions, and have the system repaired by your close the door again. Check to see close the door again. Check to see dealer as soon as possible to avoid if the message still appears on if the message still appears on damage to the engine. the DIC. the DIC. ENGINE OVERHEATED PASSENGER DOOR OPEN Engine Cooling System IDLE ENGINE This message displays and a chime Messages Notice: If you drive the vehicle sounds if the passenger door is not while the engine is overheating, fully closed and the vehicle is in a ENGINE HOT A/C severe engine damage may drive gear. Stop and turn off the (Air Conditioning) OFF occur. If an overheat warning vehicle, check the door for appears on the instrument panel obstructions, and close the door This message displays when the cluster and/or DIC, stop the again. Check to see if the message engine coolant becomes hotter than vehicle as soon as possible. still appears on the DIC. the normal operating temperature. See Engine Overheating on See Engine Coolant Temperature page 10‑25 for more information. Gauge on page 5‑16. To avoid added strain on a hot engine, This message displays when the the air conditioning compressor engine coolant temperature is too automatically turns off. hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge on page 5‑16. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (36,1)

5-36 Instruments and Controls

ENGINE OVERHEATED Engine Oil Messages OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE STOP ENGINE CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Notice: If you drive the vehicle Notice: If you drive the vehicle while the engine is overheating, This message displays when the while the engine oil pressure is severe engine damage may engine oil needs to be changed. low, severe engine damage may occur. If an overheat warning When you change the engine oil, be occur. If a low oil pressure appears on the instrument panel sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE warning appears on the Driver cluster and/or DIC, stop the OIL SOON message. See Engine Information Center (DIC), stop vehicle as soon as possible. Oil Life System on page 10‑13 for the vehicle as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on information on how to reset the Do not drive the vehicle until the page 10‑25 for more information. message. See Engine Oil on cause of the low oil pressure is page 10‑10 and Scheduled This message displays and a chime corrected. See Engine Oil on Maintenance on page 11‑3 for page 10‑10 for more information. sounds if the engine cooling system more information. reaches unsafe temperatures for This message displays if low oil operation. Stop and turn off the ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL pressure levels occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do If the vehicle has an oil level sensor, vehicle as soon as safely possible so to avoid severe damage. This this message displays if the oil level and do not operate it until the cause message clears when the engine in the vehicle is low. Check the oil of the low oil pressure has been has cooled to a safe operating level and correct it as necessary. corrected. Check the oil as temperature. You may need to let the vehicle cool soon as possible and have the or warm up and cycle the ignition to vehicle serviced by your dealer. be sure this message clears. See Engine Oil on page 10‑10. See Engine Oil on page 10‑10 for additional information. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (37,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-37

Engine Power Messages Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED FUEL LEVEL LOW REPLACE BATTERY IN This message displays and a chime This message displays and a REMOTE KEY sounds when the cooling system chime sounds if the fuel level is low. This message displays if a Remote temperature gets too hot and the Refuel as soon as possible. See Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter engine further enters the engine Fuel Gauge on page 5‑14 and Fuel battery is low. The battery needs to coolant protection mode. See on page 9‑40 for more information. be replaced in the transmitter. Engine Overheating on page 10‑25 See “Battery Replacement” under for further information. TIGHTEN GAS CAP Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) This message also displays when This message may display along System Operation on page 2‑3. the engine power is reduced. with the check engine light on the Reduced engine power can affect instrument panel cluster if the fuel Lamp Messages the vehicle's ability to accelerate. cap is not tightened properly. See If this message is on, but there Malfunction Indicator Lamp on AUTOMATIC LIGHT is no reduction in performance, page 5‑21. Reinstall the fuel cap CONTROL OFF proceed to your destination. The fully. See Filling the Tank on This message displays when the performance may be reduced the page 9‑44. The diagnostic system automatic headlamps are turned off. next time the vehicle is driven. The can determine if the fuel cap has See Exterior Lamp Controls on been left off or improperly vehicle may be driven at a reduced page 6‑1 for more information. speed while this message is on, but installed. A loose or missing fuel acceleration and speed may be cap allows fuel to evaporate into AUTOMATIC LIGHT reduced. Anytime this message the atmosphere. A few driving trips CONTROL ON with the cap properly installed stays on, the vehicle should be This message displays when the taken to your dealer for service should turn this light and message off. automatic headlamps are turned on. as soon as possible. See Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6‑1 for more information. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (38,1)

5-38 Instruments and Controls

TURN SIGNAL ON SERVICE TRACTION STABILITRAK OFF This message displays and a chime CONTROL If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this sounds if a turn signal is left on for If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays when you turn off 1.2 km (3/4 of a mile). Move the message displays when there is a StabiliTrak, or when the stability turn signal/multifunction lever to problem with the Traction Control control has been automatically the off position. System (TCS). When this message disabled. To limit wheel spin and displays, the system will not limit realize the full benefits of the Ride Control System wheel spin. Adjust your driving stability enhancement system, you Messages accordingly. See your dealer for should normally leave StabiliTrak service. See StabiliTrak® System on on. However, you should turn SERVICE STABILITRAK page 9‑34 for more information. StabiliTrak off if the vehicle gets ® stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and STABILITRAK NOT READY and you want to rock the vehicle to this message displays, it means If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this attempt to free it, or if you are there may be a problem with the driving in extreme off-road StabiliTrak system. If you see this message may display and the StabiliTrak indicator light on the conditions and require more wheel message, try to reset the system. spin. See If the Vehicle is Stuck on Stop; turn off the engine for at least instrument panel cluster may be on after first driving the vehicle and page 9‑11. To turn the StabiliTrak 15 seconds; then start the engine system on or off, see StabiliTrak® again. If this message still comes exceeding 32 km/h (20 mph) for System on page 9‑34. on, it means there is a problem. 30 seconds. The StabiliTrak system is not functional until the light has You should see your dealer for ® service. The vehicle is safe to drive, turned off. See StabiliTrak System however, you do not have the on page 9‑34 for more information. benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce your speed and drive accordingly. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (39,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-39

There are several conditions that TRACTION CONTROL OFF Anti-Theft Alarm System can cause this message to appear. If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this Messages . One condition is overheating, message displays when the Traction which could occur if StabiliTrak Control System (TCS) is turned off. SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT activates continuously for an Adjust your driving accordingly. SYSTEM ® extended period of time. See StabiliTrak System on This message displays when there . The message also displays if the page 9‑34 for more information. is a problem with the theft-deterrent brake system warning light is on. system. The vehicle may or may not See Brake System Warning Airbag System Messages restart so you may want to take the Light on page 5‑24. vehicle to your dealer before turning SERVICE AIR BAG off the engine. See Immobilizer . The message could display if the Operation on page 2 13 for more stability system takes longer This message displays if there is a ‑ information. than usual to complete its problem with the airbag system. Have your dealer inspect the diagnostic checks due to driving WAIT TO START conditions. system for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5‑18 and This message displays briefly when . The message displays if an Airbag System on page 3‑25 for the theft-deterrent system has engine or vehicle related more information. initially found incorrect conditions problem has been detected and within the vehicle and is making a the vehicle needs service. double check. If your vehicle does See your dealer. not start soon after, try to start it The message turns off as soon as again. If it still does not start, the conditions that caused the have your vehicle serviced by message to be displayed are no your dealer. longer present. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (40,1)

5-40 Instruments and Controls

Service Vehicle Messages This message only appears while Have the tire pressures checked the ignition is in ON/RUN, and will and set to those shown on the Tire SERVICE A/C SYSTEM not disappear until the problem Loading Information label. See Tires This message displays when is resolved. on page 10‑52, Vehicle Load Limits the electronic sensors that control This message cannot be on page 9‑12, and Tire Pressure on the air conditioning and heating acknowledged. page 10‑60. The DIC also shows systems are no longer working. the tire pressure values. See Driver Have the climate control system Tire Messages Information Center (DIC) on serviced by your dealer if you page 5‑28. notice a drop in heating and CHECK TIRE PRESSURE or SERVICE TIRE MONITOR air conditioning efficiency. TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE SYSTEM SERVICE VEHICLE SOON If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this Monitor System (TPMS), this This message displays when a message displays when the non-emissions related malfunction message displays if a part on the pressure in one or more of the tires system is not working properly. The occurs. Have the vehicle serviced is low. The low tire pressure warning by your dealer as soon as possible. tire pressure light also flashes and light will also come on. See Tire then remains on during the same STARTING DISABLED Pressure Light on page 5‑26. This ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure message will also indicate which tire SERVICE THROTTLE Light on page 5‑26. Several needs to be checked. You can conditions may cause this message This message displays if the starting receive more than one tire pressure to appear. See Tire Pressure of the engine is disabled due to the message at a time. To read the Monitor Operation on page 10 63 for electronic throttle control system. ‑ other messages that may have been more information. If the warning Have the vehicle serviced by your sent at the same time, press the comes on and stays on, there may dealer immediately. set/reset button. If a tire pressure be a problem with the TPMS. message appears on the DIC, stop See your dealer. as soon as you can. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (41,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-41

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE Transmission Messages This message displays along with a chime if the transmission fluid in the If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure SERVICE TRANSMISSION vehicle gets hot. Driving with the Monitor System (TPMS), this transmission fluid temperature high message displays when the system This message displays when there can cause damage to the vehicle. is re-learning the tire positions on is a problem with the transmission. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to the vehicle. See Driver Information See your dealer for service. allow the transmission to cool. Center (DIC) on page 5 28 for more ‑ TRANSMISSION HOT This message clears and the chime information. The tire positions must stops when the fluid temperature be re-learned after rotating the tires IDLE ENGINE reaches a safe level. or after replacing a tire or sensor. Notice: If you drive the vehicle See Tire Inspection on page 10‑66, while the transmission fluid is Tire Rotation on page 10‑67, Tire overheating and the transmission Vehicle Reminder Pressure Monitor Operation on temperature warning is displayed Messages page 10‑63, and Tire Pressure on on the instrument panel cluster page 10‑60 for more information. and/or DIC, you can damage the ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE transmission. This could lead to WITH CARE costly repairs that would not be This message displays when the covered by the warranty. Do not outside air temperature is cold drive the vehicle with overheated enough to create icy road transmission fluid or while the conditions. Adjust your driving transmission temperature accordingly. warning is displayed. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (42,1)

5-42 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle The customization preferences are Feature Settings Menu Items automatically recalled. Personalization The following are customization To change customization features that allow you to program This vehicle may have preferences, use the following settings to the vehicle: customization capabilities that allow procedure. you to program certain features to DISPLAY IN ENGLISH one preferred setting. Customization Entering the Feature This feature will only display if a features can only be programmed to Settings Menu language other than English has one setting on the vehicle and 1. Turn the ignition on and place been set. This feature allows you to cannot be programmed to a the vehicle in P (Park). change the language in which the preferred setting for two different DIC messages appear to English. drivers. To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is recommended that Press U until the PRESS V TO All of the customization options may the headlamps are turned off. DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen not be available on your vehicle. appears on the DIC display. Press 2. Press U to enter the feature Only the options available will be the set/reset button once to display settings menu. displayed on the DIC. all DIC messages in English. The default settings for the If the menu is not available, customization features were set FEATURE SETTINGS when the vehicle left the factory, but AVAILABLE IN PARK will may have been changed from their display. Before entering the default state since then. menu, make sure the vehicle is in P (Park). Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (43,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-43

LANGUAGE AUTO DOOR LOCK AUTO DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to This feature allows you to This feature allows you to select select the language in which the select when the doors will whether or not to turn off the DIC messages will appear. automatically lock. automatic door unlocking feature. U U It also allows you to select which Press until the LANGUAGE Press until AUTO DOOR LOCK doors and when the doors will screen appears on the DIC display. appears on the DIC display. Press automatically unlock. Press V once to access the settings V once to access the settings for U Press U until AUTO DOOR for this feature. Then press U to this feature. Then press to scroll UNLOCK appears on the DIC scroll through the following settings: through the following settings: display. Press V once to access SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): ENGLISH (default): All messages the settings for this feature. will appear in English. The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of Then press U to scroll through FRANCAIS: All messages will P (Park). the following settings: appear in French. AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors OFF: None of the doors will ESPANOL: All messages will will automatically lock when the automatically unlock. appear in Spanish. vehicle speed is above 13 km/h DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the ARABIC: All messages will appear (8 mph) for three seconds. driver door will unlock when the key in Arabic. NO CHANGE: No change will be is taken out of the ignition. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver made to this feature. The current setting will remain. door will unlock when the vehicle is setting will remain. To select a setting, press V while shifted into P (Park). To select a setting, press V while the desired setting is displayed ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors the desired setting is displayed on on the DIC. will unlock when the key is taken the DIC. A beep will sound once a out of the ignition. language has been selected. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (44,1)

5-44 Instruments and Controls

ALL IN PARK (default): All of the Press U until REMOTE DOOR NO CHANGE: No change will be doors will unlock when the vehicle LOCK appears on the DIC display. made to this feature. The current is shifted into P (Park). setting will remain. Press V once to access the settings NO CHANGE: No change will be for this feature. Then press U to To select a setting, press V while made to this feature. The current scroll through the following settings: the desired setting is displayed setting will remain. on the DIC. OFF: There will be no feedback To select a setting, press V while when you press Q on the REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK the desired setting is displayed RKE transmitter. on the DIC. This feature allows you to select LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps the type of feedback you will REMOTE DOOR LOCK receive when unlocking the will flash when you press Q on the vehicle with the Remote Keyless This feature allows you to select the RKE transmitter. type of feedback you will receive Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not when locking the vehicle with the HORN ONLY: The horn will sound receive feedback when unlocking Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) on the second press of Q on the the vehicle with the RKE transmitter transmitter. You will not receive RKE transmitter. if the doors are open. See Remote feedback when locking the vehicle Keyless Entry (RKE) System HORN & LIGHTS (default): Operation on page 2‑3 for with the RKE transmitter if the doors The exterior lamps will flash when are open. See Remote Keyless more information. you press Q on the RKE transmitter, Entry (RKE) System Operation on Press U until REMOTE DOOR page 2‑3 for more information. and the horn will sound when Q is UNLOCK appears on the pressed again within five seconds of V the previous command. DIC display. Press once to access the settings for this feature. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (45,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-45

Then press U to scroll through the The key must be out of the ignition EXIT LIGHTING following settings: for this feature to work. You can This feature allows you to temporarily override delayed LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps select the amount of time you want locking by pressing the power the exterior lamps to remain on will not flash when you press K on door lock switch twice or Q on when it is dark enough outside. the RKE transmitter. the RKE transmitter twice. This happens after the key is turned LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior See Delayed Locking on page 2‑8 from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. K for more information. lamps will flash when you press Press U until EXIT LIGHTING on the RKE transmitter. Press U until DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press appears on the DIC display. Press V NO CHANGE: No change will be V once to access the settings for made to this feature. The current once to access the settings for this feature. Then press U to scroll setting will remain. this feature. Then press U to scroll through the following settings: through the following settings: To select a setting, press V while OFF: The exterior lamps will not the desired setting is displayed OFF: There will be no delayed turn on. locking of the vehicle's doors. on the DIC. 10 SECONDS (default): DELAY DOOR LOCK ON (default): The doors will not The exterior lamps will stay on lock until five seconds after the last for 10 seconds. This feature allows you to select door is closed. whether or not the locking of the 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will doors will be delayed. When locking NO CHANGE: No change will be stay on for one minute. the doors with the power door lock made to this feature. The current setting will remain. 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will switch and a door is open, this stay on for two minutes. feature will delay locking the doors To select a setting, press V while until five seconds after the last door NO CHANGE: No change will be the desired setting is displayed on made to this feature. The current is closed. You will hear three chimes the DIC. to signal that the delayed locking setting will remain. feature is in use. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (46,1)

5-46 Instruments and Controls

To select a setting, press V while ON (default): If it is dark enough CHIME VOLUME the desired setting is displayed on outside, the exterior lamps will turn This feature allows you to select the the DIC. on briefly when you unlock the volume level of the chime. vehicle with the RKE transmitter. APPROACH LIGHTING The lamps will remain on for Press U until CHIME VOLUME This feature allows you to select 20 seconds or until Q on the RKE appears on the DIC display. Press whether or not to have the exterior transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle V once to access the settings for lamps turn on briefly during low light is no longer off. See Remote this feature. Then press U to scroll periods after unlocking the vehicle Keyless Entry (RKE) System through the following settings: using the Remote Keyless Operation on page 2‑3 for more Entry (RKE) transmitter. information. NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal level. U NO CHANGE: No change will be Press until APPROACH LOUD: The chime volume will be LIGHTING appears on the DIC made to this feature. The current setting will remain. set to a loud level. display. Press V once to access the settings for this feature. Then press To select a setting, press V while U to scroll through the following the desired setting is displayed on settings: the DIC. OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (47,1)

Instruments and Controls 5-47

NO CHANGE: No change will be DO NOT RESTORE: Exiting the Feature made to this feature. The current The customization features will Settings Menu setting will remain. not be set to their factory default settings. The feature settings menu will There is no default for chime be exited when any of the volume. The volume will stay at To select a setting, press V while following occurs: the last known setting. the desired setting is displayed . The vehicle is no longer in To select a setting, press V while on the DIC. ON/RUN. the desired setting is displayed EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS . 3 T on the DIC. The or DIC buttons This feature allows you to exit the are pressed. FACTORY SETTINGS feature settings menu. . The end of the feature settings This feature allows you to set all of Press U until FEATURE SETTINGS menu is reached and exited. the customization features back to PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the . A 40 second time period has their factory default settings. DIC display. Press V once to exit elapsed with no selection made. Press U until FACTORY SETTINGS the menu. appears on the DIC display. Press V once to access the settings for If you do not exit, pressing U will this feature. Then press U to scroll return you to the beginning of the through the following settings: feature settings menu. RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features will be set to their factory default settings. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (48,1)

5-48 Instruments and Controls

2 NOTES Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Lighting 6-1

Lighting Exterior Lighting It controls the following systems: . Headlamps Exterior Lamp Controls . Taillamps Exterior Lighting Exterior Lamp Controls ...... 6-1 . Parking Lamps Exterior Lamps Off . License Plate Lamps Reminder ...... 6-2 Headlamp High/Low-Beam . Instrument Panel Lights Changer ...... 6-3 The exterior lamps control has Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-3 four positions: Daytime Running O (Off): Briefly turn the control to Lamps (DRL) ...... 6-3 Automatic Headlamp this position to turn the automatic System ...... 6-4 headlamps and Daytime Running Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4 Lamps (DRL) off or back on. Turn and Lane-Change For vehicles first sold in Canada, Signals ...... 6-5 the off position only works for The exterior lamps control is located vehicles that are shifted into the Interior Lighting on the instrument panel to the left of P (Park) position. Instrument Panel Illumination the steering wheel. Control ...... 6-5 Dome Lamps ...... 6-6 Reading Lamps ...... 6-6 Lighting Features Entry/Exit Lighting ...... 6-7 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7 Battery Power Protection ...... 6-7 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

6-2 Lighting

AUTO (Automatic): Turns on the 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the Exterior Lamps Off headlamps automatically at normal headlamps together with the Reminder brightness, together with the following lamps listed below. following: If a door is open, a reminder chime . Parking Lamps . Parking Lamps sounds when the headlamps or . Instrument Panel Lights parking lamps are manually turned . Instrument Panel Lights on and the key is out of the ignition. . Taillamps . Taillamps To turn off the chime, turn the . License Plate Lamps headlamp switch to O or AUTO and . License Plate Lamps If the headlamps are turned on then back on, or close and re‐open ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the while the vehicle is on, the the door. In the auto mode, the parking lamps together with the headlamps turn off automatically headlamps turn off once the ignition following: 10 minutes after the ignition is is in LOCK/OFF or may remain on . Instrument Panel Lights turned off. If the headlamps are until the headlamp delay ends, turned on while the vehicle is off, if enabled in the Driver Information . Taillamps the headlamps will continue to stay Center (DIC). See “Exit Lighting” . License Plate Lamps on. To prevent the battery from under Vehicle Personalization on being drained, turn the control to the page 5‑42. O position. A warning chime sounds if the driver door is opened while the ignition switch is off and the headlamps are on. To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever toward the instrument panel. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

Lighting 6-3

Headlamp High/ Flash-to-Pass The DRL system comes on in daylight when the following Low-Beam Changer This feature is used to signal to the conditions are met: 2 3 vehicle ahead that you want (Headlamp High/Low‐Beam . The ignition is on. Changer): Pull the turn signal lever to pass. all the way toward you to change If the headlamps are off or in the . The exterior lamps control is in the headlamps from low to high low‐beam position, pull the turn the AUTO position. beam. Then release it. signal lever toward you to . The shift lever is not in P (Park). momentarily switch to high‐beams. . The light sensor determines it Release the lever to turn the is daytime. high-beam headlamps off. When the DRL are on, the taillamps, sidemarker, instrument panel and Daytime Running other lamps will not be on. Lamps (DRL) The automatic headlamp system This instrument panel cluster light Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can automatically switches from DRL to comes on when the high beam make it easier for others to see the the headlamps depending on the headlamps are on. front of the vehicle during the day. darkness of the surroundings. Fully functional daytime running To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada. lamp control to O and then release it. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission must be in the P (Park) position, before the DRL can be turned off. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

6-4 Lighting

Automatic Headlamp There is a delay in the transition Hazard Warning Flashers between the daytime and nighttime System operation of the Daytime Running | (Hazard Warning Flashers): When it is dark enough outside and Lamps (DRL) and the automatic Press this button located on top of the headlamp switch is in AUTO, headlamp systems so that driving the steering column, to make the the automatic headlamp system under bridges or bright overhead front and rear turn signal lamps turns on the headlamps, along with street lights does not affect the flash on and off. This warns the taillamps, sidemarker, parking system. The DRL and automatic others that you are having trouble. lamps, roof marker lamps, and the headlamp system is only affected Press again to turn the flashers off. instrument panel lights. The radio when the light sensor sees a When the hazard warning flashers lights will also be dim. change in lighting lasting longer are on, the vehicle's turn signals than the delay. To turn off the automatic headlamp will not work. system, turn the exterior lamps If the vehicle is started in a dark switch to the off position and then garage, the automatic headlamp release. For vehicles first sold in system comes on immediately. Canada, the transmission must be Once the vehicle leaves the garage, in the P (Park) position, before the it takes approximately 30 seconds automatic headlamp system can for the automatic headlamp system be turned off. to change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay, the The vehicle has a light sensor instrument panel cluster may not be located on the top of the instrument as bright as usual. Make sure the panel. Do not cover the sensor or instrument panel brightness the system will come on whenever control is in the full bright position. the ignition is on. See Instrument Panel Illumination The system may also turn on the Control on page 6‑5. headlamps when driving through a parking garage or tunnel. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Lighting 6-5

Turn and Lane-Change The lever returns to its starting Interior Lighting Signals position when released. If after signaling a turn or lane Instrument Panel change the arrow flashes rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb Illumination Control may be burned out. The knob for this feature is located Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb to the left of the steering column. is not burned out, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 10‑45. G : An arrow on the instrument Turn Signal On Chime panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. If the turn signal is left on for more than 1.2 km (3/4 mi), a chime To signal a turn, move the lever all sounds at each flash of the turn the way up or down. signal and the message TURN To signal a lane change, raise or SIGNAL ON also appears in the lower the lever until the arrow Driver Information Center (DIC). starts to flash. The turn signal See Lamp Messages on page 5‑37. automatically flashes three times To turn off the chime and message, and if the tow‐haul mode is active it move the turn signal lever to the flashes six times. Holding the off position. D (Instrument Panel Lights): turn signal lever for more than Push the knob to extend and then one second causes the turn signals turn clockwise or counterclockwise to flash continually until the lever to brighten or dim the instrument is released. panel lights and the radio display. This only works if the headlamps or parking lamps are on. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

6-6 Lighting

Dome Lamps Dome Lamp Override E DOME OFF: Press this button in and the dome lamps remain off The dome lamps come on when any The DOME OFF E button is when a door is opened. Press the door is opened. They turn off after located above the instrument button again to return it to the all the doors are closed. panel brightness knob. extended position so that the The instrument panel brightness dome lamps come on when a knob extends when D is pressed. door is opened. To manually turn on the dome lamps, press D then turn the knob Reading Lamps clockwise to the farthest position. For vehicles with reading lamps, In this position, the dome lamps press the button located next to remain on whether a door is each lamp to turn it on or off. opened or closed. The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other locations. The lamps cannot be adjusted.

The dome lamp override sets the dome lamps to remain off or come on automatically when a door is opened. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

Lighting 6-7

Lighting Features If the vehicle has a voltmeter gauge It can increase engine idle speed to or a voltage display on the Driver generate more power, whenever Information Center (DIC), you may needed. It can temporarily reduce Entry/Exit Lighting see the voltage move up or down. the power demands of some The vehicle has an illuminated This is normal. If there is a problem, accessories. entry/exit feature. an alert will be displayed. Normally, these actions occur in The dome lamps come on if The battery can be discharged at steps or levels, without being the E button is in the out position, idle if the electrical loads are very noticeable. In rare cases at the high. This is true for all vehicles. highest levels of corrective action, when a door is opened or the key is This is because the generator this action may be noticeable to the removed from the ignition. (alternator) may not be spinning fast driver. If so, a Driver Information enough at idle to produce all the Center (DIC) message might be Battery Load power that is needed for very high displayed, such as SERVICE Management electrical loads. BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM. The vehicle may have Electric A high electrical load occurs when If this messages displays, it is Power Management (EPM) that several of the following are on, such recommended that the driver reduce estimates the battery's temperature as: headlamps, high beams, fog the electrical loads as much as and state of charge. It then adjusts lamps, rear window defogger, possible. See Battery Voltage and the voltage for best performance climate control fan at high speed, Charging Messages on page 5‑34. and extended life of the battery. heated seats, engine cooling fans, Battery Power Protection When the battery's state of charge trailer loads, and loads plugged into is low, the voltage is raised slightly accessory power outlets. This feature shuts off the dome to quickly bring the charge back up. EPM works to prevent excessive lamps if they are left on for more When the state of charge is high, discharge of the battery. It does this than 10 minutes when the ignition is the voltage is lowered slightly to by balancing the generator's output in LOCK/OFF. This helps to prevent prevent overcharging. and the vehicle's electrical needs. the battery from running down. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Infotainment System 7-1

Audio Players Introduction Infotainment CD Player ...... 7-13 System Auxiliary Devices ...... 7-18 Infotainment Phone If the vehicle came without a radio, Introduction Bluetooth ...... 7-23 the wiring provisions for a radio and Infotainment ...... 7-1 an antenna were installed at the Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 7-2 assembly plant, so that if you Operation ...... 7-3 want, a radio can be installed at the dealer. Radio AM-FM Radio ...... 7-8 Determine which radio the vehicle Satellite Radio ...... 7-10 has and read the following pages to Radio Reception ...... 7-12 become familiar with its features. Fixed Mast Antenna (Multi-Band) ...... 7-12 { WARNING Fixed Mast Antenna (Care) ...... 7-12 Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others. Do not give extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

7-2 Infotainment System

To minimize taking your eyes off the Notice: The chime signals related Theft-Deterrent Feature road while driving, do the following to safety belts, parking brake, and ® while the vehicle is parked: other functions of the vehicle TheftLock is designed to operate through the radio/ discourage theft of the radio. . Become familiar with the entertainment system. If that The feature works automatically by operation and controls of the learning a portion of the Vehicle audio system. equipment is replaced or additional equipment is added Identification Number (VIN). If the . Set up the tone, speaker to the vehicle, the chimes may radio is moved to a different vehicle, adjustments, and preset radio not work. Make sure that it does not operate and either LOC stations. replacement or additional or LOCKED displays. For more information, see Defensive equipment is compatible with When the radio and vehicle are Driving on page 9‑2. the vehicle before installing it. turned off, there may be a blinking See Accessories and red light to indicate TheftLock is Notice: Contact your dealer Modifications on page 10‑3. armed. before adding any equipment. The vehicle has Retained With TheftLock activated, the radio Adding audio or communication Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, does not operate if stolen. equipment could interfere with the audio system can be played the operation of the engine, radio, even after the ignition is turned off. or other systems, and could See Retained Accessory Power damage them. Follow federal (RAP) on page 9‑21 for more rules covering mobile radio and information. telephone equipment. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

Infotainment System 7-3

Operation

AM-FM Radio Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

7-4 Infotainment System

4 (Information) (AM-FM Radio and AM-FM Radio with CD): Press to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time. While the ignition is off, press this button to display the time. Press to display additional text information related to the current FM-RDS station or MP3 song. A choice of additional information such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) can display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired tab, or press the softkey located under any one of the tabs and the information about that tab displays. Radio with CD (MP3) Shown; Radio with USB and CD (MP3) and Radio with CD Similar

The vehicle has one of these radios Using the Radio as its audio system. O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on and off. Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Infotainment System 7-5

Speed Compensated Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) Setting the Tone Volume (SCV): Radios with (AM-FM Radio and AM-FM (Bass/Midrange/Treble) Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) Radio with CD) (All Except AM-FM Radio automatically adjust the radio and Radio with CD) volume to compensate for road and To adjust the bass or treble: BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, wind noise as the vehicle's speed 1. Press the f knob until Bass or changes while driving, so that the or Treble): To adjust the bass, Treble displays. volume level stays consistent. midrange, or treble: 2. To adjust the setting, do one of To activate SCV: f the following: 1. Press the knob until the 1. Set the radio volume to the tone control tabs display. . f desired level. Turn the knob. 2. Highlight the desired tone 2. Press the MENU button to . Press either ¨ SEEK, control tab by doing one of the following: display the radio setup menu. or © SEEK. 3. Press the softkey under the . Press the f knob. . Press either \ FWD, AUTO VOLUM (automatic . or s REV. Press the softkey under volume) tab on the radio display. the desired tab. 4. Press the softkey under the EQ (Equalization): Press this desired Speed Compensated button to choose bass and treble Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med, equalization settings designed for or High) to select the level of different types of music. Selecting radio volume compensation. MANUAL, or changing bass or The display times out after treble, returns the EQ to the manual approximately 10 seconds. Each bass and treble settings. higher setting allows for more Unique EQ settings can be saved radio volume compensation at for each source. faster vehicle speeds. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

7-6 Infotainment System

3. Adjust the setting by doing To quickly adjust all tone and Adjusting the Speakers one of the following: speaker controls to the middle (Balance/Fade) (AM-FM Radio position, press the f knob for . Turn the f knob clockwise and AM-FM Radio with CD) or counterclockwise. more than two seconds until a To adjust the balance or fade: beep sounds. . ` f Press the ¨ SEEK, EQ (Equalization): Press this 1. Press or press the knob or © SEEK. button to choose bass and treble until the speaker control tab equalization settings designed for displays. . Press the \ FWD, different types of music. Selecting 2. To adjust the setting, do one of or s REV. MANUAL, or changing bass or the following: treble, returns the EQ to the If a station's frequency is weak or if manual bass and treble settings. . Turn the f knob. there is static, decrease the treble. Unique EQ settings can be saved . To quickly adjust bass, midrange, Press either ¨ SEEK, for each source. or treble to the middle position, or © SEEK. press the softkey positioned under If the radio has a Bose® audio the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for system, the EQ settings are either . Press either \ FWD, more than two seconds. A beep MANUAL or TALK. or s REV. sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

Infotainment System 7-7

Adjusting the Speakers 3. Adjust the setting by doing Radio Messages one of the following: (Balance/Fade) Calibration Error: The audio (All Except AM-FM Radio . Turn the f knob clockwise system has been calibrated and Radio with CD) or counterclockwise. for the vehicle from the factory. BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): If Calibration Error displays, it . To adjust the balance or fade: Press the ¨ SEEK, means that the radio has not been or © SEEK. configured properly for the vehicle 1. Press the f knob until the and it must be returned to your speaker control tabs display. . Press the \ FWD, dealer for service. 2. Highlight the desired speaker or s REV. Locked or Loc: One of these control tab by doing one of messages will display when the To quickly adjust all speaker and ® the following: tone controls to the middle position, TheftLock system has locked up the radio. Take the vehicle to your . f press the f knob for more than Press the knob. dealer for service. two seconds. . Press the softkey under the If any error occurs repeatedly or if desired tab. If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is an error cannot be corrected, turned on, the radio disables FADE contact your dealer. and mutes the rear speakers. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

7-8 Infotainment System

Radio Finding a Station For AM-FM Radio and Radio with CD (Base), scan presets within the BAND: Press to switch current selected band by pressing between FM1, FM2, AM and XM. AM-FM Radio and holding either SEEK arrow for The selection displays. Radio Data System (RDS) four seconds until a double beep f (Tune): Turn clockwise or sounds. The radio goes to a stored The Radio may have a Radio Data counterclockwise to increase or preset, plays for a few seconds if a System (RDS). The RDS feature is decrease the station frequency. strong signal is present, then goes available for use only on FM to the next stored preset. The stations that broadcast RDS © SEEK ¨ : Press the arrows to go to the previous or to the next station station frequency flashes while the information. This system relies upon radio is in the scan mode. receiving specific information from and stay there. these stations and only works when To scan stations, press and hold Setting Preset Stations the information is available. While either arrow for two seconds until a If the radio does not have a the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS beep sounds. The radio goes to a FAV button, up to 18 stations station, the station name or call station, plays for a few seconds, (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), letters displays. In rare cases, a then goes to the next station. can be programmed on the radio station could broadcast For AM-FM Radio and Radio with six numbered softkeys, by incorrect information that causes CD (Base), the station frequency performing the following steps: the radio features to work flashes while the radio is in the scan improperly. If this happens, mode. Press either arrow again to 1. Turn the radio on. contact the radio station. stop scanning. 2. Press BAND to select FM1, The radio seeks and scans stations FM2, or AM. only with a strong signal that are in 3. Tune in the desired station. the selected band. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

Infotainment System 7-9

4. Press and hold one of the Press the FAV button to go through The number of favorites pages can six numbered softkeys for up to six pages of favorites, each be setup using the MENU button. three seconds until a beep having six favorite stations available To setup the number of favorites sounds. When that softkey is per page. Each page of favorites pages: pressed and released, the can contain any combination of 1. Press the MENU button to station that was set, returns. AM and FM stations. display the radio setup menu. 5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for The balance/fade and tone settings 2. Press the softkey located below each softkey. that were previously adjusted, are the FAV 1-6 tab. stored with the favorite stations. Storing a Radio Station as a 3. Select the desired number of Favorite To store a station as a favorite: favorites pages by pressing the Drivers are encouraged to set up 1. Tune to the desired radio station. softkey located below the their radio station favorites while the 2. Press the FAV button to display displayed page numbers. vehicle is parked. Tune to favorite the page where the station is to 4. Press the FAV button, or let the stations using the presets, favorites be stored. menu time out, to return to the button, and steering wheel controls, 3. Press and hold one of the original main radio screen if the vehicle has this feature. six softkeys until a beep sounds. showing the radio station See Defensive Driving on page 9 2. ‑ When that softkey is pressed frequency tabs and to begin the FAV (Favorites): If the vehicle has and released, the station that process of programming your a FAV button, a maximum of was set, returns. favorites for the chosen amount 36 stations can be programmed as of numbered pages. 4. Repeat the steps for each favorites using the six softkeys softkey radio station you want positioned below the radio station stored as a favorite. frequency tabs and by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button). Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

7-10 Infotainment System

Satellite Radio To scan stations, press and hold Setting Preset Stations either arrow for two seconds until a If the radio does not have a Finding a Category (CAT) beep sounds. The radio goes to a FAV button, up to 18 stations Station station, plays for a few seconds, (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), then goes to the next station. CAT (Category): The CAT button is can be programmed on the For AM-FM Radio and Radio with used to find XM stations while the six numbered softkeys, by ™ CD (Base), the station frequency radio is in the XM mode. performing the following steps: ™ flashes while the radio is in the scan XM™ is a satellite radio service that mode. Press either arrow again to 1. Turn the radio on. is based in the United States and stop scanning. 2. Press BAND to select FM1, Canada only. The radio seeks and scans stations FM2, or AM. Finding a Station only with a strong signal that are in 3. Tune in the desired station. the selected band. BAND: Press to switch 4. Press and hold one of the between FM1, FM2, AM, and XM. For AM-FM Radio and Radio with six numbered softkeys for The selection displays. CD (Base), scan presets within the three seconds until a beep f current selected band by pressing sounds. When that softkey is (Tune): Turn clockwise or and holding either SEEK arrow for counterclockwise to increase or pressed and released, the four seconds until a double beep station that was set, returns. decrease the station frequency. sounds. The radio goes to a stored © SEEK ¨ : Press the arrows preset, plays for a few seconds if a 5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for to go to the previous or to the strong signal is present, then goes each softkey. next station and stay there. to the next stored preset. The station frequency flashes while the radio is in the scan mode. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

Infotainment System 7-11

Storing a Radio Station as a The balance/fade and tone settings The number of favorites pages can Favorite that were previously adjusted, are be setup using the MENU button. stored with the favorite stations. To setup the number of favorites Drivers are encouraged to set up pages: their radio station favorites while the To store a station as a favorite: vehicle is parked. Tune to favorite 1. Tune to the desired radio station. 1. Press the MENU button to stations using the presets, favorites display the radio setup menu. button, and steering wheel controls, 2. Press the FAV button to display the page where the station is to 2. Press the softkey located below if the vehicle has this feature. the FAV 1-6 tab. See Defensive Driving on page 9‑2. be stored. 3. Press and hold one of the 3. Select the desired number of FAV (Favorites): If the vehicle favorites pages by pressing the has a FAV button, a maximum of six softkeys until a beep sounds. When that softkey is pressed softkey located below the 36 stations can be programmed as displayed page numbers. favorites using the six softkeys and released, the station that positioned below the radio station was set, returns. 4. Press the FAV button, or let frequency tabs and by using the 4. Repeat the steps for each the menu time out, to return to radio favorites page button softkey radio station you want the original main radio screen (FAV button). Press the FAV button stored as a favorite. showing the radio station to go through up to six pages of frequency tabs and to begin the favorites, each having six favorite process of programming your stations available per page. Each favorites for the chosen amount page of favorites can contain any of numbered pages. combination of AM and FM stations. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

7-12 Infotainment System

Radio Reception FM Stereo if the vehicle has these features. Keep the antenna clear of FM stereo gives the best sound, Frequency interference and static obstructions for clear reception. but FM signals reach only about can occur during normal radio Make sure there is sufficient 16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles). reception if items such as cell phone clearance when entering garages or Tall buildings or hills can interfere chargers, vehicle convenience parking structures. accessories, and external electronic with FM signals, causing the sound devices are plugged into the to fade in and out. Fixed Mast accessory power outlet. If there is Cellular Phone Usage interference or static, unplug Antenna (Care) the item from the accessory Cellular phone usage may The fixed mast antenna can power outlet. cause interference with the radio. withstand most car washes without This interference may occur when AM being damaged as long as it is making or receiving phone calls, securely attached to the base. The range for most AM stations is charging the phone's battery, If the mast becomes slightly bent, greater than for FM, especially at or simply having the phone on. This straighten it out by hand. If the mast night. The longer range can cause interference causes an increased is badly bent, replace it. station frequencies to interfere with level of static while listening to the each other. For better radio radio. If static is received while Make sure there is sufficient reception, most AM radio stations listening to the radio, unplug the clearance when entering garages or boost the power levels during the cellular phone and turn it off. parking structures. day, and then reduce these levels Occasionally check to make sure during the night. Static can also Fixed Mast Antenna the antenna is tightened to its base. occur when things like storms and (Multi-Band) If tightening is required, tighten power lines interfere with radio by hand. reception. When this happens, try The multi-band antenna is located reducing the treble on the radio. on the roof of the vehicle. The antenna is used for OnStar and the XM Satellite Radio Service System; Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

Infotainment System 7-13

Audio Players and the loading slot free of If the surface of a CD is soiled, foreign materials, liquids, clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth or and debris. dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, CD Player neutral detergent solution mixed If an error displays, see “ CD Player with water. Make sure the wiping Care of the CD Player Messages” later in this section. process starts from the center to Do not add any label to a CD. Care of CDs the edge. It could get caught in the CD. If a CD is recorded on a personal If playing a CD-R, the sound quality Inserting a CD computer and a description label is can be reduced due to CD-R or (Single CD Player) CD-RW quality, the method of needed, try labeling the top of the Insert a CD partway into the slot, recorded CD with a marking pen. recording, the quality of the music that has been recorded, and the label side up. The player pulls it in The use of CD lens cleaners way the CD-R or CD-RW has been and the CD should begin playing. is not advised, due to the risk of handled. Handle them carefully. contaminating the lens of the Ejecting a CD Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in their (Single CD Player) CD optics with lubricants internal to original cases or other protective the CD player mechanism. cases and away from direct sunlight Z EJECT: Press and release to Notice: If a label is added to a and dust. The CD player scans the eject the disc. Remove the CD CD, or more than one CD is bottom surface of the disc. If the when Remove Disc displays. If the inserted into the slot at a time, surface of a CD is damaged, such disc is not removed, after several or an attempt is made to play as cracked, broken, or scratched, seconds the disc is automatically scratched or damaged CDs, the the CD does not play properly or not pulled back into the player. CD player could be damaged. at all. Do not touch the bottom side While using the CD player, use of a CD while handling it; this could only CDs in good condition damage the surface. Pick up CDs without any label, load one CD at by grasping the outer edges or the a time, and keep the CD player edge of the hole and the outer edge. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (14,1)

7-14 Infotainment System

Playing a CD If a portable audio player is not ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the connected, No Input Device Found If the ignition or radio is turned off “ ” next track. displays. with a CD in the player, it stays in Press and hold, or press multiple the player. When the ignition or 4 (Information): Press to display times, to continue moving forward radio is turned on, the CD starts additional text information related to through the tracks on the CD. playing where it stopped, if it was the current song. If information is s the last selected audio source. available, the song title information REV (Fast Reverse): displays on the top line of the Press and hold to reverse playback When a CD is inserted, the CD display and artist information quickly within a track. symbol displays on the left side of displays on the bottom line. \ FWD (Fast Forward): the radio display. As each new track When information is not available, starts to play, the track number Press and hold to advance playback NO INFO displays. quickly within a track. displays. f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on RDM (Random): Press to listen The CD player can play the smaller the CD that is currently playing. to tracks in random, rather than 8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the © SEEK: Press to go to the start of sequential order. To use random, do one of the following: smaller CDs are loaded in the same the current track if more than manner. 10 seconds on the CD have played. For the AM-FM Radio with CD: CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to Press to go to the previous track if 1. Press the RDM button until the cycle between CD or Auxiliary when less than 10 seconds on the CD random icon displays. have played. listening to the radio. The CD icon 2. Press the RDM button again and a message showing the disc Press and hold, or press multiple until the random icon disappears and/or track number will display times, to continue moving backward from the display. when a CD is in the player. Press through the tracks on the CD. again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device; see Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑18 for more information. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (15,1)

Infotainment System 7-15

For the Radio with CD (MP3) and Compressed Audio or Mixed Root Directory Radio with USB and CD (MP3): Mode Discs The root directory is treated as a 1. Press the softkey positioned The radio can play discs that folder. Files are stored in the root under the RDM tab until Random contain both uncompressed directory when the disc or storage Current Disc displays. CD audio and MP3 files. If both device does not contain folders. 2. Press the softkey again to turn formats are on the disc, the radio Files accessed from the root off random play. reads all MP3 files first, then the directory of a CD display as uncompressed CD audio files. F1 ROOT. MP3 Supported Files ‐ CD‐R‐ or CD‐RW‐Supported File Empty Folder The Radio with CD (MP3) and and Folder Structure Folders that do not contain files are Radio with USB and CD (MP3) have The radio supports: skipped, and the player advances to the capability of playing an MP3 the next folder that contains files. CD-R or CD-RW disc. . Up to 50 folders. Order of Play Format . Up to 8 folders in depth. Compressed audio files are Radios that have the capability of . Up to 50 playlists. accessed in the following order: playing MP3s can play.mp3 or . Up to 255 files. .wma files that were recorded onto . Playlists (Px). . Playlists with an .m3u or a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files . Files stored in the root directory. can be recorded with the following .wpl extension. fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or . Files stored in folders in the 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, .cda file extension. root directory. 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (16,1)

7-16 Infotainment System

Tracks are played in the following Track names longer than played. If a CD-R or CD-RW order: 32 characters or four pages are contains more than the maximum shortened. The display does not of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and . Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues show parts of words on the last 512 folders and files, the player sequentially through all tracks in page of text and the extension of allows access and navigates up to each playlist. When the last the file name is not displayed. the maximum, but all items over the maximum are not accessible. track of the last playlist has Preprogrammed Playlists played, play continues from the Playing an MP3 first track of the first playlist. CDs that have preprogrammed playlists reated using WinAmp™, 4 (Information): Press to display . Play begins from the first track MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ additional text information related to in the first folder and continues software can be accessed; however, the current song. If information is sequentially through all tracks in there is no playlist‐editing capability available, the song title information each folder. When the last track using the radio. These playlists are displays on the top line of the of the last folder has played, treated as special folders containing display and artist information play continues from the first compressed audio song files. displays on the bottom line. track of the first folder. Playlists that have an .m3u or When information is not available, File System and Naming .pls file extension and are stored NO INFO displays. f The song name that displays is the on a USB device may be supported (Tune): Turn to select MP3's on song name that is contained in the by the radio with a USB port. the CD currently playing. ID3 tag. If the song name is not Playlists can be changed by using © SEEK: Press to go to the start of present in the ID3 tag, then the the softkeys below the S c and the track, if more than 10 seconds radio displays the file name without c T tabs, the f knob, the have played. Press and hold or the extension (such as .mp3) as © SEEK button, or the press multiple times to continue the track name. ¨ SEEK button. An MP3 CD-R or moving backward through tracks. CD-RW that has been recorded without using file folders can be Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (17,1)

Infotainment System 7-17

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next c T (Next Folder): When the scan is finished, the disc track. Press and hold or press Press the softkey below the begins playing files in order by multiple times to continue moving c T tab to go to the first track artist. The current artist playing is forward through tracks. in the next folder. shown on the second line of the display. Once all songs by that artist s REV (Reverse): Press and hold RDM (Random): Press to listen to are played, the player moves to the to reverse playback quickly. Sound tracks in random, rather than next artist in alphabetical order and is heard at a reduced volume and sequential order. To use random, begins playing files by that artist. the elapsed time of the file displays. do one of the following: To listen to files by another artist, Release s REV to resume playing. For the Radio with CD (MP3) and press the softkey located below \ FWD (Fast Forward): Radio with USB and CD (MP3): either arrow tab. The disc goes to Press and hold to advance playback 1. Press the softkey positioned the next or previous artist in quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced under the RDM tab until Random alphabetical order. Continue volume and the elapsed time of the Current Disc displays. pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the desired file displays. Release \ FWD to 2. Press the softkey again to turn artist displays. resume playing. The elapsed time of off random play. the file displays. To change from playback by artist to h (Music Navigator): Press the S c (Previous Folder): playback by album: softkey below the h tab to play Press the softkey below the the files in order by artist or album. 1. Press the softkey located S c tab to go to the first track in below the Sort By tab. the previous folder. The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag 2. Press one of the softkeys information. It can take several below the Album tab from the minutes to scan the disc depending sort screen. on the number of files on the disc. 3. Press the softkey below the The radio may begin playing while it Back tab to return to the main is scanning in the background. music navigator screen. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (18,1)

7-18 Infotainment System

The album name displays on the . The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, Auxiliary Devices second line between the arrows, or upside down. and songs from the current album . The air is very humid. If so, wait Using the Auxiliary Input Jack begin to play. Once all songs from about an hour and try again. Radios with an auxiliary input jack that album have played, the player . located on the lower right side of the moves to the next album in There was a problem while burning the CD. faceplate can connect to an external alphabetical order on the CD and audio device such as an iPod®, begins playing MP3's from that . The label is caught in the MP3 player, or CD player, for use as album. CD player. another source for audio listening. To exit music navigator mode, press If the CD is not playing correctly, This input jack is not an audio the softkey below the Back tab to for any other reason, try a known output; do not plug headphones return to normal MP3 playback. good CD. into the front auxiliary input jack. CD Player Messages If any error occurs repeatedly Drivers are encouraged to set up or if an error cannot be corrected, any auxiliary device while the CHECK DISC: If this message contact your dealer. If the radio vehicle is in P (Park). See displays and/or the CD ejects, it displays an error message, write it Defensive Driving on page 9‑2 for could be for one of the following down and provide it to your dealer more information on driver reasons: when reporting the problem. distraction. . It is very hot. When the To use a portable audio player, temperature returns to normal, connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to the CD should play. the radio's front auxiliary input jack. . The road is very rough. When When a device is connected, press the road becomes smoother, the the radio CD/AUX button to begin CD should play. playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (19,1)

Infotainment System 7-19

For optimal sound quality, increase Using the USB Port USB‐Supported Devices the portable audio device's volume Radios with a USB port can control . USB flash drive to the loudest level. ® a USB storage device or an iPod . Portable USB hard drive It is always best to power the using the radio buttons and knobs. portable audio device through its See “Playing an MP3” in CD Player . Fifth generation or later iPod own battery while playing. on page 7‑13 for information about . iPod nano how to connect and control a O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise . iPod touch or counterclockwise to increase or USB storage device or an iPod. . iPod classic decrease the volume of the USB Support portable player. Additional volume Not all iPods and USB drives are adjustments might have to be made compatible with the USB port. from the portable device if the volume is not loud or soft enough. Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple® for proper BAND: Press to listen to the radio operation. iPod firmware can when a portable audio device is be updated using the latest playing. The portable audio device iTunes® application. continues playing. See www.apple.com/itunes. CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to For help with identifying the iPod, go play a CD when a portable audio to www.apple.com/support. device is playing. Press again and the system begins playing audio Radios that have a USB port can from the connected portable audio play.mp3 and .wma files that are player. If a portable audio player is A. USB Port stored on a USB storage device as well as AAC files that are stored on not connected, “No Input Device The USB connector is located on an iPod. Found” displays. the instrument panel and uses the USB 2.0 standard. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (20,1)

7-20 Infotainment System

USB‐Supported File and Folder To connect an iPod, connect one Using the Radio to Control a Structure end of the USB cable that came USB Storage Device or iPod The radio supports: with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connector and connect the other The radio can control a USB . Up to 700 folders end to the USB port located in the storage device or an iPod using the radio buttons and knobs, and . Up to 8 folders in depth center console or on the instrument panel. If the vehicle is on and the display song information on the . radio s display. Up to 65,535 files. USB connection works, “OK to ’ . Folder and file names up to disconnect” and a GM logo may f (Tune): Turn to select files. appear on the iPod, and iPod 64 bytes SEEK: Press to go to the start of appears on the radio display. © . Files with an .mp3 or .wma file the track, if more than 10 seconds The iPod music appears on the have played. Press and hold or extension radio s display and begins playing. ’ press multiple times to continue . AAC files stored on an iPod The iPod charges while it is moving backward through tracks. . FAT16 connected to the vehicle if the SEEK: Press to go to the next vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY ¨ . FAT32 track. Press and hold or press or ON/RUN position. When the multiple times to continue moving vehicle is turned off, the iPod Connecting a USB Storage forward through tracks. Device or iPod® automatically powers off and will not charge or draw power from the s REV (Reverse): Press and The USB port can be used to vehicle's battery. hold to reverse playback quickly. control an iPod or a USB storage Sound is heard at a reduced device. If you have an older iPod model that is not supported, it can still be used volume. Release s REV to resume To connect a USB storage device, by connecting it to the auxiliary playing. The elapsed time of the connect the device to the USB port input jack using a standard file displays. located in the center console or on 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. the instrument panel. See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more information. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (21,1)

Infotainment System 7-21

\ FWD (Fast Forward): j (Pause): Press the softkey 4. Turn f to scroll through the files Press and hold to advance playback below j to pause the track. The tab in the selected folder. quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced appears raised when pause is being 5. Press f to select the desired file volume. Release \ FWD to used. Press the softkey below j to be played. resume playing. The elapsed again to resume playback. time of the file displays. To skip through large lists, the five Back: Press the softkey below the softkeys can be used to navigate in 4 (Information): Press to display back tab to go back to the main the following order: additional information about the display screen on an iPod, or the selected track. root directory on a USB storage . First softkey, first item in the list. Using Softkeys to Control a device. . Second softkey, 1% through the USB Storage Device or iPod c (Folder View): Press the list each time the softkey is pressed. The five softkeys below the radio softkey below c to view the . display are used to control the contents of the current folder on Third softkey, 5% through the list functions listed below. the USB drive. To browse and each time the softkey is pressed. select files: . To use the softkeys: Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the softkey is 1. Press the softkey below c. 1. Press the first or fifth softkey pressed. below the radio display to f 2. Turn to scroll through the list . Fifth softkey, end of the list. display the functions listed of folders. below, or press the softkey below the function if it is 3. Press f to select the desired currently displayed. folder. If there is more then one 2. Press the softkey below the folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until tab with the function on it to the desired folder is reached. use that function. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (22,1)

7-22 Infotainment System

h (Music Navigator): Press the 4. Turn f to scroll through the Repeat Functionality softkey below h to view and folders or files in the To use Repeat: select a file on an iPod, using selected menu. Press the softkey below " or ' the iPod's menu system. 5. Press f to select the desired file Files are sorted by: to select between Repeat All and to be played. Repeat Track. . Playlists To skip through large lists, the " (Repeat All): Press the softkey . Artists five softkeys can be used to below " to repeat all tracks. The . Albums navigate in the following order: tab appears lowered when Repeat . . Genres First softkey, first item in the list. All is being used. This is the default . mode when a USB storage device . Songs Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the softkey or iPod is first connected. . Composers is pressed. ' (Repeat Track): Press the To select files: . Third softkey, 5% through the list softkey below ' to repeat one h each time the softkey is pressed. track. The tab appears raised when 1. Press the softkey below . Repeat Track is being used. f . Fourth softkey, 10% through 2. Turn to scroll through the list the list each time the softkey of menus. is pressed. 3. Press f to select the . Fifth softkey, end of the list. desired menu. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (23,1)

Infotainment System 7-23

Shuffle Functionality Phone Noise: Keep interior noise levels to To use Shuffle: a minimum. The system may not recognize voice commands if there Press the softkey below >, 2, Bluetooth is too much background noise. <, or = to select between If equipped, a Bluetooth system When to Speak: A short tone Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ can use a Bluetooth‐capable cell sounds after the system responds Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album, phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to indicating when it is waiting for a or Shuffle Folder. make and receive phone calls. voice command. Wait until the tone (Shuffle Off): Press the The system can be used while and then speak. > the key is in the ON/RUN or softkey below 2 to turn shuffle ACC/ACCESSORY position. How to Speak: Speak clearly in a off. This is the default mode when The range of the Bluetooth system calm and natural voice. a USB storage device or iPod is can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all Audio System first connected. phones support all functions, and 2 (Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle not all phones are guaranteed to When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth Songs): Press the softkey below work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound comes through the = or < to shuffle all songs on system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth vehicle's front audio system the USB storage device or iPod. for more information on compatible speakers and overrides the audio phones. system. Use the audio system < (Shuffle Album): Press the volume knob, during a call, to softkey below > to shuffle all Voice Recognition change the volume level. The songs in the current album on The Bluetooth system uses voice adjusted volume level remains in an iPod. recognition to interpret voice memory for later calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume = (Shuffle Folder): Press the commands to dial phone numbers and name tags. level is used if the volume is softkey below > to shuffle all turned down too low. songs in the current folder on a For additional information, say USB storage device. “Help” while you are in a voice recognition menu. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (24,1)

7-24 Infotainment System

Bluetooth Controls Pairing Information 2. Say “Bluetooth.” Use the buttons located on the . Up to five cell phones can be 3. Say “Pair.” The system responds steering wheel to operate the paired to the Bluetooth system. with instructions and a four‐digit Personal Identification Number in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. . The pairing process is disabled See Steering Wheel Controls on when the vehicle is moving. (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. page 5‑2 for more information. 4. Start the pairing process on the . Pairing only needs to be b g (Push To Talk): Press to completed once, unless the cell phone that you want to pair. answer incoming calls, confirm pairing information on the cell For help with this process, see system information, and start phone changes or the cell phone the cell phone manufacturer's speech recognition. is deleted from the system. user guide. 5. Locate the device named Your c x (Phone On Hook): Press to . Only one paired cell phone can “ end a call, reject a call, or cancel an be connected to the Bluetooth Vehicle” in the list on the cell operation. system at a time. phone. Follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the Pairing . If multiple paired cell phones are PIN that was provided in Step 3. A Bluetooth cell phone must be within range of the system, the After the PIN is successfully paired to the Bluetooth system and system connects to the first entered, the system prompts you then connected to the vehicle before available paired cell phone in the to provide a name for the paired it can be used. See the cell phone order that they were first paired cell phone. This name will be manufacturer's user guide for to the system. To connect to a used to indicate which phones Bluetooth functions before pairing different paired phone, see are paired and connected to the the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone “Connecting to a Different vehicle. See “Listing All Paired is not connected, calls will be made Phone” later in this section. and Connected Phones” later in using OnStar Hands‐Free Calling, Pairing a Phone this section for more information. if equipped. Refer to the OnStar 6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair Owner's Guide for more information. 1. Press and hold b g for additional phones. two seconds. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (25,1)

Infotainment System 7-25

Listing All Paired and Connected Connecting to a Different Phone Storing and Deleting Phone Phones To connect to a different cell phone, Numbers The system can list all cell phones the Bluetooth system looks for the The system can store up to paired to it. If a paired cell phone is next available cell phone in the 30 phone numbers as name tags also connected to the vehicle, the order in which all the available cell in the Hands‐Free Directory that is system responds with “is connected” phones were paired. Depending on shared between the Bluetooth and after that phone name. which cell phone you want to OnStar systems, if equipped. connect to, you may have to use 1. Press and hold b g for this command several times. The following commands are used two seconds. to delete and store phone numbers. 1. Press and hold b g for 2. Say “Bluetooth.” Store: This command will store a two seconds. phone number, or a group of 3. Say “List.” 2. Say “Bluetooth.” numbers as a name tag. Deleting a Paired Phone 3. Say “Change phone.” Digit Store: This command allows If the phone name you want to a phone number to be stored as a . If another cell phone is name tag by entering the digits delete is unknown, see “Listing All found, the response will be Paired and Connected Phones. one at a time. ” “ is now 1. Press and hold b g for connected.” Delete: This command is used to delete individual name tags. two seconds. . If another cell phone is not Delete All Name Tags: 2. Say “Bluetooth.” found, the original phone remains connected. This command deletes all stored 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks name tags in the Hands‐Free which phone to delete. Calling Directory and the OnStar 4. Say the name of the phone you Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory, want to delete. if equipped. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (26,1)

7-26 Infotainment System

Using the “Store” Command repeats back the digit it heard Listing Stored Numbers followed by a tone. After the last The list command will list all 1. Press and hold b g for digit has been entered, say stored numbers and name tags. two seconds. “Store,” and then follow the 2. Say “Store.” directions given by the system to Using the “List” Command save a name tag for this number. 3. Say the phone number or group 1. Press and hold b g for of numbers you want to store all Using the “Delete” Command two seconds. at once with no pauses, then follow the directions given by the 1. Press and hold b g for 2. Say “Directory.” two seconds. system to save a name tag for 3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.” this number. 2. Say Delete. “ ” 4. Say “List.” Using the Digit Store Command 3. Say the name tag you want “ ” Making a Call If an unwanted number is to delete. Calls can be made using the recognized by the system, say Using the Delete All Name Tags “ ” following commands. “Clear” at any time to clear the Command last number. Dial or Call: The dial or call This command deletes all stored command can be used To hear all of the numbers name tags in the Hands Free ‐ interchangeably to dial a phone recognized by the system, say Calling Directory and the OnStar number or a stored name tag. “Verify” at any time. Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory, if equipped. Digit Dial: This command allows a 1. Press and hold b g for phone number to be dialed by To delete all name tags: two seconds. entering the digits one at a time. 2. Say Digit Store. “ ” 1. Press and hold b g for Re‐dial: This command is used to 3. Say each digit, one at a time, two seconds. dial the last number used on the that you want to store. After 2. Say “Delete all name tags.” cell phone. each digit is entered, the system Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (27,1)

Infotainment System 7-27

Using the “Dial” or “Call” 1. Press and hold b g for Receiving a Call Command two seconds. When an incoming call is received, 1. Press and hold b g for 2. Say “Digit Dial.” the audio system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle. two seconds. 3. Say each digit, one at a time, 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” that you want to dial. After each . Press b g to answer the call. digit is entered, the system 3. Say the entire number without . Press c x to ignore a call. pausing, or say the name tag. repeats back the digit it heard followed by a tone. After the last Call Waiting Once connected, the person called digit has been entered, will be heard through the audio say “Dial.” Call waiting must be supported on speakers. the cell phone and enabled by the Once connected, the person called wireless service carrier. Using the “Digit Dial” Command will be heard through the audio The digit dial command allows a speakers. . Press b g to answer an incoming call when another call phone number to be dialed by Using the “Re‐dial” Command entering the digits one at a time. is active. The original call is After each digit is entered, the 1. Press and hold b g for placed on hold. system repeats back the digit it two seconds. . Press again to return to the heard followed by a tone. b g 2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.” original call. If an unwanted number is Once connected, the person called . To ignore the incoming call, no recognized by the system, say will be heard through the audio action is required. “Clear” at any time to clear the speakers. last number. . Press c x to disconnect the To hear all of the numbers current call and switch to the call recognized by the system, say on hold. “Verify” at any time. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (28,1)

7-28 Infotainment System

Three‐Way Calling Muting a Call Transferring Audio from the Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone Three‐way calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside supported on the cell phone the vehicle can be muted so that the During a call with the audio in and enabled by the wireless person on the other end of the call the vehicle: service carrier. cannot hear them. 1. Press b g. 1. While on a call, press . . To mute a call, press , and b g b g 2. Say “Transfer Call.” then say “Mute call.” 2. Say “Three‐way call.” Transferring Audio to the 3. Use the dial or call command to . To cancel mute, press b g, and Bluetooth System from a dial the number of the third party then say “Un‐mute call.” Cell Phone to be called. Transferring a Call During a call with the audio on the 4. Once the call is connected, Audio can be transferred between cell phone, press b g. The audio press b g to link all callers the Bluetooth system and the transfers to the vehicle. If the audio together. cell phone. does not transfer to the vehicle, use the audio transfer feature on the Ending a Call The cell phone must be paired cell phone. See your cell phone and connected with the Bluetooth Press c x to end a call. manufacturer's user guide for system before a call can be more information. transferred. The connection process can take up to two minutes after the ignition is turned to ON/RUN. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (29,1)

Infotainment System 7-29

Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Clearing the System Voice pass‐thru allows access to (DTMF) Tones Unless information is deleted out of the voice recognition commands on The Bluetooth system can send the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it the cell phone. See your cell phone numbers and the numbers stored as will be retained indefinitely. This manufacturer's user guide to see if name tags during a call. You can includes all saved name tags in the the cell phone supports this feature. use this feature when calling a phone book and phone pairing To access contacts stored in the menu‐driven phone system. information. For information on how cell phone: Account numbers can also be to delete this information, see the stored for use. previous section “Deleting a Paired 1. Press and hold for Phone” and the previous sections b g Sending a Number or Name Tag two seconds. on deleting name tags. During a Call 2. Say “Bluetooth.” The system Other Information responds Bluetooth ready, 1. Press b g. The system “ ” The Bluetooth® word mark and followed by a tone. responds “Ready,” followed by ® a tone. logos are owned by the Bluetooth 3. Say “Voice.” The system SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks responds “OK, accessing 2. Say “Dial.” by General Motors is under license. .” 3. Say the number or name tag Other trademarks and trade names The cell phone's normal prompt to send. are those of their respective owners. messages will go through their cycle according to the phone's operating instructions. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (30,1)

7-30 Infotainment System

2 NOTES Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls Climate Control Systems The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with Climate Control Systems this system. Climate Control Systems ...... 8-1 Rear Heating System ...... 8-3 Rear Climate Control System ...... 8-4 Air Vents Air Vents ...... 8-6

Vehicles Without Air Conditioning

A. Fan Control Temperature Control: Turn the B. Temperature Control knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the C. Air Delivery Mode Control temperature inside the vehicle. 9 (Fan Control): Turn the knob Air Delivery Mode Control: clockwise or counterclockwise to Turn the knob clockwise or increase or decrease the fan speed. counterclockwise to change the 9 (Off): Turns the system off. current airflow mode. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

8-2 Climate Controls

H (Vent): Air is directed to the Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. instrument panel outlets. ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor outlets, with some air directed toward the windshield. 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield and side windows. - (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture. Outside air is directed to the floor and defroster outlets. Adjust the temperature knob for warmer or Vehicles With Air Conditioning cooler air. The air conditioning compressor might turn on in this A. Fan Control C. Air Delivery Mode Control setting to dehumidify the air. B. Temperature Control D. Rear Window Defogger 1 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of fog or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield, with some to the floor outlets and front side windows. The air conditioning compressor might turn on in this setting to dehumidify the air. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

Climate Controls 8-3

On hot days, open the windows to If turned on again, the defogger area. This feature works with the let hot inside air escape; then close will run for several more minutes main climate-control system in them. This helps to reduce the time before turning off. The defogger the vehicle. needed for the vehicle to cool down can also be turned off by turning off and the system operates more the engine. efficiently. Do not drive the vehicle until all the # (Air Conditioning): windows are clear. Cools and dehumidifies the air Notice: Do not use a razor blade inside of the vehicle. or sharp object to clear the inside V (Maximum Air Conditioning): rear window. Do not adhere Cools the air inside the vehicle anything to the defogger grid faster, by recirculating the inside air. lines in the rear glass. These actions may damage the rear Rear Window Defogger defogger. Repairs would not be For vehicles with a rear window covered by your warranty. defogger, a warming grid is used to remove fog or frost from the rear Rear Heating System AUX: The thumbwheel for this window. For vehicles with a rear heating system is located in the instrument It only works when the ignition is system, it lets you adjust the panel switchbank below the in ON/RUN. amount of air flowing into the rear of audio system. < (Rear Window Defogger): the vehicle, from the front-seating 9 (Fan): Turn the thumbwheel up Press to turn the rear window or down to increase or decrease the defogger on or off. amount of heated air sent to the rear-seating area. The rear window defogger turns off several minutes after the button is pressed. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

8-4 Climate Controls

Q (High): This position supplies Rear Climate Control System the most amount of heat to the rear-seating area. For vehicles with a rear heating and air-conditioning system, it maintains the temperature, fan speed and air delivery for the rear-seat passengers only. c (Medium): This position It also works with the main climate-control system in the vehicle. supplies half the amount of heat to the rear‐seating area. R (Low): This position supplies the least amount of heat to the rear-seating area. 9 (Off): Turns the rear heating system off.

Front Climate Control Panel

A. Fan Control Use this control panel to maintain a B. Air Delivery Mode Control separate temperature setting. Adjust the direction of the airflow or adjust C. Temperature Control the fan speed for the rear seat passenger(s). Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Climate Controls 8-5

AUX (Auxiliary): Turn the fan knob on the front climate control panel to AUX to let rear seat passengers use the control panel in the rear seating area. This disables the front control panel. To return control to the front panel, move the fan knob out of AUX. 9 : Turns the system off. 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed in the Rear Climate Control Panel rear-seating area. A. Fan Control If the vehicle has a 343 cm (135 in) Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or B. Air Delivery Mode Control wheelbase, a rear control panel for this system is located in the second counterclockwise to increase C. Temperature Control row behind the driver in the rear of or decrease the temperature the vehicle. The temperature, air in the rear‐seating area. delivery mode, and the fan speed The air-conditioning system on the can be adjusted for the rear seating main climate control panel must be area by a rear seat passenger. turned on to direct cooled air to the rear of the vehicle. If it is not on, then the temperature in the rear of the vehicle remains at cabin temperature. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

8-6 Climate Controls

Air Delivery Mode Control: Be sure to keep the area under the Air Vents Turn clockwise or counterclockwise front seats clear of any objects so to change the direction of the airflow that the air inside of the vehicle can Use the outlets located near the in the rear seating area. circulate effectively. center and on the sides of the instrument panel to change the To change the current mode, select For information on how to use the direction of airflow. one of the following: main climate control system, see H (Vent): Air is directed to the Climate Control Systems on Operation Tips page 8‑1. For information on upper outlets, with some directed to . ventilation, see Air Vents on Clear away any ice, snow or the floor outlets. leaves from the air inlets at the page 8‑6. 2 (Floor): Air is directed to the base of the windshield that floor outlets. may block the flow of air into the vehicle. . Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the system. . Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more effectively. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Driving and Operating 9-1

Shifting Into Park ...... 9-22 Cruise Control Driving and Shifting Out of Park ...... 9-23 Cruise Control ...... 9-37 Operating Parking Over Things That Burn ...... 9-23 Fuel Fuel ...... 9-40 Engine Exhaust Driving Information Recommended Fuel ...... 9-40 Engine Exhaust ...... 9-24 Gasoline Specifications Defensive Driving ...... 9-2 Running the Vehicle While (U.S. and Canada Only) . . . . 9-41 Drunk Driving ...... 9-2 Parked ...... 9-24 California Fuel Control of a Vehicle ...... 9-3 Requirements ...... 9-41 Braking ...... 9-3 Automatic Transmission Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-41 Steering ...... 9-4 Automatic Transmission Fuel Additives ...... 9-41 Off-Road Recovery ...... 9-5 (Six Speed) ...... 9-25 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-42 Loss of Control ...... 9-5 Automatic Transmission Filling the Tank ...... 9-44 Driving on Wet Roads ...... 9-6 (Four Speed) ...... 9-28 Filling a Portable Fuel Highway Hypnosis ...... 9-7 Manual Mode ...... 9-30 Container ...... 9-45 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 9-8 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 9-31 Winter Driving ...... 9-9 Towing If the Vehicle is Stuck ...... 9-11 Drive Systems General Towing Vehicle Load Limits ...... 9-12 All-Wheel Drive ...... 9-32 Information ...... 9-46 Starting and Operating Brakes Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips ...... 9-46 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 9-16 Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...... 9-32 Trailer Towing ...... 9-50 Ignition Positions ...... 9-17 Towing Equipment ...... 9-54 Starting the Engine ...... 9-18 Parking Brake ...... 9-34 Fast Idle System ...... 9-20 Ride Control Systems Conversions and Add-Ons Engine Heater ...... 9-20 StabiliTrak® System ...... 9-34 Add-On Electrical Retained Accessory Locking Rear Axle ...... 9-36 Equipment ...... 9-57 Power (RAP) ...... 9-21 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information Death and injury associated WARNING (Continued) with drinking and driving is a global tragedy. Defensive Driving Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or Alcohol affects four things that Defensive driving means always “ possible death. These simple anyone needs to drive a vehicle: expect the unexpected.” The first defensive driving techniques judgment, muscular coordination, step in driving defensively is to wear vision, and attentiveness. the safety belt. See Safety Belts on could save your life. page 3‑8. Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor Drunk Driving vehicle-related deaths involve { WARNING alcohol. In most cases, these Assume that other road users { WARNING deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other Drinking and then driving is recent years, more than drivers) are going to be careless very dangerous. Your reflexes, 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related and make mistakes. Anticipate perceptions, attentiveness, and deaths have been associated with what they might do and be ready. judgment can be affected by even the use of alcohol, with about In addition: a small amount of alcohol. You 250,000 people injured. . Allow enough following can have a serious — or even For persons under 21, it is against distance between you and fatal — collision if you drive after the law in every U.S. state to drink the driver in front of you. drinking. Do not drink and drive or alcohol. There are good medical, . Focus on the task of driving. ride with a driver who has been psychological, and developmental drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if (Continued) reasons for these laws. you are with a group, designate a The obvious way to eliminate the driver who will not drink. leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

Driving and Operating 9-3

Medical research shows that Braking And, of course, actual stopping alcohol in a person's system can distances vary greatly with the make crash injuries worse, See Brake System Warning Light on surface of the road, whether it is especially injuries to the brain, page 5‑24. pavement or gravel; the condition of spinal cord, or heart. This means Braking action involves perception the road, whether it is wet, dry, that when anyone who has been time and reaction time. Deciding to or icy; tire tread; the condition of the drinking — driver or passenger — is push the brake pedal is perception brakes; the weight of the vehicle; in a crash, that person's chance of time. Actually doing it is and the amount of brake force being killed or permanently disabled reaction time. applied. is higher than if the person had not Avoid needless heavy been drinking. Average reaction time is about three‐fourths of a second. But that is braking. Some people drive in only an average. It might be less spurts — heavy acceleration Control of a Vehicle with one driver and as long as two followed by heavy braking — rather The following three systems or three seconds or more with than keeping pace with traffic. This help to control the vehicle while another. Age, physical condition, is a mistake. The brakes might not driving — brakes, steering, and alertness, coordination, and have time to cool between hard accelerator. At times, as when eyesight all play a part. So do stops. The brakes will wear out driving on snow or ice, it is easy to alcohol, drugs, and frustration. much faster with a lot of heavy ask more of those control systems But even in three‐fourths of a braking. Keeping pace with the than the tires and road can provide. second, a vehicle moving at traffic and allowing realistic following Meaning, you can lose control of 100 km/h (60 mph) travels distances eliminates a lot of the vehicle. 20 m (66 ft). That could be a lot of unnecessary braking. That means distance in an emergency, so better braking and longer brake life. Adding non dealer accessories can ‐ keeping enough space between the affect vehicle performance. See vehicle and others is important. Accessories and Modifications on page 10‑3. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

9-4 Driving and Operating

If the engine ever stops while the Steering Steering in Emergencies vehicle is being driven, brake There are times when steering can normally but do not pump the Power Steering be more effective than braking. brakes. If the brakes are pumped, If power steering assist is lost For example, you come over a hill the pedal could get harder to push because the engine stops or the and find a truck stopped in your down. If the engine stops, there will power steering system is not lane, or a car suddenly pulls out still be some power brake assist but functioning, the vehicle can be from nowhere, or a child darts out it will be used when the brake is steered but it will take more effort. from between parked cars and stops applied. Once the power assist is right in front of you. These problems used up, it can take longer to stop Steering Tips can be avoided by braking if you and the brake pedal will be harder — It is important to take curves at a can stop in time. But sometimes you to push. reasonable speed. cannot stop in time because there Adding non dealer accessories can ‐ Traction in a curve depends on the is no room. That is the time for affect vehicle performance. See condition of the tires and the road evasive action — steering around Accessories and Modifications on surface, the angle at which the the problem. page 10 3. ‑ curve is banked, and vehicle speed. The vehicle can perform very well in While in a curve, speed is the one emergencies like these. First apply factor that can be controlled. the brakes. See Braking on If there is a need to reduce speed, page 9‑3. It is better to remove as do it before entering the curve, while much speed as possible from a the front wheels are straight. Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Driving and Operating 9-5

collision. Then steer around the The fact that such emergency Ease off the accelerator and then, problem, to the left or right situations are always possible is a if there is nothing in the way, steer depending on the space available. good reason to practice defensive so that the vehicle straddles the driving at all times and wear safety edge of the pavement. Turn the belts properly. steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 in), about one-eighth turn, until the right Off-Road Recovery front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel The vehicle's right wheels can drop to go straight down the roadway. off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems — brakes, steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction where the tires An emergency like this requires meet the road to do what the driver close attention and a quick decision. has asked. If holding the steering wheel at the In any emergency, do not give up. recommended 9 and 3 o'clock Keep trying to steer and constantly positions, it can be turned a full seek an escape route or area of 180 degrees very quickly without less danger. removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once If the level of the shoulder is only you have avoided the object. slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

9-6 Driving and Operating

Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when Driving on Wet Roads water, snow, ice, gravel, or other In a skid, a driver can lose control of material is on the road. For safety, Rain and wet roads can reduce the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid slow down and adjust your driving to vehicle traction and affect your most skids by taking reasonable these conditions. It is important to ability to stop and accelerate. care suited to existing conditions, slow down on slippery surfaces Always drive slower in these types and by not overdriving those because stopping distance is longer of driving conditions and avoid conditions. But skids are and vehicle control more limited. driving through large puddles and always possible. deep‐standing or flowing water. While driving on a surface with The three types of skids correspond reduced traction, try to avoid to the vehicle's three control sudden steering, acceleration, { WARNING systems. In the braking skid, the or braking, including reducing wheels are not rolling. In the Wet brakes can cause crashes. vehicle speed by shifting to a lower steering or cornering skid, too much They might not work as well in a gear. Any sudden changes could speed or steering in a curve causes quick stop and could cause cause the tires to slide. You might tires to slip and lose cornering force. pulling to one side. You could not realize the surface is slippery And in the acceleration skid, too until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to lose control of the vehicle. much throttle causes the driving recognize warning clues such as wheels to spin. — After driving through a large enough water, ice, or packed snow puddle of water or a car/vehicle If the vehicle starts to slide, ease on the road to make a mirrored wash, lightly apply the brake your foot off the accelerator pedal surface — and slow down when you pedal until the brakes work and quickly steer the way you have any doubt. normally. want the vehicle to go. If you start Remember: Antilock brakes help steering quickly enough, the vehicle Flowing or rushing water creates avoid only the braking skid. may straighten out. Always be ready strong forces. Driving through for a second skid if it occurs. flowing water could cause the vehicle to be carried away. (Continued) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

Driving and Operating 9-7

Other Rainy Weather Tips Highway Hypnosis WARNING (Continued) Besides slowing down, other wet Always be alert and pay attention If this happens, you and other weather driving tips include: to your surroundings while driving. vehicle occupants could drown. . Allow extra following distance. If you become tired or sleepy, find Do not ignore police warnings a safe place to park the vehicle and be very cautious about trying . Pass with caution. and rest. to drive through flowing water. . Keep windshield wiping Other driving tips include: equipment in good shape. . Keep the vehicle well ventilated. Hydroplaning . Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled. . Keep interior temperature cool. Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water . can build up under the vehicle's . Have good tires with proper Keep your eyes moving — scan tires so they actually ride on the tread depth. See Tires on the road ahead and to the sides. water. This can happen if the road is page 10‑52. . Check the rearview mirror and wet enough and you are going fast . Turn off cruise control. vehicle instruments often. enough. When the vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

9-8 Driving and Operating

Hill and Mountain Roads { WARNING WARNING (Continued) Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving If you do not shift down, the You would then have poor braking on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for brakes could get so hot that they or even none going down a hill. driving in these conditions include: would not work well. You would You could crash. Always have the . Keep the vehicle serviced and in then have poor braking or even engine running and the vehicle in good shape. none going down a hill. You could gear when going downhill. crash. Shift down to let the engine . Check all fluid levels and brakes, assist the brakes on a steep tires, cooling system, and downhill slope. . Stay in your own lane. transmission. Do not swing wide or cut . Shift to a lower gear when going across the center of the road. down steep or long hills. Drive at speeds that let you { WARNING stay in your own lane. . Top of hills: Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) Be alert — something or with the ignition off is could be in your lane dangerous. The brakes will have (stalled car, accident). to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that . Pay attention to special road they would not work well. signs (falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or (Continued) no-passing zones) and take appropriate action. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

Driving and Operating 9-9

Winter Driving The Antilock Brake System (ABS) Blizzard Conditions on page 9 32 improves vehicle ‑ Being stuck in snow can be a Driving on Snow or Ice stability during hard stops on a serious situation. Stay with the slippery roads, but apply the brakes Drive carefully when there is snow vehicle unless there is help nearby. sooner than when on dry pavement. or ice between the tires and the If possible, use the Roadside road, creating less traction or grip. Allow greater following distance on Assistance Program (U.S. and Wet ice can occur at about 0°C any slippery road and watch for Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside (32°F) when freezing rain begins to slippery spots. Icy patches can Assistance Program (Mexico) on fall, resulting in even less traction. occur on otherwise clear roads in page 13‑10. To get help and keep Avoid driving on wet ice or in shaded areas. The surface of a everyone in the vehicle safe: freezing rain until roads can be curve or an overpass can remain . Turn on the hazard treated with salt or sand. icy when the surrounding roads are warning flashers. Drive with caution, whatever the clear. Avoid sudden steering . condition. Accelerate gently so maneuvers and braking while Tie a red cloth to an traction is not lost. Accelerating too on ice. outside mirror. quickly causes the wheels to spin Turn off cruise control, if equipped, and makes the surface under on slippery surfaces. the tires slick, so there is even less traction. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

9-10 Driving and Operating

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Snow can trap engine exhaust Snow can trap exhaust gases under the vehicle. This may . Check again from time to under the vehicle. This can cause cause exhaust gases to get time to be sure snow does deadly CO (carbon monoxide) inside. Engine exhaust contains not collect there. gas to get inside. CO could carbon monoxide (CO) which . Open a window about overcome you and kill you. You cannot be seen or smelled. 5 cm (2 in) on the side of the cannot see it or smell it, so you It can cause unconsciousness vehicle that is away from the might not know it is in the vehicle. and even death. wind to bring in fresh air. Clear away snow from around the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: . Fully open the air outlets on base of the vehicle, especially or under the instrument any that is blocking the exhaust. . Clear away snow from around panel. the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking . Adjust the Climate Control Run the engine for short periods the exhaust pipe and/or the system to a setting that only as needed to keep warm, but fuel operated heater exhaust circulates the air inside the be careful. system, if equipped. If the vehicle and set the fan To save fuel, run the engine for only vehicle has a diesel engine speed to the highest setting. short periods as needed to warm and a fuel operated heater, See Climate Control System the vehicle and then shut the engine see “Fuel Operated Heater in the Index. off and close the window most of (FOH)” in the diesel engine For more information about the way to save heat. Repeat this supplement. carbon monoxide, see Engine until help arrives but only when you (Continued) Exhaust on page 9‑24. feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm (Continued) also helps. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

Driving and Operating 9-11

If it takes some time for help to Rocking the Vehicle to Get arrive, now and then when you run { WARNING it Out the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs If the vehicle's tires spin at high Turn the steering wheel left and faster than the idle speed. This speed, they can explode, and you right to clear the area around the keeps the battery charged to restart or others could be injured. The front wheels. Turn off any traction or the vehicle and to signal for help vehicle can overheat, causing an stability system. Shift back and forth with the headlamps. Do this as little engine compartment fire or other between R (Reverse) and a forward as possible to save fuel. damage. Spin the wheels as little gear, spinning the wheels as little as as possible and avoid going possible. To prevent transmission above 55 km/h (35 mph). wear, wait until the wheels stop If the Vehicle is Stuck spinning before shifting gears. Slowly and cautiously spin the Release the accelerator pedal while wheels to free the vehicle when For information about using tire shifting, and press lightly on the stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. chains on the vehicle, see Tire accelerator pedal when the Chains on page 10‑75. If the vehicle has a traction system, transmission is in gear. Slowly it can often help to free a stuck spinning the wheels in the forward vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's and reverse directions causes a traction system in the Index. If stuck rocking motion that could free the too severely for the traction system vehicle. If that does not get the to free the vehicle, turn the traction vehicle out after a few tries, it might system off and use the rocking need to be towed out. If the vehicle method. does need to be towed out, see Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑93. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

9-12 Driving and Operating

Vehicle Load Limits (B-pillar). With the driver door WARNING (Continued) open, you will find the label It is very important to know how the way the vehicle handles. attached below the door lock much weight the vehicle can post (striker). The tire and carry. This weight is called the These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, loading information label shows vehicle capacity weight and the number of occupant seating includes the weight of all overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle. positions (A), and the maximum occupants, cargo, and all vehicle capacity weight (B) in nonfactory-installed options. kilograms and pounds. Two labels on the vehicle show Tire and Loading Information how much weight it was Label The Tire and Loading designed to carry, the Tire and Information label also shows Loading Information label and the size of the original the Certification/Tire label. equipment tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation { WARNING pressures (D). For more information on tires and inflation Do not load the vehicle any see Tires on page 10‑52 and heavier than the Gross Tire Pressure on page 10‑60. Vehicle Weight Rating There is also important loading (GVWR), or either the information on the vehicle maximum front or rear Gross Certification/Tire label. It tells Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Label Example you the Gross Vehicle Weight If you do, parts on the vehicle Rating (GVWR) and the Gross can break, and it can change A vehicle specific Tire and Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for (Continued) Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

Driving and Operating 9-13

the front and rear axle. See there will be five 150 lb “Certification/Tire Label” later passengers in your vehicle, in this section. the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of 5. Determine the combined occupants and cargo should weight of luggage and cargo never exceed XXX kg or being loaded on the vehicle. XXX lbs” on your vehicle's That weight may not safely placard. exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity Example 1 2. Determine the combined calculated in Step 4. A. Vehicle Capacity weight of the driver and 6. If your vehicle will be towing Weight for Example 1 = passengers that will be 453 kg (1,000 lbs) riding in your vehicle. a trailer, the load from your trailer will be transferred to B. Subtract Occupant 3. Subtract the combined your vehicle. Consult this Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = weight of the driver and manual to determine how this 136 kg (300 lbs) passengers from XXX kg or reduces the available cargo C. Available Occupant and XXX lbs. and luggage load capacity of Cargo Weight = 4. The resulting figure equals your vehicle. See Trailer 317 kg (700 lbs) the available amount of cargo Towing on page 9‑50 for and luggage load capacity. important information on For example, if the “XXX” towing a trailer, towing safety amount equals 1400 lbs and rules and trailering tips. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (14,1)

9-14 Driving and Operating

The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Certification/Tire Label

Example 2 Example 3 A. Vehicle Capacity A. Maximum Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = Weight for Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs) 453 kg (1,000 lbs) B. Subtract Occupant B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = Weight @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg (750 lbs) 453 kg (1,000 lbs) A vehicle specific Certification/ C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight = Tire label is found on the rear 113 kg (250 lbs) 0 kg (0 lbs) edge of the driver door. The Refer to the vehicle tire and label shows the size of the loading information label for vehicle's original tires and the specific information about the inflation pressures needed to vehicle's capacity weight and obtain the gross weight capacity seating positions. of the vehicle. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (15,1)

Driving and Operating 9-15

This is called Gross Vehicle Never exceed the GVWR for the Weight Rating (GVWR). The vehicle, or the GAWR for either WARNING (Continued) GVWR includes the weight of the front or rear axle. If you do, parts on the vehicle the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, If there is a heavy load, it should and cargo. can break, and it can change be spread out. the way the vehicle handles. The Certification/Tire label also These could cause you to lose tells you the maximum weights { WARNING control and crash. Also, for the front and rear axles, overloading can shorten the called Gross Axle Weight Rating Do not load the vehicle any life of the vehicle. (GAWR). To find out the actual heavier than the Gross loads on the front and rear Vehicle Weight Rating axles, you need to go to a weigh (GVWR), or either the station and weigh the vehicle. maximum front or rear Gross Your dealer can help you with Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). this. Be sure to spread out the (Continued) load equally on both sides of the centerline. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (16,1)

9-16 Driving and Operating

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) Starting and Operating Things you put inside the . Do not leave an vehicle can strike and injure unsecured child restraint New Vehicle Break-In people in a sudden stop or in the vehicle. turn, or in a crash. Notice: The vehicle does not . When you carry something need an elaborate break-in. But it . Put things in the cargo inside the vehicle, secure will perform better in the long run area of the vehicle. Try to it whenever you can. if you follow these guidelines: spread the weight evenly. . Keep the vehicle speed at . Do not leave a seat folded . 88 km/h (55 mph) or less for Never stack heavier down unless you need to. things, like suitcases, the first 805 km (500 miles). inside the vehicle so that . Do not drive at any one some of them are above Add-On Equipment constant speed, fast or the tops of the seats. When you carry removable slow, for the first 805 km (Continued) items, you may need to put a (500 miles). Do not make limit on how many people you full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake or carry inside the vehicle. Be sure slow the vehicle. to weigh the vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (17,1)

Driving and Operating 9-17

. Avoid making hard stops for Ignition Positions Retained Accessory Power (RAP) the first 322 km (200 miles) or will remain active. See Retained so. During this time the new Accessory Power (RAP) on brake linings are not yet page 9‑21. broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean This position locks the ignition and premature wear and earlier transmission. replacement. Follow this Do not turn the engine off when the breaking-in guideline vehicle is moving. This will cause a every time you get new loss of power assist in the brake brake linings. and steering systems and disable . Do not tow a trailer during the airbags. break-in. See Trailer Towing In an emergency, if the vehicle must on page 9‑50 for the trailer be shut off while driving: towing capabilities of the 1. Brake using a firm and steady vehicle and more The ignition switch has four different pressure. Do not pump the information. positions. brakes repeatedly. This may Following break‐in, engine speed To shift out of P (Park), the deplete power assist, requiring and load can be gradually ignition must be in ON/RUN or increased brake pedal force. increased. ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal applied. 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). This can be done while the A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ vehicle is moving. After shifting LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is to N (Neutral), firmly apply the stopped, turn the ignition switch to brakes and steer the vehicle to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. a safe location. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (18,1)

9-18 Driving and Operating

3. Come to a complete stop, shift and turn it only with your hand. A warning tone will sound when the to P (Park), and turn the ignition If the key cannot be turned by driver door is opened, the ignition is to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with hand, see your dealer. in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF an automatic transmission, the B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is and the key is in the ignition. shift lever must be in P (Park) to the position in which you can turn the ignition switch to the operate things like the radio and Starting the Engine LOCK/OFF position. the windshield wipers when the If the vehicle has a Duramax diesel 4. Set the parking brake. See engine is off. engine, see the Duramax diesel Parking Brake on page 9‑34. C (ON/RUN): This position can supplement for more information. be used to operate the electrical To place the transmission in the { WARNING accessories and to display some proper gear: instrument panel cluster warning Turning off the vehicle while and indicator lights. The switch Move the shift lever to P (Park) or moving may cause loss of power stays in this position when the N (Neutral). The engine will not start assist in the brake and steering engine is running. in any other position. To restart the systems and disable the airbags. engine when the vehicle is already While driving, only shut the If you leave the key in the ACC/ moving, use N (Neutral) only. ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position vehicle off in an emergency. with the engine off, the battery could Starting Procedure be drained. You may not be able to 1. With your foot off the accelerator 5. If the vehicle must be shut off start the vehicle if the battery is pedal, turn the ignition key to while driving, turn the ignition to allowed to drain for an extended START. When the engine starts, ACC/ACCESSORY. period of time. let go of the key. The idle speed Notice: Using a tool to force the D (START): This is the position will go down as your engine gets key to turn in the ignition could that starts the engine. When the warm. Do not race the engine cause damage to the switch or engine starts, release the key. immediately after starting it. break the key. Use the correct The ignition switch returns to key, make sure it is all the way in, ON/RUN for driving. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (19,1)

Driving and Operating 9-19

Operate the engine and When the Low Fuel warning as you hold the key in START transmission gently to allow the lamp is on and the FUEL LEVEL for up to 15 seconds. Wait at oil to warm up and lubricate all LOW message is displayed in least 15 seconds between each moving parts. the Driver Information Center try, to allow the cranking motor The vehicle has a (DIC), the Computer‐Controlled to cool down. When the engine Computer-Controlled Cranking Cranking System is disabled starts, let go of the key and System. This feature assists in to prevent possible vehicle accelerator. If the vehicle starts starting the engine and protects component damage. When this briefly but then stops again, do components. If the ignition key is happens, hold the ignition switch the same thing. This clears the turned to the START position, in the START position to extra gasoline from the engine. and then released when the continue engine cranking. Do not race the engine engine begins cranking, the Notice: Cranking the engine for immediately after starting it. engine will continue cranking long periods of time, by returning Operate the engine and for a few seconds or until the the key to the START position transmission gently until the oil vehicle starts. If the engine does immediately after cranking has warms up and lubricates all not start and the key is held in ended, can overheat and damage moving parts. START for many seconds, the cranking motor, and drain the Notice: The engine is designed to cranking will be stopped after battery. Wait at least 15 seconds work with the electronics in the 15 seconds to prevent cranking between each try, to let the vehicle. If you add electrical parts motor damage. To prevent gear cranking motor cool down. or accessories, you could change damage, this system also 2. If the engine does not start after the way the engine operates. prevents cranking if the engine Before adding electrical 5‐10 seconds, especially in very is already running. Engine cold weather (below −18°C equipment, check with your cranking can be stopped by or 0°F), it could be flooded with dealer. If you do not, the engine turning the ignition switch to too much gasoline. Try pushing might not perform properly. Any the ACC/ACCESSORY or the accelerator pedal all the way resulting damage would not be LOCK/OFF position. to the floor and holding it there covered by the vehicle warranty. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (20,1)

9-20 Driving and Operating

Fast Idle System When the fast idle is active the Engine Heater Driver Information Center (DIC) will If the vehicle has this feature it is display “FAST IDLE ON.” If the vehicle has the Duramax available only with cruise control. diesel engine, see the Duramax The manual fast idle switch is One of the following actions will turn diesel supplement for more operated using the cruise control off the fast idle: information. buttons located on the left hand . Pressing the brake. The engine coolant heater can side of the steering wheel. . Selecting the Cruise Control provide easier starting and better This system can be used to Cancel button. fuel economy during engine increase engine idle speed warm‐up in cold weather conditions . Releasing the Parking Brake. whenever the following conditions at or below −18°C (0°F). Vehicles are met: . The transmission shifter is with an engine coolant heater moved out of P (Park) or should be plugged in at least four . The park brake is set. N (Neutral). hours before starting. An internal . The brake pedal is not pressed. . Selecting the Cruise Control thermostat in the plug-end of the . The vehicle must not be moving On/Off button when it was cord may exist which will prevent and the accelerator must not be previously on. engine coolant heater operation at pressed. temperatures above −18°C (0°F). . Pressing the Cruise Control Set To control the fast idle: switch a second time. . To enable the Fast Idle System, . Pressing the accelerator greater press and release the Cruise than a quarter of the down. Control On/Off button and . Turning the ignition switch to the ensure that the switch LED is lit. LOCK/OFF position. . Press and release the Cruise Control Set switch. Engine speed will be held at approximately 1200 RPM. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (21,1)

Driving and Operating 9-21

To Use the Engine Coolant Retained Accessory { WARNING Heater Power (RAP) 1. Turn off the engine. Plugging the cord into an These vehicle accessories can be 2. Open the hood and unwrap the ungrounded outlet could cause an used for up to 10 minutes after the electrical cord. electrical shock. Also, the wrong engine is turned off: kind of extension cord could The cord for the engine coolant overheat and cause a fire. You . Audio System heater is located on the driver could be seriously injured. Plug . Power Windows (if equipped) side of the engine compartment the cord into a properly grounded and is attached to the hose for These features will work when three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. the power steering reservoir. the ignition key is in ON/RUN or If the cord will not reach, use a ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded heavy-duty three-prong extension turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, 110-volt AC outlet. cord rated for at least 15 amps. power to the radio and power windows will continue to work 4. Before starting the engine, be 10 minutes or until the driver door sure to unplug and store the is opened. cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts and prevent damage. The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors. Ask a dealer in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice on this. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (22,1)

9-22 Driving and Operating

Shifting Into Park 3. Turn the ignition key to parking brake is firmly set before LOCK/OFF. you leave it. After you move the shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular { WARNING 4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave the vehicle brake pedal down. Then, see if you It can be dangerous to get out of with the ignition key in your can move the shift lever away from P (Park) without first pulling it toward the vehicle if the shift lever is not hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). you. If you can, it means that the fully in P (Park) with the parking Leaving the Vehicle With the shift lever was not fully locked brake firmly set. The vehicle can into P (Park). roll. If you have left the engine Engine Running running, the vehicle can move Torque Lock { WARNING suddenly. You or others could be If you are parking on a hill and you injured. To be sure the vehicle will It can be dangerous to leave the do not shift the vehicle into P (Park) not move, even when you are on vehicle with the engine running. properly, the weight of the vehicle fairly level ground, use the steps The vehicle could move suddenly may put too much force on the that follow. If you are pulling a if the shift lever is not fully in parking pawl in the transmission. trailer, see Driving Characteristics P (Park) with the parking brake You may find it difficult to pull the and Towing Tips on page 9 46. ‑ firmly set. And, if you leave the shift lever out of P (Park). This is called torque lock. To prevent torque vehicle with the engine running, it lock, set the parking brake and then 1. Hold the brake pedal down and could overheat and even catch set the parking brake. See shift into P (Park) properly before fire. You or others could be you leave the driver seat. To find Parking Brake on page 9‑34. injured. Do not leave the vehicle out how, see “Shifting Into Park” 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) with the engine running. previously in this section. by pulling the shift lever toward When you are ready to drive, move you and moving it up as far as If you have to leave the vehicle with it will go. the shift lever out of P (Park) before the engine running, be sure the you release the parking brake. vehicle is in P (Park) and the Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (23,1)

Driving and Operating 9-23

If torque lock does occur, you may . Prevent movement of the shift If you still are unable to shift out need to have another vehicle push lever out of P (Park), unless the of P (Park): yours a little uphill to take some of ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ ACCESSORY and the regular 1. Ease the pressure on the the pressure from the parking pawl shift lever. in the transmission, so you can pull brake pedal is applied. the shift lever out of P (Park). The shift lock control system is 2. While holding down the brake always functional except in the case pedal, push the shift lever all Shifting Out of Park of a dead battery or low voltage the way into P (Park). The vehicle has an automatic (less than 9 V) battery. 3. Move the shift lever to the transmission shift lock control If the vehicle has an uncharged desired position. system. You have to fully apply the battery or a battery with low voltage, If you are still having a problem brakes before you can shift from try charging or jump starting the shifting, have the vehicle serviced. P (Park) when the ignition is in battery. See Jump Starting on ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. page 10‑88 for more information. Parking Over Things See Automatic Transmission (Six To shift out of P (Park) use the That Burn Speed) on page 9‑25 or Automatic following: Transmission (Four Speed) on page 9‑28. 1. Apply the brake pedal. { WARNING The shift lock control system is 2. Turn the ignition to ACC/ Things that can burn could touch ACCESSORY or ON/RUN. designed to do the following: hot exhaust parts under the . Prevent the ignition key from 3. Move the shift lever to the vehicle and ignite. Do not park being removed unless the shift desired position. over papers, leaves, dry grass, lever is in P (Park). or other things that can burn. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (24,1)

9-24 Driving and Operating

Running the Vehicle Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued) While Parked . There are holes or openings { WARNING It is better not to park with the in the vehicle body from engine running. But if you ever have damage or after-market Engine exhaust contains Carbon to, here are some things to know. Monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed. { WARNING can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is Idling a vehicle in an enclosed Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle: area with poor ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may . The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows with poor ventilation (parking completely down. enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired which cannot be seen or smelled. that may block underbody immediately. airflow or tail pipes). It can cause unconsciousness Never park the vehicle with the and even death. Never run the . The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed engine in an enclosed area sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a that has no fresh air ventilation. . The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air For more information, see Engine due to corrosion or damage. ventilation. Exhaust on page 9‑24. . The vehicle exhaust system has been modified, damaged or improperly repaired. (Continued) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (25,1)

Driving and Operating 9-25

Automatic especially when the vehicle has a { WARNING heavy load, you might notice an Transmission increase in the effort to shift out of It can be dangerous to get out P (Park). See “Torque Lock” under of the vehicle if the automatic Automatic Transmission Shifting Into Park on page 9‑22 for transmission shift lever is not fully more information. in P (Park) with the parking brake (Six Speed) firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Vehicles with a six speed automatic { WARNING Do not leave the vehicle when transmission have a shift position the engine is running unless you indicator within the instrument panel It is dangerous to get out of the have to. If you have left the cluster. vehicle if the shift lever is not fully engine running, the vehicle can There are several different positions in P (Park) with the parking brake move suddenly. You or others for the shift lever. firmly set. The vehicle can roll. could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when Do not leave the vehicle when you are on fairly level ground, the engine is running unless you always set the parking brake and have to. If you have left the move the shift lever to P (Park). engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the Follow the proper steps to be sure vehicle will not move, even when the vehicle will not move. See See “Range Selection Mode” under you are on fairly level ground, Shifting Into Park on page 9‑22. Manual Mode on page 9‑30. always set the parking brake and If parking on a hill and pulling a P (Park): This position locks the move the shift lever to P (Park). trailer, see Driving Characteristics rear wheels. It is the best position to See Shifting Into Park on and Towing Tips on page 9‑46. use when starting the engine page 9‑22. If you are pulling a because the vehicle cannot move trailer, see Driving Characteristics easily. When parked on a hill, and Towing Tips on page 9‑46. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (26,1)

9-26 Driving and Operating

R (Reverse): Use this gear to . Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or back up. WARNING (Continued) more, push the accelerator all the way down. Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) Unless your foot is firmly on the By doing this, the vehicle shifts while the vehicle is moving brake pedal, the vehicle could down to the next gear and has forward could damage the move very rapidly. You could lose more power. transmission. The repairs would control and hit people or objects. not be covered by the vehicle Do not shift into a drive gear D (Drive) can be used when towing warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only while the engine is running at a trailer, carrying a heavy load or after the vehicle is stopped. high speed. driving on steep hills. You might To rock the vehicle back and forth to want to shift the transmission get out of snow, ice, or sand without to a lower gear selection if the damaging the transmission, see If Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) transmission shifts too often. the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9 11. or N (Neutral) with the engine ‑ running at high speed may Downshifting the transmission in N (Neutral): In this position, the damage the transmission. The slippery road conditions could result engine does not connect with the repairs would not be covered by in skidding. See “Skidding” under wheels. To restart when you are the vehicle warranty. Be sure the Loss of Control on page 9‑5. already moving, use N (Neutral) engine is not running at high The vehicle has a shift stabilization only. Also, use N (Neutral) when speed when shifting the vehicle. feature that adjusts the transmission the vehicle is being towed. D (Drive): This position is for shifting to the current driving normal driving. It provides the best conditions in order to reduce rapid { WARNING fuel economy. If you need more upshifts and downshifts. This shift power for passing, and you are: stabilization feature is designed to Shifting into a drive gear while determine, before making an the engine is running at high . Going less than about 55 km/h upshift, if the engine is able to speed is dangerous. (35 mph), push the accelerator maintain vehicle speed by analyzing pedal about halfway down. (Continued) things such as vehicle speed, throttle position, and vehicle load. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (27,1)

Driving and Operating 9-27

If the shift stabilization feature not have determined the best going down a steep hill. See “Range determines that a current vehicle settings for a particular shift or Selection Mode” under Manual speed cannot be maintained, the condition. Shift quality will improve Mode on page 9‑30. transmission does not upshift and with continued driving. 2 (Second): This position reduces instead holds the current gear. When temperatures are very cold, vehicle speed even more than In some cases, this could appear the transmission's gear shifting 3 (Third) without using the brakes. to be a delayed shift, however the could be delayed providing more You can use 2 (Second) on hills. transmission is operating normally. stable shifts until the engine warms It can help control vehicle speed as The transmission uses adaptive up. Shifts could be more noticeable you go down steep mountain roads, shift controls. Adaptive shift controls with a cold transmission. This but then you would also want to use continually compares key shift difference in shifting is normal. the brakes off and on. See “Range parameters to pre-programmed M (Manual Mode): This position Selection Mode” under Manual ideal shifts stored in the lets drivers select the range of Mode on page 9‑30. transmissions computer. The gears appropriate for current driving If you manually select 2 (Second) transmission constantly makes conditions. If the vehicle has this in an automatic transmission, adjustments to improve vehicle feature, see “Range Selection the transmission will start in performance according to how the Mode” under Manual Mode on second gear. You can use this vehicle is being used, such as with page 9‑30. feature for reducing the speed of the a heavy load or when temperature rear wheels when you are trying to changes. During this adaptive shift 3 (Third): This position is also used for normal driving. It reduces vehicle start the vehicle from a stop on control process, shifting might feel slippery road surfaces. different as the transmission speed more than D (Drive) without determines the best settings. using the brakes. You might choose 1 (First): This position reduces 3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) when vehicle speed without using the The shift quality of a new vehicle driving on hilly, winding roads, when brakes. You can use it for major/ may not be ideal because the towing a trailer, so there is less severe downgrades where the Adaptive Shift Control process may shifting between gears and when vehicle would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (28,1)

9-28 Driving and Operating

When you shift to 1 (First) it Automatic Transmission provides the lowest gear appropriate WARNING (Continued) to current road speed and continues (Four Speed) to downshift as the vehicle slows, Do not leave the vehicle when eventually downshifting to 1 (First) the engine is running unless gear. The transmission can be you have to. If you have left the held in 1 (First) gear using Range engine running, the vehicle can Selection Mode or the shift lever. move suddenly. You or others See “Range Selection Mode” could be injured. To be sure the under Manual Mode on page 9‑30. vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, Notice: Spinning the tires or There are several different positions holding the vehicle in one place for your shift lever. always set the parking brake and on a hill using only the move the shift lever to P (Park). P (Park): This position locks the See Shifting Into Park on accelerator pedal may damage rear wheels. It is the best position page 9 22. If you are pulling a the transmission. The repair will to use when you start the engine ‑ trailer, see Driving Characteristics not be covered by the vehicle because the vehicle cannot warranty. If you are stuck, do not move easily. and Towing Tips on page 9‑46. spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the { WARNING Make sure the shift lever is fully in vehicle in place. P (Park) before starting the engine. It is dangerous to get out of the The vehicle has an automatic vehicle if the shift lever is not fully transmission shift lock control in P (Park) with the parking brake system. You must first press the firmly set. The vehicle can roll. brake pedal before you can shift from P (Park) with the (Continued) ignition in ON/RUN. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (29,1)

Driving and Operating 9-29

If you cannot shift out of P (Park), D (Drive): This position is for ease pressure on the shift lever and { WARNING normal driving. It provides the best push the shift lever all the way into fuel economy. If you need more P (Park) as you maintain brake Shifting into a drive gear while the power for passing, and you are: application. Then move the shift engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is . Going less than about 55 km/h lever into another gear. See Shifting (35 mph), push the accelerator Out of Park on page 9‑23. firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. pedal about halfway down. R (Reverse): Use this gear to You could lose control and hit . Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or back up. people or objects. Do not shift more, push the accelerator all Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) into a drive gear while the engine the way down. while the vehicle is moving is running at high speed. You will shift down to the next forward could damage the gear and have more power. transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) Downshifting the transmission in warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only or N (Neutral) with the engine slippery road conditions could result after the vehicle is stopped. running at high speed may in skidding. See “Skidding” under damage the transmission. The Loss of Control on page 9‑5. To rock the vehicle back and forth to repairs would not be covered by get out of snow, ice or sand without the vehicle warranty. Be sure the 3 (Third): This position is also damaging the transmission, see If engine is not running at high used for normal driving. However it the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11. speed when shifting the vehicle. reduces vehicle speed more than D (Drive) without using the brakes. N (Neutral): In this position, the You might choose 3 (Third) instead engine does not connect with the of D (Drive) when driving on hilly, wheels. To restart the engine when winding roads, when towing a trailer, the vehicle is already moving, so there is less shifting between use N (Neutral) only. Also, use gears and when going down a N (Neutral) when the vehicle is steep hill. being towed. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (30,1)

9-30 Driving and Operating

You should use 3 (Third) (or a lower Notice: Spinning the tires or To use this feature, do the following: gear as needed) when towing a holding the vehicle in one place 1. Move the shift lever to trailer to minimize heat build-up and on a hill using only the M (Manual Mode). extend the life of the transmission. accelerator pedal may damage 2. Press the +/− buttons, located 2 (Second): This position reduces the transmission. The repair will not be covered by the vehicle on the steering column shift vehicle speed even more than lever, to select the desired range 3 (Third) without using the brakes. warranty. If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on of gears for current driving You can use 2 (Second) on hills. conditions. It can help control vehicle speed as a hill, use the brakes to hold the you go down steep mountain roads, vehicle in place. When M (Manual Mode) is selected but then you would also want to use a number displays in the DIC next to the brakes off and on. Manual Mode the M indicating the current gear. You may use this feature for Range Selection Mode This number is the highest gear that reducing torque to the rear wheels can be used. However, the vehicle when you are trying to start the can automatically shift to lower vehicle from a stop on slippery gears as it adjusts to driving road surfaces. conditions. This means that all gears below that number are 1 (First): This position reduces available. When 5 (Fifth) is selected, vehicle speed even more than 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are 2 (Second) without using the brakes. automatically shifted by the vehicle, You can use it on very steep hills, The vehicle may have a Range but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used until or in deep snow or mud. If the shift Selection Mode. The Range the +/− button located on the lever is put in 1 (First) while the Selection Mode helps control the steering column lever is used to vehicle is moving forward, the vehicle's transmission and vehicle change to the gear. transmission will not shift into speed while driving down hill or first gear until the vehicle is towing a trailer by letting you select going slowly enough. a desired range of gears. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (31,1)

Driving and Operating 9-31

Grade Braking is not available when Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking (Six Speed Range Selection Mode is active. Automatic Transmission) See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑31. The Grade Braking shift modes While using Range Selection Mode, can be activated by pressing Cruise Control and the Tow/Haul the TOW/HAUL button on the Mode can be used. instrument panel. While in Range Notice: Spinning the tires or Selection Mode, Grade Braking is holding the vehicle in one place deactivated allowing the driver to on a hill using only the Vehicles with an automatic select a desired range of gears. accelerator pedal may damage transmission have a Tow/Haul Grade Braking is only active while the transmission. The repair will Mode. The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts the Tow/Haul Mode is selected and not be covered by the vehicle the transmission shift pattern to you are not in the Range Selection reduce shift cycling, providing warranty. If you are stuck, do not Mode. See “Tow/Haul Mode” listed spin the tires. When stopping on increased performance, vehicle previously and Manual Mode on control, and transmission cooling a hill, use the brakes to hold the page 9‑30 for more information vehicle in place. when towing or hauling heavy loads. on the Range Selection Mode. Low Traction Mode Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and off Grade Braking assists in by pressing the button, located to maintaining desired vehicle speeds Low Traction Mode can assist in the right of the steering wheel on when driving on downhill grades by vehicle acceleration when road the instrument panel. When tow/ automatically shifting to lower gears conditions are slippery. While the haul is on, a light on the instrument when the driver desires to slow the vehicle is at a stop, select the panel cluster will come on. vehicle by applying the brake. This second gear range using Range reduces wear on the braking system See Tow/Haul Mode Light on Selection Mode. This will limit and increases control of the vehicle. torque to the wheels after it detects page 5‑25 for more information. Also see Trailer Towing on wheel slip, preventing the tires Also see “Tow Haul Mode” under page 9‑50 for more information. from spinning. Towing Equipment on page 9‑54 for more information. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (32,1)

9-32 Driving and Operating

Cruise Grade Braking Drive Systems Brakes (Six Speed Automatic Transmission) All-Wheel Drive Antilock Brake Cruise Grade Braking operates only If the vehicle has this feature, System (ABS) while Cruise Control is engaged in engine power is sent to all Tow/Haul Mode. Cruise Grade This vehicle has the Antilock Brake four wheels when extra traction System (ABS), an advanced Braking assists in maintaining is needed. This is like four-wheel desired vehicle speeds when driving electronic braking system that drive, but there is no separate lever helps prevent a braking skid. on downhill grades in cruise control or switch to engage or disengage by automatically shifting to lower the front axle. It is fully automatic, When the engine is started and the gears when the cruise set speed and adjusts itself as needed for vehicle begins to drive away, ABS is exceeded. road conditions. checks itself. A momentary motor or While in the Range Selection Mode, clicking noise might be heard while Cruise Grade Braking is not this test is going on, and it might available. even be noticed that the brake pedal moves a little. This is normal. See Manual Mode on page 9‑30.

If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 5‑25. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (33,1)

Driving and Operating 9-33

If driving safely on a wet road and it As the brakes are applied, the Using ABS becomes necessary to slam on the computer keeps receiving updates Do not pump the brakes. Just hold brakes and continue braking to on wheel speed and controls the brake pedal down firmly and avoid a sudden obstacle, a braking pressure accordingly. let ABS work. You might hear the computer senses that the wheels Remember: ABS does not change ABS pump or motor operating and are slowing down. If one of the the time needed to get a foot up to feel the brake pedal pulsate, but wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal or always decrease this is normal. computer will separately work the stopping distance. If you get too brakes at each wheel. close to the vehicle in front of you, Braking in Emergencies ABS can change the brake pressure there will not be enough time to ABS allows the driver to steer and to each wheel, as required, faster apply the brakes if that vehicle brake at the same time. In many than any driver could. This can help suddenly slows or stops. Always emergencies, steering can help the driver steer around the obstacle leave enough room up ahead to more than even the very best while braking hard. stop, even with ABS. braking. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (34,1)

9-34 Driving and Operating

Parking Brake To release the parking brake, Ride Control Systems hold the regular brake pedal down. Pull the handle, located just above ® the parking brake pedal, with the StabiliTrak System parking brake symbol, to release The vehicle may have a vehicle the parking brake. stability enhancement system called If the ignition is on when the parking StabiliTrak. It is an advanced brake is released, the brake system computer controlled system that warning light will go off. assists the driver with directional control of the vehicle in difficult Notice: Driving with the parking driving conditions. brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature StabiliTrak activates when the wear or damage to brake system computer senses a discrepancy parts. Verify that the parking between the intended path and To set the parking brake, hold the brake is fully released and the the direction the vehicle is actually regular brake pedal, then push brake warning light is off traveling. StabiliTrak selectively down the parking brake pedal. before driving. applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle's brakes to assist If the ignition is on, the brake If you are towing a trailer and the driver with keeping the vehicle system warning light will come on. are parking on a hill, see Driving on the intended path. Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 9‑46. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (35,1)

Driving and Operating 9-35

When the vehicle is started and StabiliTrak will automatically turn begins to move, the system back on when the vehicle speed performs several diagnostic checks exceeds 32 km/h (20 mph). to insure there are no problems. One chime is heard and the The system may be heard or felt StabiliTrak light will turn off. while it is working. This is normal When the StabiliTrak system has and does not mean there is a The StabiliTrak light comes on the been turned off, system noises may problem with the vehicle. The instrument panel cluster when the still be heard as a result of the system should initialize before the system is turned off or requires brake-traction control coming on. vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph). service. In some cases, it may take It is recommended to leave the approximately 3.2 km (2 mi) of When StabiliTrak activates, the system on for normal driving driving before the system initializes. TCS/StabiliTrak light flashes on the conditions, but it may be necessary instrument panel. This also occurs to turn the system off if the vehicle when TCS is activated. is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, For more information, see and you want to “rock” the vehicle to StabiliTrak® Indicator Light on attempt to free it. See If the Vehicle page 5‑25. is Stuck on page 9‑11. For your safety, the system can StabiliTrak System Operation only be disabled when the vehicle Press the StabiliTrak button The StabiliTrak system is normally speed is less than 32 km/h on, except when the system is once to turn off the Traction Control (20 mph). Three chimes will be System (TCS). Press and hold the initializing or has been disabled heard and the StabiliTrak light with the StabiliTrak button. The StabiliTrak button located on the comes on. instrument panel for more than StabiliTrak system will automatically five seconds to turn off StabiliTrak To turn on the StabiliTrak system, activate to assist the driver in and TCS. press the StabiliTrak button again. maintaining vehicle directional control in most driving conditions. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (36,1)

9-36 Driving and Operating

When activated, the StabiliTrak Traction Control Operation Adding non‐dealer accessories can system may reduce engine power to affect the vehicle's performance. TCS is part of the StabiliTrak the wheels and apply braking to See Accessories and Modifications system. TCS limits wheel spin by individual wheels as necessary to on page 10 3 for more information. reducing engine power to the ‑ assist the driver with vehicle wheels and by applying brakes to directional control. If cruise control each individual wheel as necessary. Locking Rear Axle is being used when StabiliTrak activates, the cruise control If the brake-traction control system Vehicles with a locking rear axle can automatically disengages. The activates constantly or if the brakes give more traction on snow, mud, cruise control can be re-engaged have heated up due to high speed ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a when road conditions allow. See braking, the brake-traction control standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low, this feature will Cruise Control on page 9‑37. will be automatically disabled. The system will come back on after the allow the rear wheel with the most The StabiliTrak system may also brakes have cooled. This can take traction to move the vehicle. turn off automatically if it determines up to two minutes or longer that a problem exists with the depending on brake usage. system. If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the TCS may activate on dry or rough vehicle, see your dealer for service. roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the transmission. When this a reduction in acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibration may be heard. This is normal. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (37,1)

Driving and Operating 9-37

Cruise Control For vehicles with cruise control, a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can be maintained without { WARNING keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control Cruise control can be dangerous does not work at speeds below where you cannot drive safely at about 40 km/h (25 mph). a steady speed. So, do not use the cruise control on winding When the brakes are applied, roads or in heavy traffic. cruise control is turned off. Cruise control can be dangerous If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and the system begins to limit wheel spin, on slippery roads. On such roads, cruise control will automatically fast changes in tire traction can disengage. See StabiliTrak® System (On/Off): Press to turn the cause excessive wheel slip, and on page 9 34. When road conditions I ‑ system on or off. The indicator light you could lose control. Do not use allow the cruise control to be safely cruise control on slippery roads. is on when cruise control is on and used again, it can be turned turns off when cruise control is off. back on. +RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press briefly to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed, or press and hold to accelerate. SET− (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed and activate cruise control or press and hold to decelerate. [ (Cancel): Press to disengage cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (38,1)

9-38 Driving and Operating

Setting Cruise Control Resuming a Set Speed Reducing Speed While Using If the cruise button is on when not in If the cruise control is set at a Cruise Control use, it could get bumped and go into desired speed and then the brakes If the cruise control system is cruise when not desired. Keep the are applied, the cruise control is already activated, cruise control switch off when disengaged without erasing the . Press and hold the SET– button cruise is not being used. set speed from memory. on the steering wheel until the The cruise control light on the Once the vehicle speed reaches desired lower speed is reached, instrument panel cluster comes on about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, then release it. after the cruise control has been set press the +RES button on the . To slow down in small amounts, to the desired speed. steering wheel. The vehicle returns press the SET– button on the to the previous set speed and 1. Press the I button. steering wheel briefly. Each time stays there. this is done, the vehicle goes 2. Get up to the desired speed. Increasing Speed While Using about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower. 3. Press the SET− button located Cruise Control Passing Another Vehicle While on the steering wheel and If the cruise control system is Using Cruise Control release it. already activated, Use the accelerator pedal to 4. Take your foot off the . Press and hold the +RES button increase the vehicle speed. When accelerator. on the steering wheel until the you take your foot off the pedal, the desired speed is reached, then vehicle will slow down to the release it. previous set cruise speed. . To increase vehicle speed in small amounts, press the +RES button. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (39,1)

Driving and Operating 9-39

Using Cruise Control on Hills Ending Cruise Control Erasing Speed Memory How well the cruise control will work There are three ways to end cruise The cruise control set speed is on hills depends upon the vehicle control: erased from memory by pressing speed, load, and the steepness of . To disengage cruise control, the I button or if the ignition is the hills. When going up steep hills, step lightly on the brake pedal. turned off. you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the . Press the [ on the steering vehicle speed. When going wheel. downhill, you might have to brake or . shift to a lower gear to keep the To turn off the cruise control, vehicle speed down. When the press I on the steering wheel. brakes are applied the cruise control is disengaged. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (40,1)

9-40 Driving and Operating

Fuel Recommended Fuel For diesel engine vehicles, see Use regular unleaded gasoline with “Fuel for Diesel Engines” in the a posted octane rating of 87 or Duramax Diesel Supplement. higher. If the octane rating is less than 87, an audible knocking noise, For Vehicles with gasoline engines, commonly referred to as spark please read this. knock, might be heard when driving. Gasoline If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as Use of the recommended fuel possible. If heavy knocking is heard is an important part of the proper when using gasoline rated at maintenance of this vehicle. To help 87 octane or higher, the engine keep the engine clean and maintain Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge needs service. optimum vehicle performance, we and a yellow fuel cap can use either recommend the use of gasoline unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel advertised as TOP TIER Detergent containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). Gasoline. See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 9 42. For all other vehicles, Look for the TOP TIER label on the ‑ use only the unleaded gasoline fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets described under Recommended enhanced detergency standards Fuel on page 9 40. developed by auto companies. A list ‑ of marketers providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at www.toptiergas.com. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (41,1)

Driving and Operating 9-41

Gasoline Specifications satisfactorily on fuels meeting Fuel Additives federal specifications, but emission (U.S. and Canada Only) control system performance To provide cleaner air, all gasolines At a minimum, gasoline should might be affected. The malfunction in the United States are now meet ASTM specification indicator lamp could turn on and the required to contain additives that D 4814 in the United States or vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. help prevent engine and fuel system CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on deposits from forming, allowing the Some gasolines contain an page 5‑21. If this occurs, return to emission control system to work octane-enhancing additive called your authorized dealer for diagnosis. properly. In most cases, nothing methylcyclopentadienyl manganese If it is determined that the condition should have to be added to the fuel. tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend is caused by the type of fuel used, However, some gasolines contain against the use of gasolines repairs might not be covered by the only the minimum amount of containing MMT. See Fuel Additives vehicle warranty. additive required to meet on page 9‑41 for additional U.S. Environmental Protection information. Fuels in Foreign Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves Countries California Fuel clean, or if the vehicle experiences Never use leaded gasoline or any problems due to dirty injectors or Requirements other fuel not recommended in the valves, look for gasoline that is If the vehicle is certified to meet previous text on fuel. Costly repairs advertised as TOP TIER Detergent California Emissions Standards, it is caused by use of improper fuel Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER designed to operate on fuels that would not be covered by the label on the fuel pump to ensure meet California specifications. See vehicle warranty. gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards developed by the underhood emission control To check the fuel availability, ask an label. If this fuel is not available in the auto companies. A list of auto club, or contact a major oil marketers providing TOP TIER states adopting California Emissions company that does business in the Standards, the vehicle will operate Detergent Gasoline can be found at country where you will be driving. www.toptiergas.com. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (42,1)

9-42 Driving and Operating

For customers who do not use Notice: This vehicle was not Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline designed for fuel that contains regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel methanol. Do not use fuel Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge System Treatment PLUS, added to containing methanol. It can and a yellow fuel cap can use either the fuel tank at every engine oil corrode metal parts in the fuel unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel change, can help clean deposits system and also damage plastic containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). from fuel injectors and intake and rubber parts. That damage For all other vehicles, use only the valves. GM Fuel System Treatment would not be covered under the unleaded gasoline described under PLUS is the only gasoline additive vehicle warranty. Recommended Fuel on page 9‑40. recommended by General Motors. Some gasolines that We encourage the use of E85 in It is available at your dealer. are not reformulated for low vehicles that are designed to use it. Gasolines containing oxygenates, emissions can contain an The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable” such as ethers and ethanol, and octane-enhancing additive called fuel, meaning it is made from reformulated gasolines might be methylcyclopentadienyl manganese renewable sources such as corn available in your area. We tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant and other crops. recommend that you use these where you buy gasoline whether the Many service stations will not have gasolines, if they comply with the fuel contains MMT. We recommend an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump specifications described earlier. against the use of such gasolines. available. The U.S. Department of However, E85 (85% ethanol) and Fuels containing MMT can reduce Energy has an alternative fuels other fuels containing more than the life of spark plugs and the website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/ 10% ethanol must not be used in performance of the emission control locator/stations/) that can help you vehicles that were not designed system could be affected. The find E85 fuel. Those stations that do for those fuels. malfunction indicator lamp might have E85 should have a label turn on. If this occurs, return to indicating ethanol content. Do not your dealer for service. use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than 85%. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (43,1)

Driving and Operating 9-43

At a minimum, E85 should meet For good starting and heater Notice: Some additives are not ASTM Specification D 5798. By efficiency below 0°C (32°F), the fuel compatible with E85 fuel and can definition, this means that fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain harm the vehicle's fuel system. labeled E85 will have an ethanol no more than 70% ethanol. It is best Do not add anything to E85. content between 70% and 85%. not to alternate repeatedly between Damage caused by additives Filling the fuel tank with fuel gasoline and E85. If you do switch would not be covered by the mixtures that do not meet ASTM fuels, it is recommended that you vehicle warranty. specifications can affect driveability add as much fuel as possible — do Notice: This vehicle was not and could cause the malfunction not add less than 11 L (3 gal) when designed for fuel that contains indicator lamp to come on. refueling. You should drive the methanol. Do not use fuel To ensure quick starts in the vehicle immediately after refueling containing methanol. It can wintertime, the E85 fuel must be for at least 11 km (7 mi) to allow the corrode metal parts in the fuel formulated properly for your climate vehicle to adapt to the change in system and also damage plastic according to ASTM specification ethanol concentration. and rubber parts. That damage D 5798. If you have trouble starting E85 has less energy per liter would not be covered under the on E85, it could be because the (gallon) than gasoline, so you will vehicle warranty. E85 fuel is not properly formulated need to refill the fuel tank more for your climate. If this happens, often when using E85 than when switching to gasoline or adding you are using gasoline. See Filling gasoline to the fuel tank can the Tank on page 9‑44. improve starting. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (44,1)

9-44 Driving and Operating

Filling the Tank { WARNING

{ WARNING Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. Fuel vapor burns violently and a If you spill fuel and then fuel fire can cause bad injuries. something ignites it, you could be To help avoid injuries to you and badly burned. This spray can others, read and follow all the happen if the tank is nearly full, instructions on the fuel pump and is more likely in hot weather. island. Turn off the engine when Open the fuel cap slowly and refueling. Do not smoke near fuel wait for any hiss noise to stop. or when refueling the vehicle. Then unscrew the cap all the way. Do not use cellular phones. The tethered fuel cap is located Keep sparks, flames, and behind a hinged fuel door on the smoking materials away from fuel. driver side of the vehicle. Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a Do not leave the fuel pump If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability, few seconds after you have finished unattended when refueling the the fuel cap will be yellow and state pumping before removing the vehicle. This is against the law in that E85 or gasoline can be used. nozzle. Clean fuel from painted See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on some places. Do not re-enter the surfaces as soon as possible. vehicle while pumping fuel. page 9‑42. See “Washing the Vehicle” in Keep children away from the To remove the fuel cap, turn it Exterior Care. fuel pump; never let children slowly counterclockwise. pump fuel. When replacing the fuel cap, turn it While refueling, hang the tethered clockwise until it clicks. Make sure fuel cap from the hook on the the cap is fully installed. The fuel door. diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (45,1)

Driving and Operating 9-45

This would allow fuel to Filling a Portable Fuel evaporate into the atmosphere. WARNING (Continued) See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on Container page 5‑21. . Bring the fill nozzle in contact { WARNING { with the inside of the fill WARNING Never fill a portable fuel container opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be If a fire starts while you are while it is in the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the maintained until the filling refueling, do not remove the is complete. nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by container can ignite the fuel shutting off the pump or by vapor. You can be badly burned . Do not smoke while notifying the station attendant. and the vehicle damaged if this pumping fuel. occurs. To help avoid injury to Leave the area immediately. . Do not use a cellular phone you and others: while pumping fuel. Notice: If you need a new fuel . Dispense fuel only into cap, be sure to get the right type. approved containers. Your dealer can get one for you. . Do not fill a container while If you get the wrong type, it may it is inside a vehicle, in a not fit properly. This may cause vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, the malfunction indicator lamp to or on any surface other than light and may damage the fuel the ground. tank and emissions system. (Continued) See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 5‑21. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (46,1)

9-46 Driving and Operating

Towing vehicle such as a motor home, see . Then, during the first 800 km Recreational Vehicle Towing on (500 mi) that a trailer is towed, page 10‑93. do not drive over 80 km/h General Towing (50 mph) and do not make starts Information Driving Characteristics at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of Only use towing equipment that and Towing Tips the vehicle wear in at the has been designed for the vehicle. heavier loads. Contact your dealer or trailering Pulling a Trailer . dealer for assistance with preparing Here are some important points: Vehicles with an automatic the vehicle for towing a trailer. transmissions can tow in . There are many different laws, D (Drive). Shift the transmission See the following trailer towing including speed limit restrictions, to a lower gear if the information in this section: having to do with trailering. transmission shifts too often . For information on driving Make sure the rig will be legal, under heavy loads and/or while towing a trailer, see not only where you live but also hilly conditions. where you will be driving. “Driving Characteristics and Three important considerations Towing Tips.” A good source for this information can be state or have to do with weight: . For maximum vehicle and trailer provincial police. . The weight of the trailer. weights, see “Trailer Towing.” . Consider using a sway control. . The weight of the trailer tongue. . For information on equipment See Hitches in Towing “ ” . The weight on the vehicle's tires. to tow a trailer, see Equipment on page 9‑54. “Towing Equipment.” Also see Tow/Haul later in this . Do not tow a trailer at all during section for information about the For information on towing a disabled the first 800 km (500 mi) the new vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on Tow/Haul button and the Tow/Haul vehicle is driven. The engine, indicator light. page 10‑93. For information on axle or other parts could be towing the vehicle behind another damaged. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (47,1)

Driving and Operating 9-47

Driving with a Trailer Before starting, check all trailer hitch WARNING (Continued) parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps, { WARNING . Fully open the air outlets on tires and mirror adjustments. If the or under the instrument trailer has electric brakes, start the When towing a trailer, exhaust panel. gases may collect at the rear of vehicle and trailer moving and then the vehicle and enter if the . Adjust the Climate Control apply the trailer brake controller by liftgate, trunk/hatch, or system to a setting that hand to be sure the brakes are rear-most window is open. brings in only outside air and working. This checks the electrical set the fan speed to the connection at the same time. Engine exhaust contains carbon highest setting. See Climate During the trip, check occasionally monoxide (CO) which cannot be Control System in the Index. to be sure that the load is secure, seen or smelled. It can cause For more information about and that the lamps and any trailer unconsciousness and even death. carbon monoxide, see Engine brakes are still working. To maximize safety when Exhaust on page 9‑24. Following Distance towing a trailer: Stay at least twice as far behind the . Have the exhaust system Towing a trailer requires a certain vehicle ahead as you would when inspected for leaks and make amount of experience. Get to know driving the vehicle without a trailer. necessary repairs before the rig before setting out for the This can help to avoid situations starting a trip. open road. Get acquainted with the that require heavy braking and feel of handling and braking with the . Never drive with the liftgate, sudden turns. trunk/hatch, or rear-most added weight of the trailer. And window open. always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and (Continued) not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (48,1)

9-48 Driving and Operating

Passing shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees If the transmission is not shifted or other objects. Avoid jerky or down, the brakes might have to be More passing distance is needed sudden maneuvers. Signal well used so much that they would get when towing a trailer. Because the in advance. hot and no longer work well. rig is longer, it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed Turn Signals When Towing a The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). vehicle before returning to the lane. Trailer Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too Backing Up The arrows on the instrument panel often under heavy loads and/or Hold the bottom of the steering flash whenever signaling a turn or hilly conditions. wheel with one hand. Then, to move lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps also flash, telling When towing at high altitude on the trailer to the left, move that hand steep uphill grades, consider the to the left. To move the trailer to the other drivers the vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping. following: Engine coolant will boil at right, move your hand to the right. a lower temperature than at normal Always back up slowly and, When towing a trailer, the arrows on altitudes. If the engine is turned off if possible, have someone the instrument panel flash for turns immediately after towing at high guide you. even if the bulbs on the trailer are altitude on steep uphill grades, the burned out. For this reason you may Making Turns vehicle may show signs similar to think other drivers are seeing the engine overheating. To avoid this, Notice: Making very sharp turns signal when they are not. It is let the engine run while parked, while trailering could cause the important to check occasionally preferably on level ground, with the trailer to come in contact with the to be sure the trailer bulbs are automatic transmission in P (Park) vehicle. The vehicle could be still working. for a few minutes before turning the damaged. Avoid making very Driving on Grades engine off. If the overheat warning sharp turns while trailering. comes on, see Engine Overheating When turning with a trailer, make Reduce speed and shift to a lower on page 10‑25. wider turns than normal. Do this gear before starting down a long or so the trailer will not strike soft steep downgrade. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (49,1)

Driving and Operating 9-49

Parking on Hills 3. When the wheel chocks are in Maintenance When Trailer place, release the brake pedal Towing until the chocks absorb the load. { WARNING The vehicle needs service more 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then often when pulling a trailer. See this Parking the vehicle on a hill with apply the parking brake and shift manual's Maintenance Schedule or the trailer attached can be into P (Park). Index for more information. Things dangerous. If something goes 5. Release the brake pedal. that are especially important in wrong, the rig could start to move. trailer operation are automatic People can be injured, and both Leaving After Parking on a Hill transmission fluid, engine oil, axle the vehicle and the trailer can be 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal lubricant, belts, cooling system and damaged. When possible, always while you: brake system. It is a good idea to park the rig on a flat surface. inspect these before and during 1.1. Start the engine. the trip. If parking the rig on a hill: 1.2. Shift into a gear. Check periodically to see that all 1. Press the brake pedal, but do 1.3. Release the parking brake. hitch nuts and bolts are tight. not shift the transmission into 2. Let up on the brake pedal. P (Park) yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is into traffic if facing uphill. clear of the chocks. 2. Have someone place chocks 4. Stop and have someone pick up under the trailer wheels. and store the chocks. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (50,1)

9-50 Driving and Operating

Trailer Towing Notice: Pulling a trailer your passengers. So please read improperly can damage the this section carefully before pulling If the vehicle has a diesel ® vehicle and result in costly a trailer. engine, see the Duramax diesel repairs not covered by the supplement for more information. vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer Weight of the Trailer correctly, follow the advice in this How heavy can a trailer safely be? { WARNING section and see your dealer for It depends on how the rig is used. important information about For example, speed, altitude, road The driver can lose control when towing a trailer with the vehicle. pulling a trailer if the correct grades, outside temperature and To identify the trailering capacity of equipment is not used or the how much the vehicle is used to pull the vehicle, read the information in a trailer are all important. It can vehicle is not driven properly. “Weight of the Trailer” that appears depend on any special equipment For example, if the trailer is too later in this section. on the vehicle, and the amount of heavy, the brakes may not work tongue weight the vehicle can carry. well or even at all. The driver Trailering is different than just — See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” and passengers could be driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in later in this section for more seriously injured. The vehicle may information. also be damaged; the resulting handling, acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy. repairs would not be covered by Maximum trailer weight is calculated Successful, safe trailering takes the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer assuming only the driver is in the correct equipment, and it has to tow vehicle and it has all the only if all the steps in this section be used properly. required trailering equipment. have been followed. Ask your The weight of additional optional dealer for advice and information The following information has many time-tested, important trailering tips equipment, passengers and cargo in about towing a trailer with the tow vehicle must be subtracted the vehicle. and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of from the maximum trailer weight. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (51,1)

Driving and Operating 9-51

Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options. Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR* G1500 Cargo Van 2WD 4.3LV6 3.42 1 950 kg (4,300 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs) 3.42 5.3LV8 3 084 kg (6,800 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs) 3.73 H1500 Cargo Van AWD 5.3LV8 3.42 2 948 kg (6,500 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs) G1500 Passenger Van 2WD 5.3LV8 3.73 2 812 kg (6,200 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs) H1500 Passenger Van AWD 5.3LV8 3.73 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs) G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase 4.8LV8 3.42 3 357 kg (7,400 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs) G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase 4.8LV8 3.42 3 266 kg (7,200 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (52,1)

9-52 Driving and Operating

Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR* G2500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase 4.8LV8 3.42 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 6.0LV8 3.42 4 445 kg (9,800 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs) G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase 4.8LV8 3.42 3 357 kg (7,400 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs) G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase 4.8LV8 3.42 3 221 kg (7,100 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs) G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase 6.0LV8 3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs) G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Long Wheelbase 6.0LV8 3.42 4 218 kg (9,300 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs) *The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo equipment and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (53,1)

Driving and Operating 9-53

Ask your dealer for our trailering See Vehicle Load Limits on Do not exceed the maximum information or advice, or write us at page 9‑12 for more information allowable tongue weight for the our Customer Assistance Offices. about the vehicle's maximum vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch See Customer Assistance Offices load capacity. extension that will position the hitch (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or ball closest to the vehicle. This will Customer Assistance Offices help reduce the effect of trailer (Mexico) on page 13‑6 for more tongue weight on the rear axle. information. After loading the trailer, weigh Weight of the Trailer Tongue the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are The tongue load (A) of any trailer is proper. If they are not, adjustments an important weight to measure might be made by moving some because it affects the total gross items around in the trailer. weight of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the Trailering may be limited by the curb weight of the vehicle, any vehicle's ability to carry tongue cargo carried in it, and the people weight. Tongue weight cannot cause who will be riding in the vehicle. the vehicle to exceed the GVWR The trailer tongue weight (A) should If there are a lot of options, (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or be 10 percent to 15 percent of the equipment, passengers or cargo in the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle total loaded trailer weight (B), up to the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue Weight Rating). The effect of a maximum of 181 kg (400 lbs) with weight the vehicle can carry, which additional weight may reduce a weight carrying hitch. The trailer will also reduce the trailer weight the the trailering capacity more tongue weight (A) should be vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, than the total of the 10 percent to 15 percent of the total the tongue load must be added to additional weight. loaded trailer weight (B), up to a the GVW because the vehicle will maximum of 454 kg (1,000 lbs) with be carrying that weight, too. a weight distributing hitch. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (54,1)

9-54 Driving and Operating

It is important that the vehicle Towing Equipment When using a weight-distributing does not exceed any of its hitch, the hitch must be adjusted so ratings — GCWR, GVWR, Hitches the distance (A) remains the same RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating It is important to have the correct both before and after coupling the or Tongue Weight. The only way to hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trailer to the tow vehicle. be sure it is not exceeding any trucks going by and rough roads are If a step-bumper hitch will be used, of these ratings is to weigh the a few reasons why the right hitch the bumper could be damaged in vehicle and trailer. is needed. sharp turns. Make sure there Total Weight on the Vehicle's is ample room when turning to Weight‐Distributing Hitches Tires avoid contact between the trailer and Weight Carrying Hitches and the bumper. Be sure the vehicle tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. If the loaded trailer being pulled These numbers can be found on the will weigh more than 2 270 kg Certification label at the rear edge of (5,000 lbs), be sure to use a the driver door, or see Vehicle Load properly mounted weight-distributing Limits on page 9‑12. Make sure not hitch and sway control of the to go over the GVW limit for the proper size. This equipment is very vehicle, or the GAWR, including the important for proper vehicle loading weight of the trailer tongue. If using and good handling when driving. a weight distributing hitch, make Always use a sway control if the sure not to go over the rear axle trailer will weigh more than these limit before applying the weight limits. Ask a hitch dealer about distribution spring bars. sway controls. A. Body to Ground Distance B. Front of Vehicle Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (55,1)

Driving and Operating 9-55

Will any holes need to be made in Always leave just enough slack so together and located in a frame the body of the vehicle when a the rig can turn. Never allow safety pocket at the driver side rear left trailer hitch is installed? chains to drag on the ground. corner of the frame. If using the wiring provided with the Trailer Brakes If the vehicle has a trailer hitch, the factory-installed trailering package, seven-wire harness assembly with no holes need to be made in the A loaded trailer that weighs more connector is attached to a bracket body of the vehicle. However, if an than 680 kg (1,500 lbs) needs to on the hitch platform. In both cases, aftermarket hitch is installed, holes have its own brake system that is the seven-wire harness has a may need to be made in the body. adequate for the weight of the connector and includes a 30-amp trailer. Be sure to read and follow feed wire. If holes are made in the body, then the instructions for the trailer brakes be sure to seal the holes later when so they are installed, adjusted and The seven-wire harness connector the hitch is removed. If the holes are maintained properly. contains the following trailer circuits: not sealed, deadly carbon monoxide . Trailer Wiring Harness Light Green: Back-up Lamps (CO) from the engine's exhaust can (10A fuse)** get into the vehicle as well as dirt The optional heavy-duty trailer . White: Ground and water. See “Carbon Monoxide” wiring package includes a wiring under Engine Exhaust on harness, with a seven-pin connector . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal page 9‑24. at the rear of the vehicle and a . Dark Green: Right Rear Stop Safety Chains four-wire harness assembly under and Turn Signal* the driver side of the instrument Always attach chains between the panel. The four-wire harness . Red/Black Stripe: Battery Feed vehicle and the trailer. Cross the assembly comes without a (30A Fuse) safety chains under the tongue of connector. . Brown: Trailer Park Lamp the trailer to help prevent the Supply Voltage (15A fuse)** tongue from contacting the road if it If the vehicle does not have a trailer becomes separated from the hitch. hitch, the seven-wire harness . Yellow: Left Rear Stop and assembly with connector is taped Turn Signal * Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (56,1)

9-56 Driving and Operating

The four-wire harness Tow/Haul Mode Tow/Haul is designed to be most (without connector) contains the effective when the vehicle and This button is on the instrument following circuits: trailer combined weight is at least panel, to the right of the steering 75 percent of the vehicle Gross . Black: Ground wheel. Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). . Red/White: Battery Feed Pressing this button turns on and See “Weight of the Trailer” in Trailer . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal off the tow/haul mode. Towing on page 9‑50. Tow/Haul is most useful under the following . Light Blue: CHMSL/Stoplamp driving conditions: Supply Voltage . When pulling a heavy trailer or a * If the vehicle is a cutaway with large or heavy load through trailer provisions, a 15 amp fuse will rolling terrain. be shared for both left/stop trailer turn and right/stop trailer turn . When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop and signals. However, the cutaway This indicator light on the instrument go traffic. lighting connector will have a panel cluster comes on when the 10 amp fuse for each signal. tow/haul mode is on. . When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in busy ** If the vehicle is a cutaway with Tow/Haul is a feature that assists parking lots where improved low trailer provisions, a 15 amp fuse will when pulling a heavy trailer or a speed control of the vehicle be shared for trailer park lamps and large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul is desired. cutaway rear lighting connector park Mode on page 9‑31 for more lamps. Also, a 10 amp fuse will be information. shared for trailer back-up lamps and cutaway rear lighting connector back-up lamps. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (57,1)

Driving and Operating 9-57

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul Conversions and Add-on equipment can drain the when lightly loaded or with no trailer vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the at all will not cause damage. Add-Ons vehicle is not operating. However, there is no benefit to The vehicle has an airbag system. the selection of Tow/Haul when Add-On Electrical Before attempting to add anything the vehicle is unloaded. Such a Equipment electrical to the vehicle, see selection when unloaded may Servicing the Airbag-Equipped result in unpleasant engine and Notice: Do not add anything Vehicle on page 3‑40 and Adding transmission driving characteristics electrical to the vehicle unless Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped and reduced fuel economy. Tow/ you check with your dealer first. Vehicle on page 3‑41. Haul is recommended only when Some electrical equipment can pulling a heavy trailer or a large or damage the vehicle and the heavy load. damage would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (58,1)

9-58 Driving and Operating

2 NOTES Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Vehicle Care 10-1

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-20 Front Turn Signal, Vehicle Care Cooling System ...... 10-21 Sidemarker, and Parking Engine Coolant ...... 10-22 Lamps ...... 10-41 Engine Overheating ...... 10-25 Taillamps ...... 10-42 General Information Engine Fan ...... 10-27 Center High-Mounted General Information ...... 10-2 Power Steering Fluid ...... 10-28 Stoplamp (CHMSL) ...... 10-43 California Proposition Washer Fluid ...... 10-29 License Plate Lamp ...... 10-44 65 Warning ...... 10-3 Brakes ...... 10-30 Replacement Bulbs ...... 10-44 California Perchlorate Brake Fluid ...... 10-31 Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Battery ...... 10-32 Electrical System Accessories and All-Wheel Drive ...... 10-33 Electrical System Modifications ...... 10-3 Front Axle ...... 10-34 Overload ...... 10-45 Tampering with Noise Control Rear Axle ...... 10-35 Fuses and Circuit System Prohibited ...... 10-4 Noise Control System ...... 10-35 Breakers ...... 10-45 Starter Switch Check ...... 10-36 Engine Compartment Fuse Vehicle Checks Block ...... 10-46 Doing Your Own Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Floor Console Fuse Service Work ...... 10-6 Block ...... 10-50 Hood ...... 10-6 Check ...... 10-37 Engine Compartment Ignition Transmission Lock Wheels and Tires Overview ...... 10-8 Check ...... 10-38 Tires ...... 10-52 Engine Oil ...... 10-10 Park Brake and P (Park) Tire Sidewall Labeling ...... 10-54 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13 Mechanism Check ...... 10-38 Tire Designations ...... 10-56 Automatic Transmission Wiper Blade Tire Terminology and Fluid (4-Speed Replacement ...... 10-39 Definitions ...... 10-58 Transmission) ...... 10-13 Bulb Replacement Tire Pressure ...... 10-60 Automatic Transmission Bulb Replacement ...... 10-40 Tire Pressure Monitor Fluid (6-Speed Halogen Bulbs ...... 10-40 System ...... 10-62 Transmission) ...... 10-16 Headlamps ...... 10-40 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

10-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure Monitor Jump Starting General Information Operation ...... 10-63 Jump Starting ...... 10-88 Tire Inspection ...... 10-66 For service and parts needs, visit Tire Rotation ...... 10-67 Towing your dealer. You will receive Dual Tire Rotation ...... 10-68 Towing the Vehicle ...... 10-93 genuine GM parts and GM-trained When It Is Time for New Recreational Vehicle and supported service people. Towing ...... 10-93 Tires ...... 10-69 Genuine GM parts have one of Buying New Tires ...... 10-70 Appearance Care these marks: Different Size Tires and Exterior Care ...... 10-96 Wheels ...... 10-71 Interior Care ...... 10-99 Uniform Tire Quality Floor Mats ...... 10-102 Grading ...... 10-72 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ...... 10-74 Wheel Replacement ...... 10-74 Tire Chains ...... 10-75 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 10-76 Tire Changing ...... 10-78 Secondary Latch System . . . 10-86 Full-Size Spare Tire ...... 10-88 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition California Perchlorate Accessories and 65 Warning Materials Requirements Modifications Most motor vehicles, including this Certain types of automotive Adding non‐dealer accessories to one, contain and/or emit chemicals applications, such as airbag the vehicle can affect vehicle known to the State of California to initiators, seat belt pretensioners, performance and safety, including cause cancer and birth defects or and lithium batteries contained in such things as airbags, braking, other reproductive harm. Engine Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, stability, ride and handling, exhaust, many parts and systems, may contain perchlorate materials. emissions systems, aerodynamics, many fluids, and some component Special handling may be necessary. durability, and electronic systems wear by-products contain and/or For additional information, see like antilock brakes, traction control, emit these chemicals. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ and stability control. Some of these perchlorate. accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

10-4 Vehicle Care

Damage to vehicle components Tampering with Noise Federal law prohibits the following resulting from the installation or use Control System acts or the causing thereof: of non‐GM certified parts, including Prohibited 1. The removal or rendering control module modifications, is not inoperative by any person, covered under the terms of the The following information relates to other than for purposes of vehicle warranty and may affect compliance with federal noise maintenance, repair or remaining warranty coverage for emission standards for vehicles replacement, of any device or affected parts. with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating element of design incorporated GM Accessories are designed to (GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg into any new vehicle for the complement and function with other (10,000 lbs). The Maintenance purpose of noise control, prior to systems on the vehicle. Your GM Schedule provides information on its sale or delivery to the ultimate dealer can accessorize the vehicle maintaining the noise control system purchaser or while it is in use; or to minimize degradation of the noise using genuine GM Accessories. 2. The use of the vehicle after such emission control system during the When you go to your GM dealer and device or element of design has life of your vehicle. The noise ask for GM Accessories, you will been removed or rendered control system warranty is given in know that GM-trained and inoperative by any person. supported service technicians will your warranty booklet. perform the work using genuine These standards apply only to GM Accessories. vehicles sold in the United States. Also, see Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3‑41. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Vehicle Care 10-5

Among those acts presumed to Fan and Drive: Exhaust: constitute tampering are the acts . Removal of fan clutch, if the . Removal of the muffler and/or listed below. vehicle has one, or rendering resonator. clutch inoperative. Insulation: . Removal of the exhaust pipes . Removal of the noise shields or . Removal of the fan shroud, if the and exhaust pipe clamps. vehicle has one. any underhood insulation. Fuel Operated Engine: Air Intake: Heater (FOH) — Diesel Engine: . Removal or rendering engine . Removal of the air cleaner . Removal of the muffler. speed governor, if the vehicle silencer. has one, inoperative so as to . Modification of the air cleaner. allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer specifications. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

10-6 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service Hood work, use the proper service manual. It tells you much more To open the hood: Doing Your Own about how to service the vehicle Service Work than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Service { WARNING Publications Ordering Information on page 13‑15. You can be injured and the This vehicle has an airbag system. vehicle could be damaged if you Before attempting to do your own try to do service work on a vehicle service work, see Servicing the 1. Pull the handle with this without knowing enough about it. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on symbol on it. It is located in front of the driver side door . page 3‑40. Be sure you have frame near the floor. sufficient knowledge, Keep a record with all parts receipts experience, the proper and list the mileage and the date of replacement parts, and tools any service work performed. before attempting any vehicle See Maintenance Records on maintenance task. page 11‑11. . Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and other fasteners. Metric and English fasteners can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners are used, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

Vehicle Care 10-7

If the vehicle has an underhood lamp, it will automatically come on and stay on until the hood is closed. Before closing the hood, be sure all of the filler caps are on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer. Let the hood down and close it firmly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle 3. Lift the hood, release the hood and lift up the secondary hood prop from its retainer and put the release, which is located hood prop into the slot in underneath the middle of the hood. the hood. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

10-8 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

4.3 L V6 Engine Shown (4.8 L V8 Engine, 5.3 L V8 Engine and 6.0 L V8 Engine Similar) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

Vehicle Care 10-9

A. Battery on page 10‑32. E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When I. Brake Master Cylinder B. Radiator Pressure Cap. See to Add Engine Oil” under Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” Engine Oil on page 10 10. under Brake Fluid on Cooling System on page 10‑21. ‑ page 10‑31. C. Coolant Recovery Tank. See F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Checking Engine Oil under J. Windshield Washer Fluid Cooling System on page 10‑21. “ ” Engine Oil on page 10‑10. Reservoir. See “Adding Washer D. Automatic Transmission Fluid G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on Fluid” under Washer Fluid on Dipstick. See “Checking the page 10 20. page 10‑29. Fluid Level” under Automatic ‑ Transmission Fluid (4-Speed H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the vehicle checks section in Transmission) on page 10‑13 or See Power Steering Fluid on the Duramax diesel manual. Automatic Transmission Fluid page 10‑28. (6-Speed Transmission) on page 10‑16. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

10-10 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil For diesel engine vehicles, see It is a good idea to check the “Engine Oil” in the Duramax Diesel engine oil level at each fuel fill. In Supplement. order to get an accurate reading, the vehicle must be on level ground. To ensure proper engine The engine oil dipstick handle is a performance and long life, careful yellow loop. See Engine attention must be paid to engine oil. Compartment Overview on Following these simple, but page 10‑8 for the location of the If the oil is below the cross-hatched important steps will help protect engine oil dipstick. your investment: area at the tip of the dipstick, add Obtaining an accurate oil level 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil . Always use engine oil approved reading is essential: and then recheck the level. See to the proper specification and of “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in the proper viscosity grade. See 1. If the engine has been running this section for an explanation of “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” recently, turn off the engine and what kind of oil to use. For engine in this section. allow several minutes for the oil oil crankcase capacity, see to drain back into the oil pan. Capacities and Specifications on . Check the engine oil level Checking the oil level too soon page 12‑2. regularly and maintain the after engine shut off will not proper oil level. See “Checking provide an accurate oil level Notice: Do not add too much oil. Engine Oil” and “When to Add reading. Oil levels above or below the Engine Oil” in this section. acceptable operating range 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it . Change the engine oil at the shown on the dipstick are harmful with a paper towel or cloth, then to the engine. If you find that you appropriate time. See Engine Oil push it back in all the way. Life System on page 10‑13. have an oil level above the Remove it again, keeping the operating range, i.e. the engine . Always dispose of engine oil tip down, and check the level. has so much oil that the oil level properly. See “What to Do With gets above the cross-hatched Used Oil” in this section. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

Vehicle Care 10-11

area that shows the proper This certification mark indicates that If you are unsure whether the oil operating range, the engine could the oil has been approved to the is approved to the dexos™ be damaged. You should drain dexos™ specification. specification, ask your out the excess oil or limit driving service provider. of the vehicle and seek a service Use of Substitute Engine Oils if professional to remove the dexos™ is unavailable: In the event excess amount of oil. that dexos™ approved engine oil is See Engine Compartment Overview not available at an oil change or for on page 10‑8 for the location of the maintaining proper oil level, you engine oil fill cap. may use substitute engine oil Add enough oil to put the level This vehicle was filled at the factory displaying the API Starburst symbol somewhere in the proper operating with dexos™ approved engine oil. and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade. Use of oils that do not meet the range. Push the dipstick all the way Notice: Use only engine oil that is back in when through. dexos™ specification, however, may approved to the dexos™ result in reduced performance under Selecting the Right Engine Oil specification or an equivalent certain circumstances. engine oil of the appropriate Selecting the right engine oil viscosity grade. Engine oils Viscosity Grade depends on both the proper oil approved to the dexos™ SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity specification and viscosity grade: specification will show the grade for the vehicle. Do not use Specification dexos™ symbol on the container. other viscosity oils such as Failure to use the recommended SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50. Use and ask for engine oils with engine oil or equivalent can result the dexos™ certification mark. Oils in engine damage not covered by meeting the requirements of the the vehicle warranty. vehicle should have the dexos™ certification mark on the container. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

10-12 Vehicle Care

Cold Temperature Operation: In an What to Do with Used Oil area of extreme cold, where the Used engine oil contains certain temperature falls below −29°C elements that can be unhealthy for (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should your skin and could even cause be used. An oil of this viscosity cancer. Do not let used oil stay on grade will provide easier cold your skin for very long. Clean your starting for the engine at extremely skin and nails with soap and water, low temperatures. When selecting or a good hand cleaner. Wash or an oil of the appropriate viscosity properly dispose of clothing or rags grade, be sure to always select containing used engine oil. See the an oil that meets the required manufacturer's warnings about the specification, dexos . ™ use and disposal of oil products. See “Specification” earlier in this section for more information. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your Engine Oil Additives/Engine own oil, be sure to drain all the oil Oil Flushes from the filter before disposal. Never Do not add anything to the oil. The dispose of oil by putting it in the recommended oils with the dexos™ trash or pouring it on the ground, specification and displaying the into sewers, or into streams or dexos™ certification mark are all bodies of water. Recycle it by taking that is needed for good performance it to a place that collects used oil. and engine protection. Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

Vehicle Care 10-13

Engine Oil Life System and, at this time, the system must 3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. be reset. Your dealer has trained When to Change Engine Oil If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON service people who will perform this message comes back on when the This vehicle has a computer system work and reset the system. It is also vehicle is started, the engine oil life that indicates when to change the important to check the oil regularly system has not reset. Repeat the engine oil and filter. This is based over the course of an oil drain procedure. on engine revolutions and engine interval and keep it at the temperature, and not on mileage. proper level. Automatic Transmission Based on driving conditions, the If the system is ever reset Fluid (4-Speed mileage at which an oil change is accidentally, the oil must be indicated can vary considerably. changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) Transmission) For the oil life system to work since the last oil change. If the vehicle has the Duramax properly, the system must be reset Remember to reset the oil life diesel engine, see Duramax diesel every time the oil is changed. system whenever the oil is changed. manual for more information. When the system has calculated How to Reset the Engine Oil When to Check and Change that oil life has been diminished, it Life System indicates that an oil change is Automatic Transmission Fluid necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE Reset the system whenever A good time to check the automatic OIL SOON message comes on. See the engine oil is changed so that transmission fluid level is when the Engine Oil Messages on page 5‑36. the system can calculate the engine oil is changed. Change the oil as soon as possible next engine oil change. Change the fluid and filter at the within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). To reset the system: intervals listed in Scheduled It is possible that, if driving under 1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN Maintenance on page 11 3 and be the best conditions, the oil life ‑ with the engine off. sure to use the transmission fluid system might indicate that an oil listed in Recommended Fluids and change is not necessary for up to a 2. Fully press and release the Lubricants on page 11 8. year. The engine oil and filter must accelerator pedal slowly three ‑ be changed at least once a year times within five seconds. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (14,1)

10-14 Vehicle Care

How to Check Automatic Wait at least 30 minutes before Let the engine run at idle for Transmission Fluid checking the transmission fluid level five minutes if outside temperatures if you have been driving: are 10°C (50°F) or more. If it is Because this operation can be a colder than 10°C (50°F), the engine little difficult, it may be decided . When outside temperatures are above 32°C (90°F). may have to idle longer. Should the to have this done at the dealer fluid level be low during this cold service department. . At high speed for quite a while. check, the fluid must be checked If not taken to the dealer, be sure . In heavy traffic — especially in hot before adding fluid. Checking to follow all the instructions here hot weather. the fluid hot will give a more or a false reading on the dipstick accurate reading of the fluid level. could result. . While pulling a trailer. Checking the Fluid Level Notice: Too much or too To get the right reading, the fluid Prepare the vehicle as follows: little fluid can damage the should be at normal operating transmission. Too much can temperature, which is 82°C to 93°C 1. Park the vehicle on a level mean that some of the fluid could (180°F to 200°F). place. Keep the engine running. come out and fall on hot engine Get the vehicle warmed up by 2. With the parking brake applied, parts or exhaust system parts, driving about 24 km (15 mi) when place the shift lever in P (Park). starting a fire. Too little fluid outside temperatures are above could cause the transmission to 10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C 3. With your foot on the brake overheat. Be sure to get an (50°F), drive the vehicle in 3 (Third) pedal, move the shift lever accurate reading if checking until the engine temperature gauge through each gear range, the transmission fluid. moves and then remains steady for pausing for about three seconds 10 minutes. in each range. Then, position the shift lever in P (Park). A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting 4. Let the engine run at idle for for eight hours or more with the three minutes or more. engine off, but this is used only as a reference. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (15,1)

Vehicle Care 10-15

Then, without shutting off the See Engine Compartment Overview engine, follow these steps: on page 10‑8 for more information. 1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, back out again. and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD The transmission dipstick is located area for a cold check or in the near the center of the engine HOT or cross-hatched area for a compartment and will be labeled hot check. Be sure to keep the with the graphic shown. dipstick pointed down to get an accurate reading. 4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (16,1)

10-16 Vehicle Care

How to Add Automatic . After adding fluid, recheck the the vehicle towed to a dealer Transmission Fluid fluid level as described under service department and have it “How to Check Automatic repaired before driving the Refer to Recommended Fluids and Transmission Fluid,” earlier in vehicle further. Lubricants on page 11‑8 to this section. determine what kind of transmission Change the fluid and filter at the . fluid to use. When the correct fluid level is intervals listed in Scheduled obtained, push the dipstick back Maintenance on page 11‑3, and be Using a funnel, add fluid down the in all the way; then flip the sure to use the transmission fluid transmission dipstick tube only after handle down to lock the listed in Recommended Fluids and checking the transmission fluid dipstick in place. Lubricants on page 11‑8. while it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the fluid level Automatic Transmission How to Check Automatic is low, add only enough of the Transmission Fluid proper fluid to bring the level up to Fluid (6-Speed the HOT area for a hot check. Transmission) Because this operation can be It does not take much fluid, difficult, it is recommended to generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). When to Check and Change have this check done at the Do not overfill. Automatic Transmission Fluid dealer service department, which can monitor the transmission Notice: Use of the incorrect It is usually not necessary to temperature. The transmission fluid automatic transmission fluid may check the transmission fluid level. level increases with temperature. damage the vehicle, and the The only reason for fluid loss is a To obtain a highly accurate fluid damages may not be covered by transmission leak or overheating level check, the transmission the vehicle warranty. Always use the transmission. If a small leak is temperature must be measured. the automatic transmission fluid suspected, use the following listed in Recommended Fluids procedures to check the fluid level. If it is decided to check the fluid level, be sure to follow all the and Lubricants on page 11‑8. However, if there is a large leak, then it may be necessary to have instructions here, or a false reading on the dipstick may occur. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (17,1)

Vehicle Care 10-17

Notice: Too much or too . In heavy traffic and hot weather. A warm fluid level check can be little fluid can damage the . While pulling a trailer. performed by driving the vehicle transmission. Too much can under lightly loaded conditions and mean that some of the fluid could After driving under these conditions, outside temperatures between come out and fall on hot engine a hot check can be performed. The 10°C to 27°C (50°F to 80°F). parts or exhaust system parts, fluid should be Hot, which is 71°C to The vehicle should be driven starting a fire. Too little fluid 93°C (160°F to 200°F). for at least 24 km (15 mi) before could cause the transmission to A cold fluid level check can be performing a warm check. Checking overheat. Be sure to get an performed after the vehicle has the fluid Warm or Hot will give a accurate reading if checking been sitting for eight hours or more more accurate reading of the fluid the transmission fluid. with the engine off, but this is used level than a cold check. Wait at least 30 minutes with the only as a reference. Let the engine Because the vehicle is equipped engine Off, before checking the run at idle for five minutes if outside with a high-efficiency air-to-oil transmission fluid level if the vehicle temperatures is between 15°C to cooler, the transmission fluid has been driven: 32°C (60°F to 90°F). Should the temperature may not reach the fluid level be low during this cold required Hot fluid level checking . In hot weather, when outside check, the fluid must be checked temperature under normal temperatures are above Warm or Hot before adding fluid. 32°C (90°F). lightly loaded driving vehicle If the outside temperature is colder conditions. . The vehicle is heavily loaded. than 15°C (60°F) or hotter than 32°C (90°F), a cold check cannot . At high speed for quite a while be performed. in hot weather. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (18,1)

10-18 Vehicle Care

Checking the Fluid Level Then, without shutting off Prepare the vehicle as follows: the engine: 1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running. 2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in P (Park). A. COLD Range 3. With foot on the brake pedal, B. WARM Range move the shift lever through C. HOT Range each gear range, pausing for The transmission dipstick is located about three seconds in each near the center of the engine 3. Check both sides of the range. When M is reached, compartment and will be labeled dipstick, and read the lower move the selector from M1 with the graphic shown. level. The fluid level must be in through M3. Then, position See Engine Compartment Overview the COLD (A) range for a cold the shift lever in P (Park). on page 10‑8 for more information check, transmission temperature 27°C to 32°C (80°F to 90°F), 4. Let the engine run at idle for on location. between the COLD (A) and two minutes or more. 1. Flip the handle up and then pull HOT (C) range for a WARM (B) out the dipstick and wipe it with check, 50°C to 60°C (122°F to a clean rag or paper towel. 140°F) or in the HOT (C) 2. Push it back in all the way, wait cross-hatched range for a hot three seconds and then pull it check, 71°C to 93°C (160°F to back out again. 200°F). Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an accurate reading. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (19,1)

Vehicle Care 10-19

4. If the fluid level is in the A cold check is used only as a Always use the automatic acceptable range, push the reference. If the fluid level is low, transmission fluid listed in dipstick back in all the way; then add only enough of the proper fluid Recommended Fluids and flip the handle down to lock the to bring the level up to the middle of Lubricants on page 11‑8. dipstick in place. the WARM (A) or HOT (B) range . After adding fluid, recheck the depending on the ambient fluid level as described under How to Add Automatic temperature and prior driving “How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid conditions. Refer to How to Check “ Transmission Fluid,” earlier Refer to Recommended Fluids and Automatic Transmission Fluid”, in this section. Lubricants on page 11‑8 to earlier in this section for instructions determine what kind of on driving to achieve warm or . When the correct fluid level is transmission fluid to use. hot transmission fluid. It does not obtained, push the dipstick back take much fluid, generally less than in all the way; then flip the 0.5 L (1 pt). Do not overfill. handle down to lock the dipstick in place. Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. A. WARM Range B. HOT Range Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is warm or hot. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (20,1)

10-20 Vehicle Care

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter When to Inspect the Engine Air To inspect or replace the engine air Cleaner/Filter cleaner/filter, do the following: If the vehicle has the Duramax diesel engine, see the Duramax Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the 1. Unhook the retainer clips and diesel manual for more information. scheduled maintenance intervals remove the cover. and replace it at the first oil change 2. Lift the filter out of the engine air after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi) cleaner/filter housing. Care interval. See Scheduled should be taken to dislodge as Maintenance on page 11‑3 for more little dirt as possible. information. If driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each 3. Clean the engine air cleaner/ engine oil change. filter housing. 4. Inspect or replace the engine air How to Inspect the Engine Air cleaner/filter. Make sure that the Cleaner/Filter filter fits properly into the To inspect the air cleaner/filter, housing. remove the filter from the vehicle 5. Reinstall the cover and fasten and lightly shake the filter to release the retaining clips. loose dust and dirt. If the filter The engine air cleaner/filter is remains covered with dirt, a new located near the center of the filter is required. Never use { WARNING engine compartment. See Engine compressed air to clean the filter. Compartment Overview on Operating the engine with the air page 10‑8 for more information cleaner/filter off can cause you or on location. others to be burned. (Continued) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (21,1)

Vehicle Care 10-21

WARNING (Continued) { WARNING

The air cleaner not only cleans Heater and radiator hoses, and the air; it helps to stop flames if other engine parts, can be very the engine backfires. Use caution hot. Do not touch them. If you do, when working on the engine you can be burned. and do not drive with the air Do not run the engine if there is a cleaner/filter off. leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is cause an engine fire, and you off, dirt can easily get into the could be burned. Get any leak engine, which could damage it. A. Radiator Pressure Cap fixed before you drive the vehicle. Always have the air cleaner/filter B. Coolant Recovery Tank in place when you are driving. C. Engine Cooling Fan Notice: Using coolant other than ® (Out of View) DEX-COOL can cause premature Cooling System engine, heater core, or radiator If the vehicle has a diesel { WARNING corrosion. In addition, the engine engine, see “Van Models” under coolant could require changing “Cooling System” in the Duramax An electric engine cooling fan can sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi) diesel manual. start even when the engine is not or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be The cooling system allows the running. To avoid injury, always keep hands, clothing, and tools covered by the vehicle warranty. engine to maintain the correct Always use DEX-COOL away from any engine working temperature. (silicate-free) coolant in cooling fan. the vehicle. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (22,1)

10-22 Vehicle Care

Engine Coolant . Will not damage aluminum parts. WARNING (Continued) . Helps keep the proper engine The cooling system in the vehicle ® temperature. is filled with DEX-COOL engine With plain water or the wrong coolant. This coolant is designed to mixture, the engine could get too Notice: If an improper coolant remain in the vehicle for 5 years or hot but you would not get the mixture is used, the engine could 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever overheat warning. The engine overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be occurs first. could catch fire and you or covered by the vehicle warranty. The following explains the cooling others could be burned. Use a Too much water in the mixture system and how to check and add 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable can freeze and crack the coolant when it is low. If there is a water and DEX-COOL coolant. engine, radiator, heater core, problem with engine overheating, and other parts. see Engine Overheating on Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, page 10‑25. Notice: If extra inhibitors drinkable water and DEX-COOL and/or additives are used in What to Use coolant. If using this mixture, the vehicle cooling system, the nothing else needs to be added. vehicle could be damaged. Use { WARNING This mixture: only the proper mixture of the . Gives freezing protection down engine coolant listed in this Adding only plain water or some to −37°C (−34°F), outside manual for the cooling system. other liquid to the cooling system temperature. See Recommended Fluids and can be dangerous. Plain water Lubricants on page 11‑8 for . Gives boiling protection up to and other liquids, can boil before more information. 129°C (265°F), engine the proper coolant mixture will. temperature. The coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. . Protects against rust and corrosion. (Continued) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (23,1)

Vehicle Care 10-23

Never dispose of engine coolant by putting it in the trash, pouring it on { WARNING the ground, or into sewers, streams, or bodies of water. Have the coolant You can be burned if you spill changed by an authorized service coolant on hot engine parts. center, familiar with legal Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts requirements regarding used The coolant recovery tank cap has are hot enough. Do not spill coolant disposal. This will help this symbol on it. protect the environment and coolant on a hot engine. your health. When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at or above Checking Coolant the COLD FILL mark. If it is not, Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure. The vehicle must be on a level there could be a leak in the cooling system. Failure to follow this procedure surface when checking the could cause the engine to coolant level. If the coolant is low, add the overheat and be severely Check to see if coolant is visible in coolant or take the vehicle to a damaged. dealer for service. the coolant recovery tank. If the If coolant is needed, add the proper coolant inside the coolant recovery How to Add Coolant to the DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the tank is boiling, do not do anything Recovery Tank for Gasoline coolant recovery tank. else until it cools down. If coolant is Engines visible but the coolant level is not at How to Add Coolant to the or above the COLD FILL mark, add If the vehicle has a diesel engine, Radiator see How to Add Coolant to the a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable “ If the vehicle has a diesel engine, water and DEX-COOL coolant at the Coolant Recovery Tank under ” see How to Add Coolant to the coolant recovery tank, but be sure Van Models in the Cooling System “ “ ” Radiator under Van Models in the the cooling system is cool before section of the Duramax diesel ” “ ” Cooling System section of the this is done. manual for the proper coolant fill Duramax diesel manual for the procedure. proper radiator fill procedure. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (24,1)

10-24 Vehicle Care

If coolant is needed, add the proper { WARNING mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool An electric engine cooling fan before this is done. under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING 1. Remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, 3. Fill the radiator with the proper Steam and scalding liquids from a including the radiator pressure DEX-COOL coolant mixture, up hot cooling system can blow out cap and upper radiator hose, is to the base of the filler neck. and burn you badly. They are no longer hot. Turn the pressure See Recommended Fluids and under pressure, and if you turn cap slowly counterclockwise Lubricants on page 11‑8 for the surge tank pressure until it first stops. Do not press more information about the cap — even a little — they can down while turning the proper coolant mixture. come out at high speed. Never pressure cap. turn the cap when the cooling If a hiss is heard, wait for that to system, including the surge tank stop. A hiss means there is still pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the some pressure left. cooling system and surge tank 2. Keep turning the pressure cap, pressure cap to cool if you ever but now push down as you turn have to turn the pressure cap. it. Remove the pressure cap. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (25,1)

Vehicle Care 10-25

8. Replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured. Engine Overheating 4. Fill the coolant recovery tank to 6. Start the engine and let it run If the vehicle has the Duramax the COLD FILL mark. until the upper radiator hose can diesel engine, see the Duramax be felt getting hot. Watch out for 5. Reinstall the cap back on the diesel manual for more information. coolant recovery tank, but leave the engine cooling fan. The vehicle has an indicator to warn the radiator pressure cap off. 7. By this time, the coolant level of engine overheating. inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is There is an engine coolant lower, add more of the proper temperature gauge on the vehicle's DEX-COOL coolant mixture instrument panel. See Engine through the filler neck until the Coolant Temperature Gauge on level reaches the base of the page 5‑16 for more information. filler neck. If the decision is made not to lift the hood when this warning appears, but instead get service help right away. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (26,1)

10-26 Vehicle Care

See Roadside Assistance Program Notice: Engine damage from (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or running the engine without WARNING (Continued) Roadside Assistance Program coolant is not covered by If you keep driving when the (Mexico) on page 13‑10. the warranty. engine is overheated, the liquids If the decision is made to lift the Notice: If the engine catches fire in it can catch fire. You or others hood, make sure the vehicle is because of being driven with no could be badly burned. Stop the parked on a level surface. coolant, the vehicle can be badly engine if it overheats, and get out Then check to see if the engine damaged. The costly repairs of the vehicle until the engine would not be covered by the cooling fans are running. If the is cool. engine is overheating, both fans vehicle warranty. should be running. If they are not, If Steam is Coming from the If No Steam is Coming from do not continue to run the engine Engine Compartment and have the vehicle serviced. the Engine Compartment See if the engine cooling fan speed { WARNING If an engine overheat warning is increases when idle speed is displayed but no steam can be doubled by pushing the accelerator Steam from an overheated engine seen or heard, the problem may pedal down. If it does not, the can burn you badly, even if you not be too serious. Sometimes the vehicle needs service. just open the hood. Stay away engine can get a little too hot when Turn off the engine. from the engine if you see or hear the vehicle: steam coming from it. Just turn it . Climbs a long hill on a hot day. off and get everyone away from . Stops after high-speed driving. the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of . Idles for long periods in traffic. steam or coolant before you . Tows a trailer. See “Driving on open the hood. Grades” under Trailer Towing on (Continued) page 9‑50. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (27,1)

Vehicle Care 10-27

If the overheat warning is displayed If the warning continues, pull over, This improves fuel economy and with no sign of steam: stop, and park the vehicle reduces fan noise. Under heavy 1. Turn the air off. right away. vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/ If there is still no sign of steam, or high outside temperatures, the 2. Turn the heater on to the highest fan speed increases as the clutch temperature and to the highest push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast more fully engages, so an increase fan speed. Open the windows as in fan noise may be heard. This is necessary. as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you are parked. normal and should not be mistaken 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine If the warning is still on, turn off the as the transmission slipping or idle in N (Neutral) while stopped. engine until it cools down. making extra shifts. It is merely the If it is safe to do so, pull off cooling system functioning properly. the road, shift to P (Park) or If the decision is made not to lift the The fan will slow down when N (Neutral) and let the hood, get service help right away. additional cooling is not required engine idle. and the clutch partially disengages. Engine Fan If the temperature overheat gauge This fan noise may be heard when is no longer in the overheat zone or The vehicle has a clutched engine starting the engine. It will go away an overheat warning no longer cooling fan. When the clutch is as the fan clutch partially displays, the vehicle can be driven. engaged, the fan spins faster to disengages. Continue to drive the vehicle slowly provide more air to cool the engine. for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe In most everyday driving conditions, vehicle distance from the vehicle in the fan is spinning slower and the front. If the warning does not come clutch is not fully engaged. back on, continue to drive normally. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (28,1)

10-28 Vehicle Care

Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering The level should be at the COLD Fluid FILL mark. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up To check the power steering fluid, to the mark. do the following: To prevent contamination of brake 1. Turn the key off and let the fluid, never check or fill the power engine compartment cool down. steering reservoir with the brake 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the master cylinder cover off. reservoir clean. The power steering fluid reservoir is What to Use located in the engine compartment 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the on the driver side of the vehicle. dipstick with a clean rag. To determine what kind of fluid to See Engine Compartment Overview use, see Recommended Fluids and on page 10‑8 for reservoir location. 4. Replace the cap and completely Lubricants on page 11‑8. Always tighten it. use the proper fluid. Failure to use When to Check Power 5. Then remove the cap again and the proper fluid can cause leaks and Steering Fluid look at the fluid level on the damage hoses and seals. It is not necessary to regularly dipstick. check power steering fluid unless there is a leak suspected in the system or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (29,1)

Vehicle Care 10-29

Washer Fluid Adding Washer Fluid Notice: . What to Use When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the When the vehicle needs windshield manufacturer's instructions washer fluid, be sure to read the for adding water. manufacturer's instructions before . Do not mix water with use. If operating the vehicle in an ready-to-use washer fluid. area where the temperature may fall Water can cause the solution below freezing, use a fluid that has Open the cap with the washer to freeze and damage the sufficient protection against symbol on it. Add washer fluid washer fluid tank and other freezing. until the tank is full. See Engine parts of the washer system. Compartment Overview on Also, water does not clean as page 10‑8 for reservoir location. well as washer fluid. . Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full. . Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in the windshield washer. It can damage the windshield washer system and paint. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (30,1)

10-30 Vehicle Care

Brakes Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment can cause a brake squeal when the Every time the brakes are applied, This vehicle has disc brakes. brakes are first applied or lightly with or without the vehicle moving, Disc brake pads have built-in wear applied. This does not mean the brakes adjust for wear. indicators that make a high-pitched something is wrong with the brakes. warning sound when the brake pads Replacing Brake System Parts are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake The braking system on a vehicle is heard all the time the vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated, complex. Its many parts have to be moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and of top quality and work well together brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the if the vehicle is to have really good proper sequence to torque braking. The vehicle was designed specifications in Capacities and { WARNING and tested with top-quality brake Specifications on page 12‑2. parts. When parts of the braking The brake wear warning sound Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get means that soon the brakes will replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts. not work well. That could lead to If this is not done, the brakes might Brake Pedal Travel a crash. When the brake wear not work properly. For example, warning sound is heard, have the See your dealer if the brake pedal installing disc brake pads that are wrong for the vehicle, can change vehicle serviced. does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in the balance between the front and pedal travel. This could be a sign rear brakes — for the worse. The Notice: Continuing to drive with that brake service might be braking performance expected can worn-out brake pads could result required. change in many other ways if the in costly brake repair. wrong replacement brake parts are installed. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (31,1)

Vehicle Care 10-31

Brake Fluid Do not top off the brake fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule Adding fluid does not correct a leak. to determine when to check the If fluid is added when the linings brake fluid. See Scheduled are worn, there will be too much Maintenance on page 11‑3. fluid when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, Checking Brake Fluid as necessary, only when work is Check brake fluid by looking at the done on the brake hydraulic system. brake fluid reservoir. See Engine Compartment Overview on The brake master cylinder reservoir page 10‑8. is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See { WARNING Engine Compartment Overview on If too much brake fluid is page 10 8 for the location of the ‑ added, it can spill on the engine reservoir. and/or fuel operated heater parts, There are only two reasons why the if equipped. If the vehicle has a brake fluid level in the reservoir diesel engine and a fuel operated might go down: heater, see “Fuel Operated . The brake fluid level goes down Heater (FOH)” in the diesel because of normal brake lining engine supplement. The fluid will wear. When new linings are burn if the engine is hot enough. installed, the fluid level goes You or others could be burned, back up. and the vehicle could be . A fluid leak in the brake damaged. Add brake fluid only hydraulic system can also cause when work is done on the brake The fluid level should be above a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic system. See “Checking MIN. If it is not, have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a Brake Fluid” in this section. hydraulic system checked to see if leak means that sooner or later there is a leak. the brakes will not work well. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (32,1)

10-32 Vehicle Care

After work is done on the brake Notice: Battery hydraulic system, make sure the . Using the wrong fluid can Refer to the replacement number level is above the MIN but not over badly damage brake the MAX mark. shown on the original battery label hydraulic system parts. when a new battery is needed. See What to Add For example, just a few Engine Compartment Overview on drops of mineral-based oil, page 10‑8 for battery location. Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid such as engine oil, in the from a sealed container. See brake hydraulic system can Recommended Fluids and damage brake hydraulic { DANGER Lubricants on page 11‑8. system parts so badly that Battery posts, terminals, and Always clean the brake fluid they will have to be replaced. related accessories contain lead reservoir cap and the area around Do not let someone put in and lead compounds, chemicals the cap before removing it. This the wrong kind of fluid. helps keep dirt from entering the known to the State of California to . If brake fluid is spilled on the reservoir. cause cancer and reproductive vehicle's painted surfaces, harm. Wash hands after handling. the paint finish can be { WARNING damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the With the wrong kind of fluid in vehicle. If you do, wash it the brake hydraulic system, the off immediately. brakes might not work well. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (33,1)

Vehicle Care 10-33

Vehicle Storage All-Wheel Drive

{ WARNING Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule You can be badly hurt if you are to determine how often to check not careful. See Jump Starting on the lubricant. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 11 3. page 10‑88 for tips on working ‑ around a battery without How to Check Lubricant getting hurt. To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a Infrequent Usage: Remove the level surface. If the level is below the bottom of black, negative (−) cable from the the filler plug hole, some lubricant battery to keep the battery from will need to be added. Add enough running down. lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use Extended Storage: Remove the care not to overtighten the plug. black, negative (−) cable from the battery or use a battery trickle What to Use charger. Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑8 to determine what kind of lubricant to use. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (34,1)

10-34 Vehicle Care

Front Axle When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the When to Check and Change level to 10 mm (3/8 in) below the Lubricant fill plug hole. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule When the differential is at operating to determine how often to check the temperature (warm), add enough lubricant and when to change it. lubricant to raise the level to the See Scheduled Maintenance on bottom of the fill plug hole. page 11‑3. What to Use How to Check Lubricant Refer to Recommended Fluids and To get an accurate reading, the Lubricants on page 11‑8 to vehicle should be on a level If the level is below the bottom of determine what kind of surface. the fill plug hole, some lubricant lubricant to use. may need to be added. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (35,1)

Vehicle Care 10-35

Rear Axle If you have the 1500 Series, the The Maintenance Schedule proper level is from 15 mm (5/8 in) to provides information on maintaining When to Check Lubricant 40 mm (1 5/8 in) below the bottom of the noise control system to minimize Refer to the Maintenance Schedule the fill plug hole. The proper level degradation of the noise emission to determine how often to check for the 2500 and 3500 Series is control system during the life of the the lubricant. See Scheduled from 0 to 6 mm (1/4 in) below vehicle. The noise control system the bottom of the fill plug hole. warranty is given in the vehicle Maintenance on page 11‑3. Add only enough fluid to reach warranty booklet. How to Check Lubricant the proper level. These standards apply only to What to Use vehicles sold in the United States. Refer to Recommended Fluids and Federal law prohibits the following Lubricants on page 11‑8 to acts or the causing thereof: determine what kind of 1. The removal or rendering lubricant to use. inoperative by any person, other than for purposes of Noise Control System maintenance, repair or replacement, of any device or The following information relates element of design incorporated to compliance with federal noise into any new vehicle for the emission standards for vehicles purpose of noise control, prior to with a Gross Vehicle Weight its sale or delivery to the ultimate Rating (GVWR) of more than purchaser or while it is in use; or To get an accurate reading, the 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs). vehicle should be on a level 2. The use of the vehicle after such surface. device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (36,1)

10-36 Vehicle Care

Among those acts presumed to Air Intake: Starter Switch Check constitute tampering are the acts . Removal of the air cleaner listed below. silencer. { WARNING Insulation: . Modification of the air cleaner. When you are doing this . Removal of the noise shields or Exhaust: inspection, the vehicle could any underhood insulation. . Removal of the muffler and/or move suddenly. If the vehicle Engine: resonator. moves, you or others could be injured. . Removal or rendering engine . Removal of the exhaust pipes speed governor, if the vehicle and exhaust pipe clamps. has one, inoperative so as to allow engine speed to exceed Fuel Operated manufacturer specifications. Heater (FOH) — Diesel Engine: Fan and Drive: . Removal of the muffler. . Removal of fan clutch, if the vehicle has one, or rendering clutch inoperative. . Removal of the fan shroud, if the vehicle has one. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (37,1)

Vehicle Care 10-37

1. Before starting this check, be Automatic Transmission 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room sure there is enough room around the vehicle. Shift Lock Control around the vehicle. It should Function Check 2. Firmly apply both the parking be parked on a level surface. brake and the regular brake. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake on { WARNING See Parking Brake on page 9‑34. page 9‑34. When you are doing this Do not use the accelerator inspection, the vehicle could Be ready to apply the regular pedal, and be ready to turn off move suddenly. If the vehicle brake immediately if the vehicle the engine immediately if moves, you or others could begins to move. it starts. be injured. 3. With the engine off, turn the 3. Try to start the engine in each ignition on, but do not start the gear. The vehicle should start engine. Without applying the only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). regular brake, try to move the If the vehicle starts in any other shift lever out of P (Park) with position, contact your dealer normal effort. If the shift lever for service. moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer for service. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (38,1)

10-38 Vehicle Care

Ignition Transmission Park Brake and P (Park) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping Lock Check Mechanism Check your foot on the regular brake, set While parked, and with the parking the parking brake. { WARNING brake set, try to turn the ignition to . To check the parking brake's LOCK/OFF in each shift lever holding ability: With the engine position. When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. running and the transmission in . The ignition should turn to You or others could be injured N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake LOCK/OFF only when the shift and property could be damaged. pedal. Do this until the vehicle is lever is in P (Park). Make sure there is room in front held by the parking brake only. . The ignition key should come of the vehicle in case it begins to out only in LOCK/OFF. roll. Be ready to apply the regular . To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability: Contact your dealer if service is brake at once should the vehicle With the engine running, shift to required. begin to move. P (Park). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake. Contact your dealer if service is required. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (39,1)

Vehicle Care 10-39

Wiper Blade Replacement To remove the type with a release 3. The insert has two notches at clip, do the following: one end that are locked by Windshield wiper blades should be bottom claws of the blade inspected for wear and cracking. 1. Lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical position. assembly. At the notched end, See Scheduled Maintenance on pull the insert from the page 11‑3 for more information on blade assembly. wiper blade inspection. 4. To install the new wiper insert, Replacement blades come in slide the notched end last, into different types and are removed in the end with two blade claws. different ways. Then slide the insert all the way through the blade claws at the opposite end. 5. Make sure that the notches are locked by the bottom claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly locked on both sides of the insert slot. 2. Press down on the blade 6. Put the blade assembly pivot in assembly pivot locking tab. the wiper arm hook. Pull it up Pull down on the blade until the pivot locking tab locks assembly to release it from in the hook slot. the wiper arm hook. 7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly into the windshield. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (40,1)

10-40 Vehicle Care

Bulb Replacement Headlamps To remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle and access For the proper type of replacement the bulbs: bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on 1. Open the hood. See Hood on page 10‑44. page 10‑6 for more information. For any bulb‐changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer. Halogen Bulbs A. High Beam Headlamp { WARNING ‐ B. Low‐Beam Headlamp Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. 2. Remove the two bolts from the headlamp assembly. 3. Lift the headlamp assembly to release the lower tabs from the radiator support. 4. Turn the headlamp forward and upward to remove it from the grille. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (41,1)

Vehicle Care 10-41

8. Reverse the steps to reinstall To replace the front turn signal, the headlamp assembly. sidemarker, and/or parking To prevent headlamp vibration lamp bulb(s): and shortened bulb life, be sure to insert the headlamp assembly tabs in the slots at the lower portion of the housing, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker, and 1. Use a small tool to unlatch the Parking Lamps outboard clip on the lamp by 5. Disconnect the electrical pushing inboard and prying the connector. lamp assembly forward. 6. Turn the bulb counterclockwise 2. Remove the lamp from the grille. one quarter turn to remove it 3. Turn the bulb socket from the headlamp assembly. counterclockwise one quarter 7. Install the new bulb into the turn and remove it from the headlamp assembly and connect lamp assembly. the electrical connector. 4. Remove the bulb from the A. Front Parking and Turn socket by pulling it straight out. Signal Lamp 5. Replace the bulb. B. Front Sidemarker Lamp 6. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall it in the lamp assembly. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (42,1)

10-42 Vehicle Care

7. Reinstall the lamp assembly into 4. Remove the third nut (C) from the grille until the outboard clip the upper outboard side of snaps into place. the lamp. 5. Remove the taillamp assembly Taillamps from the vehicle. To replace a taillamp/turn signal lamp or back‐up lamp bulb:

2. The third nut (C) is under the applique piece (B) above the lamp. Remove the two inboard applique nuts. Pull the applique (B) straight rearward slightly to clear the studs. Then rotate the applique (B) just far 6. Remove the taillamp/turn signal enough to gain access to the lamp (A) or back‐up lamp (B) 1. Remove the two inboard nuts outer push pins (A). bulb socket by turning it from the inside of the taillamp 3. Carefully disconnect the push counterclockwise one quarter assembly. pins (A) from the applique turn and pulling it out of the bracket lamp assembly. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (43,1)

Vehicle Care 10-43

7. Remove the bulb by pulling it Center High-Mounted 3. Turn the bulb socket straight out. Stoplamp (CHMSL) counterclockwise one quarter 8. Push the new bulb into the turn to remove it from the socket. The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp lamp assembly. (CHMSL) is located above the rear 4. Pull the old bulb straight out of 9. Reinstall the bulb socket by doors at the center of the vehicle. turning it clockwise into the the socket and push the new lamp assembly. To replace a bulb: bulb into the socket. 10. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to 5. Turn the bulb socket clockwise reinstall the taillamp assembly one quarter turn to install it in and applique. the lamp assembly. 6. Reinstall the CHMSL assembly and two screws. Do not block or damage the CHMSL when items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle.

1. Remove the two screws from the CHMSL assembly. 2. Remove the CHMSL assembly. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (44,1)

10-44 Vehicle Care

License Plate Lamp 3. Install the new bulb. Bulb Exterior Lamp To replace one of these bulbs: 4. Reverse steps 1 and 2 to Number reinstall the license plate bulb Headlamps assembly. Composite Replacement Bulbs High-Beam 9005LL Headlamp Bulb Exterior Lamp Composite Number Low-Beam 9006LL Back-up, Headlamp Rear Parking, Sealed Beam 3157KX H6054 Stoplamp, and Headlamp Turn Signal Lamp Center For replacement bulbs not listed High Mounted here, contact your dealer. A. Bulb Socket ‐ 912LL Stop Lamp B. License Plate Bulb Assembly (CHMSL) C. Screws Front Parking and 3157KX 1. Remove the screws (C) that Turn Signal Lamp secure the license plate bulb Front 194LL assembly (B). Sidemarker Lamp 2. Turn the bulb socket (A) License 194LL counterclockwise and pull the Plate Lamp bulb straight out of the socket. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (45,1)

Vehicle Care 10-45

Electrical System If there is a problem on the road If the overload is caused by an and a fuse needs to be replaced, electrical problem and not snow or the same amperage fuse can be ice, be sure to get it fixed. Electrical System borrowed. Choose some feature of Overload the vehicle that is not needed to use Fuses and Circuit and replace it as soon as possible. The vehicle has fuses and circuit Breakers breakers to protect against an Headlamp Wiring The wiring circuits in the vehicle are electrical system overload. An electrical overload may cause protected from short circuits by a When the current electrical load is the lamps to go on and off, or in combination of fuses and circuit too heavy, the circuit breaker opens some cases to remain off. Have the breakers. This greatly reduces the and closes, protecting the circuit headlamp wiring checked right away chance of fires caused by electrical until the current load returns to if the lamps go on and off or problems. normal or the problem is fixed. This remain off. Look at the silver-colored band greatly reduces the chance of circuit inside the fuse. If the band is broken overload and fire caused by Windshield Wipers or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure electrical problems. If the wiper motor overheats due to you replace a bad fuse with a new Fuses and circuit breakers protect heavy snow or ice, the windshield one of the identical size and rating. the following in the vehicle: wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart. . Headlamp Wiring Although the circuit is protected . Windshield Wiper Motor from electrical overload, overload . Power Windows and Other due to heavy snow or ice may Power Accessories cause wiper linkage damage. Replace a bad fuse with a new one Always clear ice and heavy snow of the identical size and rating. from the windshield before using the windshield wipers. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (46,1)

10-46 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Fuse Block The fuse block is located in the engine compartment on the driver side of the vehicle. Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical component on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component.

The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (47,1)

Vehicle Care 10-47

Mini Fuse Usage Mini Fuse Usage Mini Fuse Usage Right Stop/Turn 11 Trailer Wiring 23 Spare 3 Trailer 12 Spare 24 Fuel Pump 4 Spare 13 Brake Switch Auxiliary Power 25 5 Spare Outlet 14 Windshield Washer Fuel System Body Control 16 Horn 26 6 Control Module Module 3 Ignition 17 Transmission Special Equipment 27 Body Control Air Conditioning Option 7 18 Module 5 Compressor 28 Airbag Body Control Engine Control 8 19 Steering Wheel Module 7 Module Battery 29 Sensor Body Control 20 Spare 9 Engine Control Module 4 Left Stop/Turn 30 Module Ignition/ 21 Instrument Panel Trailer Glow Plug Module 10 Cluster 22 Spare Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (48,1)

10-48 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuse Usage Mini Fuse Usage Mini Fuse Usage Transmission Right High Beam Oxygen 52 ‐ 31 Control Module Headlamp 62 Sensor 2 (Post), Ignition EV Fan (Diesel) Left Low Beam 53 ‐ Transmission Headlamp 63 Spare 32 Control Module Right Low Beam Mass Air Flow/ Battery 54 ‐ 64 Headlamp Canister Vent 33 Spare 55 Wiper Odd Ignition/ 65 34 Spare Injectors Canister Vent 56 Fuel Operated Solenoid Daytime 35 Heater Module Running Lamps 2 Body Control 66 58 (LOLVL V22) Fuel System Module 2 ‐ (If Equipped) 36 Control Module Body Control Battery 59 Daytime Running Module 1 Lamps 1 Left High Beam 67 51 ‐ 61 Spare (UPLVL+V22) Headlamp (If Equipped) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (49,1)

Vehicle Care 10-49

Mini Fuse Usage J‐Case Fuse Usage Relay Usage Auxiliary Stop 1 ABS Motor 15 Run/Crank 68 Lamps 2 ABS Module 37 Spare 69 Spare 41 Spare 38 Fuel Pump 70 Spare 42 Trailer Wiring 39 Crank 71 Fuel Heater 43 Fan High Air Conditioning 40 Body Control Compressor 72 44 Starter Solenoid Module 6 48 Fan High Engine Control Lighter/Data Link 45 73 Module/Powertrain 49 Powertrain Connection Fuel System 50 Spare 75 V6 Fuel Injectors 46 Control Module 57 Fan Low 76 Spare Battery 60 Fan Control Oxygen Sensor 47 Fan Lo 77 2 (Pre) 74 Front Blower Engine Control 78 Module Powertrain Even Ignition/ 79 Injectors Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (50,1)

10-50 Vehicle Care

Floor Console Fuse Block The floor console fuse block is located under the driver seat.

The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (51,1)

Vehicle Care 10-51

Mini‐Fuse Usage Mini‐Fuse Usage Mini‐Fuse Usage F1 Empty OnStar® Remote Function F11 (If Equipped) F21 Actuator/Tire Steering Wheel F2 Pressure Monitor Sensor F12 Empty Ignition Auxiliary Parking Heating, F3 Switch/Discrete Lamps (Cut Away) F13 Ventilation and F22 ‐ Logic Ignition Air Conditioning 2 F4 Front Park Lamps Sensor (PK3) Heating, F5 Trailer Park Lamps Instrument Panel F14 Ventilation and F23 Cluster Upfitter Park Air Conditioning 1 F6 Lamps Heating, F15 Empty Ventilation and Right Rear F25 F7 Outside Rear View Air Conditioning Park Lamp F17 Mirror Heater Control Left Rear F8 Rear Window Auxiliary/Trailer Park Lamp F18 F26 Defogger Backup Outside Rear View F9 F19 Compass F27 Taillamps Backup Mirror Switch Radio/Chime/XM™ Upfitter Courtesy Airbag/Automatic F30 F10 F20 Satellite Radio Occupant Sensing Lamps (If Equipped) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (52,1)

10-52 Vehicle Care

Mini‐Fuse Usage Relays Usage Wheels and Tires F31 Front Door Lock Run (High Current K1 Micro) Tires F32 Rear Door Lock Empty (High This new vehicle comes with F33 Cargo Door Unlock K2 Current Micro) high-quality tires made by a Passenger F34 Park Lamps (High leading tire manufacturer. If you Door Unlock K3 Current Micro) ever have questions about the Rear Passenger tire warranty and where to F35 Upfitter Auxiliary 2 Door Unlock K4 obtain service, see the vehicle (High Current Mini) Warranty booklet for details. F36 Driver Door Unlock Rear Defogger For additional information refer F37 Empty K5 (High Current to the tire manufacturer. F38 Empty Micro) Retained Accessory J‐Case Fuse Usage K6 Power (RAP) (High F16 Upfitter Auxiliary 1 Current Micro) F24 Empty Upfitter Auxiliary 2 Circuit Usage F28 Reading Lamps Breaker F29 Rear Blower CB1 Power Seats CB2 Power Windows Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (53,1)

Vehicle Care 10-53

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

. Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are . Over inflated tires are more . Improperly repaired tires can dangerous. likely to be cut, punctured, cause a crash. Only the or broken by a sudden dealer or an authorized tire . Overloading the tires can impact such as when you service center should repair, cause overheating as a result — of too much flexing. You hit a pothole. Keep tires at replace, dismount, and could have a blowout and a the recommended pressure. mount the tires. serious accident. See Vehicle . Worn or old tires can cause a . Do not spin the tires in Load Limits on page 9‑12. crash. If the tread is badly excess of 55 km/h (35 mph) . Under inflated tires pose the worn, replace them. on slippery surfaces such as snow, mud, ice, etc. same danger as overloaded . Replace any tires that have tires. The resulting crash been damaged by impacts Excessive spinning may could cause serious injury. with potholes, curbs, etc. cause the tires to explode. Check all tires frequently to (Continued) maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when the tires are cold. (Continued) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (54,1)

10-54 Vehicle Care

Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the (TIN). The TIN shows the “Tire Size” illustration later in this manufacturer and plant code, Useful information about a section for more detail. tire size, and date the tire was tire is molded into the sidewall. manufactured. The TIN is The following illustrations are (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria molded onto both sides of the examples of a typical P‐Metric tire, although only one side may and a LT‐Metric tire sidewall. Specification): Original equipment tires designed to have the date of manufacture. GM's specific tire performance (E) Tire Ply Material: The type criteria have a TPC specification of cord and number of plies in code molded onto the sidewall. the sidewall and under the tread. GM's TPC specifications meet or (F) Uniform Tire Quality exceed all federal safety Grading (UTQG): Tire guidelines. manufacturers are required to (C) DOT (Department of grade tires based on three Transportation): performance factors: treadwear, The Department of traction, and temperature Transportation (DOT) code resistance. For more Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire indicates that the tire is in information, see Uniform Tire compliance with the U.S. Quality Grading on page 10‑72. (A) Tire Size: The tire size Department of Transportation (G) Maximum Cold Inflation code is a combination of letters Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. and numbers used to define a Load Limit: Maximum load particular tire's width, height, (D) Tire Identification that can be carried and the aspect ratio, construction type, Number (TIN): The letters and maximum pressure needed numbers following DOT code are to support that load. the Tire Identification Number Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (55,1)

Vehicle Care 10-55

For information on (B) TPC Spec (D) DOT (Department of recommended tire pressure see (Tire Performance Criteria Transportation): Tire Pressure on page 10‑60 Specification): Original The Department of and Vehicle Load Limits on equipment tires designed to Transportation (DOT) code page 9‑12. GM's specific tire performance indicates that the tire is in criteria have a TPC specification compliance with the U.S. code molded onto the sidewall. Department of Transportation GM's TPC specifications meet Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. or exceed all federal safety (E) Tire Identification Number guidelines. This does not apply (TIN): The letters and numbers to Goodyear LT225/75R16 following DOT code are the Tire G949 RSA and Goodyear Identification Number (TIN). The LT225/75R16 G933 RSD TIN shows the manufacturer and commercial truck tires. plant code, tire size, and date (C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: the tire was manufactured. The Maximum load that can be TIN is molded onto both sides of Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire carried and the maximum the tire, although only one side pressure needed to support may have the date of (A) Tire Size: The tire size that load when used in a dual manufacture. code is a combination of letters configuration. For information on and numbers used to define a recommended tire pressure see particular tire's width, height, Tire Pressure on page 10 60 aspect ratio, construction type, ‑ and Vehicle Load Limits on and service description. See the page 9‑12. “Tire Size” illustration later in this section for more detail. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (56,1)

10-56 Vehicle Care

(F) Tire Ply Material: The type Tire Designations (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit of cord and number of plies in number that indicates the tire the sidewall and under the tread. Tire Size height‐to‐width measurements. (G) Single Tire Maximum The following examples show For example, if the tire size Load: Maximum load that can the different parts of a tire size. aspect ratio is 75, as shown in be carried and the maximum item C of the illustration, it would pressure needed to support that mean that the tire's sidewall is load when used as a single. For 75 percent as high as it is wide. information on recommended (D) Construction Code: A tire pressure see Tire Pressure letter code is used to indicate on page 10‑60 and Vehicle Load the type of ply construction in Limits on page 9‑12. Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire the tire. The letter R means (A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: radial ply construction; the The United States version of a letter D means diagonal or bias metric tire sizing system. The ply construction; and the letter B letter P as the first character in means belted‐bias ply the tire size means a passenger construction. vehicle tire engineered to (E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches. and Rim Association. (F) Service Description: These (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit characters represent the load number indicates the tire section index and speed rating of the width in millimeters from tire. The load index represents sidewall to sidewall. the load carrying capacity a tire Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (57,1)

Vehicle Care 10-57

is certified to carry. The speed (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit (F) Load Range: Load Range. rating is the maximum speed a number that indicates the tire (G) Service Description: tire is certified to carry a load. height‐to‐width measurements. The service description indicates For example, if the tire size the load index and speed rating aspect ratio is 75, as shown of a tire. If two numbers are in item C of the light truck given as in the example, (LT‐Metric) tire illustration, it 120/116, then this represents would mean that the tire's the load index for single versus sidewall is 75 percent as high dual wheel usage (single/dual). Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire as it is wide. The speed rating is the (A) Light Truck (LT‐Metric) (D) Construction Code: maximum speed a tire is Tire: The United States version A letter code is used to indicate certified to carry a load. of a metric tire sizing system. the type of ply construction in This does not apply to Goodyear The letters LT as the first two the tire. The letter R means LT225/75R16 G949 RSA and characters in the tire size means radial ply construction; the Goodyear LT225/75R16 G933 a light truck tire engineered to letter D means diagonal or bias RSD commercial truck tires; see standards set by the U.S. Tire ply construction; and the letter B the dual tire and single tire and Rim Association. means belted‐bias ply maximum load and load range construction. letter designations on the (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit number indicates the tire section (E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of tire sidewall. width in millimeters from the wheel in inches. sidewall to sidewall. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (58,1)

10-58 Vehicle Care

Tire Terminology and Bead: The tire bead contains DOT Markings: A code molded Definitions steel wires wrapped by steel into the sidewall of a tire cords that hold the tire onto signifying that the tire is in Air Pressure: The amount of the rim. compliance with the U.S. air inside the tire pressing Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Department of Transportation outward on each square inch (DOT) motor vehicle safety of the tire. Air pressure is in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than standards. The DOT code expressed in psi (pounds per includes the Tire Identification square inch) or kPa (kilopascal). 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Number (TIN), an alphanumeric Accessory Weight: designator which can also This means the combined Cold Tire Pressure: identify the tire manufacturer, weight of optional accessories. The amount of air pressure production plant, brand, and Some examples of optional in a tire, measured in kPa date of production. (kilopascal) or psi (pounds per accessories are, automatic GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight transmission, power steering, square inch) before a tire has built up heat from driving. See Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits power brakes, power windows, on page 9‑12. power seats, and air Tire Pressure on page 10‑60. conditioning. Curb Weight: The weight of a GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight motor vehicle with standard and Rating for the front axle. Aspect Ratio: The relationship See Vehicle Load Limits on of a tire's height to its width. optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, page 9‑12. Belt: A rubber coated layer of and coolant, but without GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight cords that is located between passengers and cargo. Rating for the rear axle. the plies and the tread. Cords See Vehicle Load Limits on may be made from steel or other page 9‑12. reinforcing materials. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (59,1)

Vehicle Care 10-59

Intended Outboard Sidewall: Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The side of an asymmetrical tire, Weight: The sum of curb A tire used on passenger cars that must always face outward weight, accessory weight, and some light duty trucks and when mounted on a vehicle. vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric production options weight. Recommended unit for air pressure. Normal Occupant Weight: Inflation Pressure: The number of occupants a Vehicle manufacturer's Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty trucks vehicle is designed to seat recommended tire inflation and some multipurpose multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs). pressure as shown on the tire passenger vehicles. See Vehicle Load Limits on placard. See Tire Pressure on page 9‑12. page 10‑60 andVehicle Load Load Index: An assigned Limits on page 9‑12. number ranging from 1 to 279 Occupant Distribution: that corresponds to the load Designated seating positions. Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic carrying capacity of a tire. Outward Facing Sidewall: tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at Maximum Inflation Pressure: The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that 90 degrees to the centerline of The maximum air pressure to the tread. which a cold tire can be inflated. faces outward when mounted on The maximum air pressure is a vehicle. The side of the tire Rim: A metal support for a tire molded onto the sidewall. that contains a whitewall, bears and upon which the tire beads white lettering, or bears are seated. Maximum Load Rating: manufacturer, brand, and/or The load rating for a tire at the Sidewall: The portion of a tire model name molding that is between the tread and the bead. maximum permissible inflation higher or deeper than the same pressure for that tire. moldings on the other sidewall of the tire. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (60,1)

10-60 Vehicle Care

Speed Rating: Ratings are determined See “Tire and Loading An alphanumeric code by tire manufacturers using Information Label” under Vehicle assigned to a tire indicating the government testing procedures. Load Limits on page 9‑12. maximum speed at which a tire The ratings are molded into the can operate. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Pressure Traction: The friction between Tire Quality Grading on Tires need the correct amount the tire and the road surface. page 10‑72. of air pressure to operate The amount of grip provided. Vehicle Capacity Weight: effectively. Tread: The portion of a tire The number of designated Notice: Do not let anyone tell that comes into contact with seating positions multiplied by you that underinflation or the road. 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated overinflation is all right. It is cargo load. See Vehicle Load not. If the tires do not have Treadwear Indicators: Limits on page 9‑12. Narrow bands, sometimes called enough air (underinflation), wear bars, that show across the Vehicle Maximum Load on the you can get the following: Tire: Load on an individual tire tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm . Tire overloading and (1/16 in) of tread remains. See due to curb weight, accessory over-heating which could When It Is Time for New Tires weight, occupant weight, and lead to a blowout. on page 10 69. cargo weight. ‑ . Premature or UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Vehicle Placard: A label irregular wear. Grading Standards): A tire permanently attached to a . Poor handling. information system that provides vehicle showing the vehicle consumers with ratings for a capacity weight and the . Reduced fuel economy. tire's traction, temperature, original equipment tire size and and treadwear. recommended inflation pressure. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (61,1)

Vehicle Care 10-61

If the tires have too much air example of the Tire and Loading Check the tire's inflation (overinflation), you can get the Information label, see Vehicle pressure when the tires are cold. following: Load Limits on page 9‑12. Cold means the vehicle has How you load the vehicle affects been sitting for at least three . Unusual wear. vehicle handling and ride hours or driven no more than . Poor handling. comfort. Never load the vehicle 1.6 km (1 mile). . Rough ride. with more weight than it was Remove the valve cap from the designed to carry. . Needless damage from tire valve stem. Press the tire road hazards. When to Check gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. Check the tires once a month A vehicle-specific Tire and If the cold tire inflation pressure or more. Loading Information label is matches the recommended attached to the vehicle. This Do not forget to check the pressure on the Tire and label shows the vehicle's original pressure of the spare tire, if the Loading Information label, no equipment tires and the correct vehicle has one. See Full-Size further adjustment is necessary. inflation pressures for the tires Spare Tire on page 10‑88 for If the pressure is low, add air when they are cold. The additional information. until you reach the recommended cold tire inflation recommended amount. pressure, shown on the label, is How to Check the minimum amount of air Use a good quality pocket-type If you overfill the tire, release air pressure needed to support the gauge to check tire pressure. by pushing on the metal stem in vehicle's maximum load-carrying You cannot tell if the tires are the center of the tire valve. capacity. properly inflated simply by Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge. For additional information looking at them. Radial tires may regarding how much weight the look properly inflated even when vehicle can carry, and an they are under-inflated. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (62,1)

10-62 Vehicle Care

Be sure to put the valve caps As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been back on the valve stems. They vehicle has been equipped with a equipped with a TPMS malfunction help prevent leaks by keeping tire pressure monitoring system indicator to indicate when the out dirt and moisture. (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire system is not operating properly. pressure telltale when one or The TPMS malfunction indicator is Tire Pressure Monitor more of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure under‐inflated. telltale. When the system detects a System Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for The Tire Pressure Monitor System pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then (TPMS) uses radio and sensor should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated. technology to check tire pressure soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon levels. The TPMS sensors monitor to the proper pressure. Driving on a subsequent vehicle start‐ups as long as the malfunction exists. the air pressure in your tires and significantly under‐inflated tire transmit tire pressure readings to a causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is receiver located in the vehicle. lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation illuminated, the system may not be Each tire, including the spare also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire (if provided), should be checked tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS monthly when cold and inflated to vehicle's handling and malfunctions may occur for a variety the inflation pressure recommended stopping ability. of reasons, including the installation by the vehicle manufacturer on Please note that the TPMS is of replacement or alternate tires or the vehicle placard or tire inflation not a substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent pressure label. (If your vehicle has maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly. tires of a different size than the size responsibility to maintain correct tire indicated on the vehicle placard or pressure, even if under‐inflation has tire inflation pressure label, you not reached the level to trigger should determine the proper tire illumination of the TPMS low tire inflation pressure for those tires.) pressure telltale. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (63,1)

Vehicle Care 10-63

Always check the TPMS malfunction Tire Pressure Monitor inflate the tires to the recommended telltale after replacing one or more pressure shown on the Tire and tires or wheels on your vehicle to Operation Loading Information label. See ensure that the replacement or This vehicle may have a Tire Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12. alternate tires and wheels allow Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). At the same time, a message to the TPMS to continue to function The TPMS is designed to warn the check the pressure in a specific tire properly. driver when a low tire pressure appears on the Driver Information See Tire Pressure Monitor condition exists. TPMS sensors are Center (DIC) display. The low tire mounted onto each tire and wheel Operation on page 10‑63 for pressure warning light and the DIC additional information. assembly, excluding the spare tire warning message come on at each and wheel assembly. The TPMS ignition cycle until the tires are Federal Communications sensors monitor the air pressure in inflated to the correct inflation Commission (FCC) and the vehicle's tires and transmit the pressure. Using the DIC, tire Industry Canada tire pressure readings to a receiver pressure levels can be viewed by located in the vehicle. See Radio Frequency Statement on the driver. For additional information page 13‑19 for information and details about the DIC operation regarding Part 15 of the Federal and displays, see Driver Information Communications Commission (FCC) Center (DIC) on page 5‑28 and Tire rules and Industry Canada Messages on page 5‑40. Standards RSS-210/220/310. The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then When a low tire pressure condition turn off as you start to drive. This is detected, the TPMS illuminates could be an early indicator that the the low tire pressure warning light air pressure in the tire(s) is getting located on the instrument panel low and needs to be inflated to the cluster. If the warning light comes proper pressure. on, stop as soon as possible and Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (64,1)

10-64 Vehicle Care

A Tire and Loading Information Always use only the GM approved message should go off once you label, attached to the vehicle, shows tire sealant available through re‐install the road tire containing the size of the vehicle's original your dealer or included in the TPMS sensor. equipment tires and the correct the vehicle. . The TPMS sensor matching inflation pressure for the vehicle's process was started but not tires when they are cold. See TPMS Malfunction Light and Message completed or not completed Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12, successfully after rotating the for an example of the Tire and The TPMS will not function properly vehicle's tires. The DIC message Loading Information label and its if one or more of the TPMS sensors and TPMS malfunction light location on the vehicle. Also see are missing or inoperable. When the should go off once the TPMS Tire Pressure on page 10‑60. system detects a malfunction, the sensor matching process is The vehicle's TPMS can warn you low tire pressure warning light performed successfully. about a low tire pressure condition flashes for about one minute and See “TPMS Sensor Matching but it does not replace normal tire then stays on for the remainder of Process” later in this section. maintenance. See Tire Inspection the ignition cycle. A DIC warning . One or more TPMS sensors are on page 10‑66, Tire Rotation on message is also displayed. The low tire pressure warning light and DIC missing or damaged. The DIC page 10‑67, and Tires on message and the TPMS page 10‑52. warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is malfunction light should go off Notice: Tire sealant materials are corrected. Some of the conditions when the TPMS sensors are not all the same. A non-approved that can cause the malfunction light installed and the sensor tire sealant could damage the Tire and DIC message to come on are: matching process is performed Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) successfully. See your dealer sensors. TPMS sensor damage . One of the road tires has been for service. caused by using an incorrect tire replaced with the spare tire. sealant is not covered by the The spare tire does not have a vehicle warranty. TPMS sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (65,1)

Vehicle Care 10-65

. Replacement tires or wheels do TPMS Sensor Matching You have two minutes to match not match the vehicle's original Process the first tire/wheel position, and equipment tires or wheels. Tires five minutes overall to match all four and wheels other than those Each TPMS sensor has a unique tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer recommended for the vehicle identification code. Any time you than two minutes to match the first could prevent the TPMS from rotate the vehicle's tires or replace tire and wheel, or more than functioning properly. See Buying one or more of the TPMS sensors, five minutes to match all four tire New Tires on page 10‑70. the identification codes will need to and wheel positions, the matching be matched to the new tire/wheel . Operating electronic devices or process stops and you need position. The sensors are matched to start over. being near facilities using radio to the tire/wheel positions in the wave frequencies similar to the following order: driver side front tire, The TPMS sensor matching process TPMS could cause the TPMS passenger side front tire, passenger is outlined below: sensors to malfunction. side rear tire, and driver side rear 1. Set the parking brake. If the TPMS is not functioning it tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. cannot detect or signal a low tire See your dealer for service. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the engine off. condition. See your dealer for The TPMS sensors can also be service if the TPMS malfunction matched to each tire/wheel position 3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry " light and DIC message come on by increasing or decreasing the (RKE) transmitter's Q and and stay on. tire's air pressure. If increasing the buttons at the same time for tire's air pressure, do not exceed approximately five seconds. The the maximum inflation pressure horn sounds twice to signal the indicated on the tire's sidewall. receiver is in relearn mode and the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE To decrease air pressure out of a message displays on the tire you can use the pointed end of DIC screen. the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure gauge, or a key. 4. Start with the driver side front tire. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (66,1)

10-66 Vehicle Care

5. Remove the valve cap from the 8. Proceed to the driver side rear Tire Inspection valve cap stem. Activate the tire, and repeat the procedure in TPMS sensor by increasing or Step 5. The horn sounds two We recommend that you decreasing the tire's air pressure times to indicate the sensor regularly inspect the vehicle's for five seconds, or until a horn identification code has been tires, including the spare tire, chirp sounds. The horn chirp, matched to the driver side rear if the vehicle has one, for signs which may take up to tire, and the TPMS sensor of wear or damage at least 30 seconds to sound, confirms matching process is no once a month. that the sensor identification longer active. The TIRE code has been matched to this LEARNING ACTIVE message Always remove the tires if any of tire and wheel position. on the DIC display screen the following statements 6. Proceed to the passenger side goes off. are true: front tire, and repeat the 9. Turn the ignition switch to . You can see the indicators at procedure in Step 5. LOCK/OFF. three or more places around 7. Proceed to the passenger side 10. Set all four tires to the the tire. rear tire, and repeat the recommended air pressure . You can see cord or fabric procedure in Step 5. level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. showing through the tire's rubber. 11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems. . The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (67,1)

Vehicle Care 10-67

. The tire has a bump, bulge, See When It Is Time for New After the tires have been or split. Tires on page 10‑69 and Wheel rotated, adjust the front and rear . The tire has a puncture, cut, Replacement on page 10‑74. inflation pressures as shown on or other damage that cannot the Tire and Loading Information be repaired well because of label. See Tire Pressure on the size or location of the page 10‑60 and Vehicle Load damage. Limits on page 9‑12. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor Tire Rotation System. See Tire Pressure Tires should be rotated every Monitor Operation on 12 000 km (7,500 miles). page 10‑63. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 11‑3. The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a uniform When rotating the vehicle's tires, wear for all tires on the vehicle. always use the correct rotation This will ensure that the vehicle pattern shown here. continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new. The compact spare tire, if the vehicle has one, is not included Any time you notice unusual in the tire rotation. wear, rotate the tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (68,1)

10-68 Vehicle Care

Make certain that all wheel nuts Lightly coat the center of the The outer tire on a dual wheel setup are properly tightened. See wheel hub with wheel bearing generally wears faster than the “Wheel Nut Torque” under grease after a wheel change or inner tire. Your tires will wear more Capacities and Specifications on tire rotation to prevent corrosion evenly and last longer if you rotate page 12 2. or rust build-up. Do not get the tires periodically. See Tire ‑ Inspection on page 10 66 and Tire grease on the flat wheel ‑ Rotation on page 10‑67. Also see { WARNING mounting surface or on the Scheduled Maintenance on wheel nuts or bolts. page 11‑3. Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can Dual Tire Rotation make wheel nuts become loose { WARNING after time. The wheel could come When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, If you operate your vehicle with a off and cause an accident. When tire that is badly underinflated, the changing a wheel, remove any wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut torque after tire can overheat. An overheated rust or dirt from places where the 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles tire can lose air suddenly or catch wheel attaches to the vehicle. (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) of fire. You or others could be In an emergency, use a cloth or a driving. For proper wheel nut injured. Be sure all tires (including paper towel to do this; but be sure tightening information, see the spare) are properly inflated. to use a scraper or wire brush “Removing the Flat Tire and later, if needed, to get all the rust Installing the Spare Tire later in this ” See Tires on page 10 52 and Tire or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat section, under If a Tire Goes Flat on ‑ Pressure on page 10 60 for more on page 10‑76. page 10 76. Also see Wheel Nut ‑ ‑ “ information on proper tire inflation. Torque” under Capacities and Specifications on page 12‑2. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (69,1)

Vehicle Care 10-69

When It Is Time for Some commercial truck tires, Vehicle Storage including Goodyear LT225/75R16 Tires age when stored normally New Tires G949 RSA and Goodyear LT225/ mounted on a parked vehicle. Various factors, such as 75R16 G933 RSD, may not have Park a vehicle that will be stored for maintenance, temperatures, driving treadwear indicators. If the tires do at least a month in a cool, dry, clean speeds, vehicle loading, and road not have treadwear indicators, area away from direct sunlight to conditions, influence when you replace the tires when the tread slow aging. This area should be need new tires. depth is down to 3.2 mm (1/8 in) for free of grease, gasoline or other the front tires, or 1.6 mm (1/16 in) for substances that can deteriorate the rear tires. See Tire Inspection rubber. on page 10‑66 and Tire Rotation on page 10‑67 for additional Parking for an extended period can information. cause flat spots on the tires that may result in vibrations while The rubber in tires ages over time. driving. When storing a vehicle for This is also true for the spare tire, at least a month, remove the tires or if the vehicle has one, even if it is raise the vehicle to reduce the not being used. Multiple conditions weight from the tires. affect how fast this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. Tires will One way to tell when it is time for typically need to be replaced due to new tires is to check the treadwear wear before they may need to be indicators, which appear when your replaced due to age. Consult the tire tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) or manufacturer for more information less of tread remaining. on when tires should be replaced. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (70,1)

10-70 Vehicle Care

Buying New Tires If the tires have an all‐season tread design, the TPC spec number will WARNING (Continued) GM has developed and matched be followed by an MS for mud and specific tires for the vehicle. The snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on Only your dealer or an authorized original equipment tires installed on page 10‑54 for additional tire service center should mount the vehicle, when it was new, were information. and dismount the tires. designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria GM recommends replacing tires in Specification (TPC Spec) system sets of four. This is because uniform rating. If you need replacement tread depth on all tires will help { WARNING tires, GM strongly recommends that keep the vehicle performing most you get tires with the same TPC like it did when the tires were new. Mixing tires could cause you Spec rating. This way, the vehicle Replacing less than a full set of to lose control while driving. will continue to have tires that are tires can affect the braking and If you mix tires of different sizes, designed to give the same handling performance of the vehicle. brands, or types (radial and performance and vehicle safety, See Tire Inspection on page 10‑66 bias-belted tires), the vehicle during normal use, as the and Tire Rotation on page 10‑67 for might not handle properly, and information on proper tire rotation. original tires. you could have a crash. Using GM's exclusive TPC Spec system { tires of different sizes, brands, considers over a dozen critical WARNING or types could also cause damage to the vehicle. Be sure to specifications that impact the Tires could explode during use the same size, brand, and overall performance of the improper service. You or others vehicle, including brake system type of tires on all wheels. could be injured or killed if you performance, ride and handling, attempt to mount or dismount (Continued) traction control, and tire pressure monitoring performance. GM's TPC a tire. Spec number is molded onto the (Continued) tire's sidewall near the tire size. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (71,1)

Vehicle Care 10-71

The vehicle's original equipment WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information label. See This vehicle may have a different A tire and/or wheel could fail Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12 size spare than the road tires suddenly, causing a crash. for more information about the Tire (those originally installed on the Use only radial-ply tires with and Loading Information label and its location on the vehicle. vehicle). When new, the vehicle the wheels on the vehicle. included a spare tire and wheel Different Size Tires and assembly with a similar overall If you must replace the vehicle's diameter as the vehicle's road tires with those that do not have a Wheels tires and wheels, so it is all right TPC Spec number, make sure they If you add wheels or tires that to drive on it. Because this spare are the same size, load range, are a different size than the original was developed for use on speed rating, and construction type equipment wheels and tires, this the vehicle, it will not affect (radial and bias‐belted tires) as the could affect the way the vehicle vehicle handling. vehicle's original tires. performs, including its braking, Vehicles that have a tire pressure ride and handling characteristics, monitoring system may give an stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if the vehicle has { WARNING inaccurate low‐pressure warning if non‐TPC Spec-rated tires electronic systems such as antilock are installed on the vehicle. brakes, rollover airbags, traction If you use bias-ply tires on the control, and electronic stability vehicle, the wheel rim flanges Non‐TPC Spec-rated tires may give a low‐pressure warning that control, the performance of these could develop cracks after is higher or lower than the proper systems can be affected. many miles of driving. warning level you would get with (Continued) TPC Spec-rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 10‑62. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (72,1)

10-72 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire Quality The Uniform Tire Quality { WARNING Grading Grading (UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, If you add different sized wheels, Quality grades can be found the vehicle may not provide winter-type snow tires, where applicable on the tire an acceptable level of space-saver, or temporary use performance and safety if tires sidewall between tread shoulder spare tires, tires with nominal not recommended for those and maximum section width. rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches wheels are selected. You may For example: (25 to 30 cm), or to some increase the chance that you will Treadwear 200 Traction AA limited-production tires. crash and suffer serious injury. Temperature A While the tires available on Only use GM specific wheel and General Motors passenger cars tire systems developed for the The following information relates and light trucks may vary with vehicle, and have them properly to the system developed by the installed by a GM certified United States National Highway respect to these grades, they technician. Traffic Safety Administration must also conform to federal (NHTSA), which grades tires safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire See Buying New Tires on by treadwear, traction, and temperature performance. This Performance Criteria (TPC) page 10‑70 and Accessories and standards. Modifications on page 10‑3 for applies only to vehicles sold in additional information. the United States. The grades All Passenger Car Tires Must are molded on the sidewalls of Conform to Federal Safety most passenger car tires. Requirements In Addition To These Grades. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (73,1)

Vehicle Care 10-73

Treadwear Traction – AA, A, B, C tested under controlled The treadwear grade is a The traction grades, from conditions on a specified indoor comparative rating based on the highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, laboratory test wheel. Sustained wear rate of the tire when tested and C. Those grades represent high temperature can cause the under controlled conditions on a the tire's ability to stop on wet material of the tire to degenerate specified government test pavement as measured under and reduce tire life, and course. For example, a tire controlled conditions on excessive temperature can lead graded 150 would wear one and specified government test to sudden tire failure. The grade a half (1½) times as well on the surfaces of asphalt and C corresponds to a level of government course as a tire concrete. A tire marked C may performance which all graded 100. The relative have poor traction performance. passenger car tires must meet performance of tires depends Warning: The traction grade under the Federal Motor Safety upon the actual conditions of assigned to this tire is based on Standard No. 109. Grades B and their use, however, and may straight-ahead braking traction A represent higher levels of depart significantly from the tests, and does not include performance on the laboratory norm due to variations in acceleration, cornering, test wheel than the minimum driving habits, service practices hydroplaning, or peak traction required by law. Warning: The and differences in road characteristics. temperature grade for this tire is characteristics and climate. established for a tire that is Temperature – A, B, C properly inflated and not The temperature grades are overloaded. Excessive speed, A (the highest), B, and C, underinflation, or excessive representing the tire's resistance loading, either separately or in to the generation of heat and its combination, can cause heat ability to dissipate heat when buildup and possible tire failure. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (74,1)

10-74 Vehicle Care

Wheel Alignment and Tire which can sometimes be repaired. See your dealer if any of these WARNING (Continued) Balance conditions exist. The tires and wheels on the vehicle dangerous. It could affect the Your dealer will know the kind of braking and handling of the were aligned and balanced carefully wheel you need. at the factory to give the longest tire vehicle, make the tires lose air life and best overall performance. Each new wheel should have the and make you lose control. You Adjustments to wheel alignment and same load-carrying capacity, could have a collision in which tire balancing will not be necessary diameter, width, offset, and be you or others could be injured. on a regular basis. However, if there mounted the same way as the Always use the correct wheel, is unusual tire wear or the vehicle one it replaces. wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for pulls to one side or the other, the If you need to replace any of the replacement. alignment should be checked. If the wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, vehicle vibrates when driving on a or Tire Pressure Monitor System Notice: The wrong wheel can smooth road, the tires and wheels (TPMS) sensors, replace them only also cause problems with bearing might need to be rebalanced. See with new GM original equipment life, brake cooling, speedometer your dealer for proper diagnosis. parts. This way, you will be sure to or odometer calibration, have the right wheel, wheel bolts, headlamp aim, bumper height, Wheel Replacement wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for vehicle ground clearance, and tire Replace any wheel that is bent, the vehicle. or tire chain clearance to the cracked, or badly rusted or body and chassis. corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming { WARNING See If a Tire Goes Flat on loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and page 10‑76 for more information. wheel nuts should be replaced. Using the wrong replacement If the wheel leaks air, replace it, wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel except some aluminum wheels, nuts on the vehicle can be (Continued) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (75,1)

Vehicle Care 10-75

Used Replacement Wheels For Cutaway models with WARNING (Continued) LT245/75R16, LT225/75R16 or { WARNING LT215/85R16 size single or dual crash. To help avoid damage to rear tires, use Low Profile Z-Chain the vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, Putting a used wheel on the or SAE Class S cables. or remove the device if it is vehicle is dangerous. You cannot contacting the vehicle. Do not For Cargo or Passenger models know how it has been used or spin the vehicle's tires. Follow the with P245/70R17, LT225/75R16 or how far it has been driven. manufacturer's instructions. LT245/75R16 size tires, use It could fail suddenly and cause a Low Profile Z-Chain cables. crash. If you have to replace a SAE Class S chains are not wheel, use a new GM original Notice: Use tire chains only recommended. where legal and only when you equipment wheel. If the vehicle has dual rear tires, must. Use chains that are the do not use individual tire chains. proper size for the tires. Install Use tire chains that fit across Tire Chains them on the tires of the rear axle. both dual tires. Do not use chains on the tires of { WARNING the front axle. Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends Tire chains used on a vehicle securely fastened. Drive slowly without the proper amount of and follow the chain clearance can cause damage to manufacturer's instructions. the brakes, suspension, or other If you can hear the chains vehicle parts. The area damaged contacting the vehicle, stop and by the tire chains could cause you retighten them. If the contact to lose control of the vehicle and continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or you or others may be injured in a spinning the wheels with chains (Continued) on will damage the vehicle. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (76,1)

10-76 Vehicle Care

If a Tire Goes Flat It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a { WARNING It is unusual for a tire to blowout stop, well off the road, if possible. while you are driving, especially if Lifting a vehicle and getting you maintain the vehicle's tires { under it to do maintenance or properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is WARNING repairs is dangerous without the much more likely to leak out slowly. Driving on a flat tire will cause appropriate safety equipment and But if you should ever have a permanent damage to the tire. training. If a jack is provided with blowout, here are a few tips about Re-inflating a tire after it has the vehicle, it is designed only for what to expect and what to do: been driven on while severely changing a flat tire. If it is used for If a front tire fails, the flat tire underinflated or flat may cause a anything else, you or others could creates a drag that pulls the vehicle blowout and a serious crash. be badly injured or killed if the toward that side. Take your foot off Never attempt to re-inflate a tire vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack the accelerator pedal and grip the that has been driven on while is provided with the vehicle, only steering wheel firmly. Steer to severely underinflated or flat. use it for changing a flat tire. maintain lane position, and then Have your dealer or an authorized gently brake to a stop, well off tire service center repair or If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire the road, if possible. replace the flat tire as soon and wheel damage by driving slowly A rear blowout, particularly on a as possible. to a level place, well off the road, curve, acts much like a skid and if possible. Turn on the hazard may require the same correction warning flashers. See Hazard you would use in a skid. In any rear Warning Flashers on page 6‑4. blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (77,1)

Vehicle Care 10-77

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), { WARNING WARNING (Continued) use the following example as a guide to assist in the placement of Changing a tire can be wheel blocks (A). dangerous. The vehicle can 3. Turn off the engine and do slip off the jack and roll over or not restart while the vehicle fall on you or other people. is raised. You and they could be badly 4. Do not allow passengers to injured or even killed. Find a level remain in the vehicle. place to change the tire. To help To be certain the vehicle will not prevent the vehicle from moving: move, put blocks at the front and 1. Set the parking brake firmly. rear of the tire farthest away from 2. Put an automatic the one being changed. That transmission shift lever in would be the tire on the other P (Park), or shift a manual side, at the opposite end of transmission to 1 (First) or the vehicle. R (Reverse). A. Wheel Block (Continued) B. Flat Tire The following information explains how to repair or change a tire. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (78,1)

10-78 Vehicle Care

Tire Changing If you have a van with the 15‐passenger seating arrangement, Removing the Spare Tire and the equipment you will need is Tools secured on the rear floor of the passenger side of the vehicle. If you have a cargo van or a passenger van, the equipment you will need is located in the passenger side rear corner of the vehicle.

The tools you will be using include: A. Jack B. Jack Handle C. Hoist Extension To access the equipment, remove D. Jack Handle Extension the retaining wing bolt and lift it out E. Wheel Wrench of the mounting bracket. The spare tire is mounted in the Remove the retaining wing bolt and rear underbody of the vehicle. lift it off of the mounting bracket. You will use the hoist extension, the jack handle extensions and the wheel wrench to remove the underbody‐mounted spare tire. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (79,1)

Vehicle Care 10-79

To lower the spare tire from 3. Turn the wheel wrench the vehicle: counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under 1. Assemble the wheel wrench (G) the vehicle. to one or two of the jack handle If the spare tire does not lower to and the hoist extensions (F). the ground, the secondary latch Insert the hoist extension end is engaged causing the tire not through the hole in the rear to lower. See Secondary Latch bumper. System on page 10‑86. 2. Be sure the hoist extension end connects to the hoist shaft (E). A. Spare Tire The chiseled end of the extension is used to B. Tire/Wheel Retainer lower the spare tire. C. Hoist Cable D. Hoist Assembly E. Hoist Shaft F. Jack Handle and Hoist Extensions G. Wheel Wrench Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (80,1)

10-80 Vehicle Care

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire If the vehicle has plastic wheel nut caps, loosen them by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. The wheel nut caps are designed to remain with the center cap. Remove the center cap. If the wheel has a smooth center piece, place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry it out. 4. When the tire has been lowered, Front Flat: Assemble the pull the tire toward you so you 1. Do a safety check before jack (A) together with the jack can reach the tire retainer and proceeding. See If a Tire Goes handle (B), one or two jack pull it up through the wheel Flat on page 10‑76 for more handle extensions (D) and the opening. information. wheel wrench (E). If you have a vehicle which 2. Loosen all the wheel nuts with Rear Flat: Assemble the jack (A) was completed from a cab and the wheel wrench. Do not together with the jack handle (B), chassis, refer to the information remove them yet. two jack handle extensions (D), from body supplier/installer. 3. Assemble the jack and tools: and the wheel wrench (E). The spare tire is a full‐size tire, like the other tires on the vehicle. 5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (81,1)

Vehicle Care 10-81

4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown. The front position jacking point is on the frame. The rear position jacking point is on the rear axle. If the exhaust system interferes in the jack location in the rear axle, such as in Diesel vehicles, place the jack (A) on the rear axle between the axle housing and the shock absorber bracket in order to avoid Front Position Rear Position any interference with the exhaust pipe (B).

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

Front Position Rear Alternative Position (Diesel Vehicles) Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (82,1)

10-82 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Raising the vehicle with the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In jack improperly positioned can an emergency, use a cloth or a damage the vehicle and even paper towel to do this; but be sure make the vehicle fall. To help to use a scraper or wire brush avoid personal injury and vehicle later, if needed, to get all the rust damage, be sure to fit the jack lift or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat head into the proper location on page 10‑76. before raising the vehicle.

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the 6. Remove all the wheel nuts. wheel wrench clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the 7. Take flat tire off of the mounting ground so there is enough room surface. for the spare tire to fit. { WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any 8. Remove any rust or dirt from the rust or dirt from places where the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces (Continued) and spare wheel. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (83,1)

Vehicle Care 10-83

10. Lower the vehicle by { WARNING turning the jack handle WARNING (Continued) counterclockwise. Never use oil or grease on bolts Lower the jack completely. If any stud is damaged because or nuts because the nuts might of a loose-running wheel, it could come loose. The vehicle's wheel { WARNING be that all of the studs are could fall off, causing a crash. damaged. To be sure, replace all Wheel nuts that are not tight can studs on the wheel. If the stud work loose. If all the nuts on a holes in a wheel have become wheel come off, the wheel can larger, the wheel could collapse in come off the vehicle, causing a operation. Replace any wheel if crash. All wheel nuts must be its stud holes have become larger properly tightened. Follow the or distorted in any way. Inspect rules in this section to be sure hubs and hub‐piloted wheels for they are. damage. Because of loose running wheels, piloting pad damage may occur and require { replacement of the entire hub, for WARNING proper centering of the wheels. If wheel studs are damaged, they When replacing studs, hubs, can break. If all the studs on a wheel nuts or wheels, be sure to 9. Put the wheel nuts back on with use GM original equipment parts. the rounded end of the nuts wheel broke, the wheel could toward the wheel. Tighten each come off and cause a crash. wheel nut by hand until the (Continued) wheel is held against the hub. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (84,1)

10-84 Vehicle Care

Notice: Improperly tightened 12. Put the wheel cover or { WARNING wheel nuts can lead to brake the center cap and plastic pulsation and rotor damage. wheel nut caps back on. Wheel nuts that are improperly or To avoid expensive brake repairs, Remove any wheel blocks. incorrectly tightened can cause evenly tighten the wheel nuts in Have a technician check the wheels to become loose or the proper sequence and to the come off. The wheel nuts should the wheel nut tightness proper torque specification. See of all wheels with a torque be tightened with a torque wrench Capacities and Specifications on to the proper torque specification wrench after the first 160 km page 12‑2 for the wheel nut (100 miles) and then 1600 km after replacing. Follow the torque torque specification. (1,000 miles) after that. Repeat specification supplied by the this service whenever you have aftermarket manufacturer when a tire removed or serviced. See using accessory locking wheel Capacities and Specifications nuts. See Capacities and on page 12‑2 for more Specifications on page 12‑2 for information. original equipment wheel nut torque specifications.

11. Use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts firmly. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise and in a crisscross sequence as shown. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (85,1)

Vehicle Care 10-85

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire secure and the cable is tight. and Tools The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened. { WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. 2. Pull the retaining bar through the center of the wheel, making sure 1. Put the tire on the ground at the it is properly attached. rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down. 3. Pull the wheel toward the rear of the vehicle, keeping 6. Make sure the tire is stored the cable tight. securely. Push, pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire 4. Put the chisel end of the hoist moves, use the wheel wrench to extension on an angle through tighten the cable. the hole in the rear door frame, above the bumper. You will hear two clicks when the tire is up all the way. 5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle. 7. Return the jacking equipment to Continue turning the wheel the proper location. Secure the wrench until the tire is items and replace the jack cover. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (86,1)

10-86 Vehicle Care

Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the 1. Check under the vehicle to see if secondary latch: the cable end is visible. This vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist { assembly equipped with a WARNING secondary latch system. It is Someone standing too close designed to stop the spare tire from during the procedure could be suddenly falling off the vehicle if the injured by the jack. If the spare cable holding the spare tire is tire does not slide off the jack damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire must be stowed completely, make sure no one is with the valve stem pointing down. behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire under the spare. and Tools” under Tire Changing on page 10‑78 for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly. If the cable is not visible, start this procedure at Step 6. { WARNING 2. Turn the hoist extension Before beginning this procedure counterclockwise until read all the instructions. Failure to approximately 15 cm (6 in) of read and follow the instructions cable is exposed. could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the instructions listed next. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (87,1)

Vehicle Care 10-87

spare tire and turn the handle Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it counterclockwise to lower the lifts the secondary latch spring. spare the rest of the way. 5. Keep raising the jack until the 8. Tilt the retainer at the end of the spare tire stops moving upward cable and pull it through the and is held firmly in place. This wheel opening. Pull the tire out 3. Attach the jack handle/jack lets you know that the secondary from under the vehicle. handle extension and wheel latch has released. The spare Notice: If you drive away before wrench to the jack. tire is now balancing on the jack. the spare tire or secondary 6. Lower the jack by turning the latch system cable has been wheel wrench counterclockwise. reinstalled, you could damage the Keep lowering the jack until the vehicle. Always reinstall this spare tire slides off the jack or is cable before driving the vehicle. hanging by the cable. 9. If the cable is hanging under the 7. Disconnect the jack handle from vehicle, turn the wheel wrench in the jack and carefully remove the hoist shaft hole in the the jack. Use one hand to push bumper clockwise to raise the against the spare while firmly cable back up. pulling the jack out from under Have the hoist assembly inspected the spare tire with the as soon as you can. You will not be other hand. able to store a spare or flat tire If the spare tire is hanging from using the hoist assembly until it has 4. Place the jack under the vehicle, the cable, assembly the wheel been repaired or replaced. ahead of the rear bumper. wrench onto the hoist extension Position the center lift point of and insert the chisel end of the the jack under the center of the hoist extension into the hoist shaft hole above the bumper. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (88,1)

10-88 Vehicle Care

To continue changing the flat tire, After installing the spare tire on the Jump Starting return to Step 4 of “Storing a Flat or vehicle, you should stop as soon as Spare Tire and Tools” under Tire possible and make sure the spare is For more information about the Changing on page 10‑78. correctly inflated. The spare tire is vehicle battery, see Battery on made to perform well at speeds up page 10‑32. Full-Size Spare Tire to 112 km/h (70 mph) at the If the vehicle battery has run down, recommended inflation pressure, you may want to use another This vehicle, when new, may so you can finish your trip. have had a fully-inflated spare tire. vehicle and some jumper cables to A spare tire may lose air over time, Have the damaged or flat road tire start your vehicle. Be sure to use so check its inflation pressure repaired or replaced as soon as you the following steps to do it safely. regularly. See Tire Pressure on can and installed back onto the page 10‑60 and Vehicle Load Limits vehicle. This way, a spare tire will { WARNING on page 9‑12 for information be available in case you need it regarding proper tire inflation and again. Do not mix tires and wheels Batteries can hurt you. They can loading the vehicle. For instruction of different sizes, because they will be dangerous because: not fit. Keep the spare tire and its on how to remove, install or store a . They contain acid that can wheel together. spare tire, see “Removing the Flat burn you. Tire and Installing the Spare Tire” and “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire . They contain gas that can and Tools” under Tire Changing on explode or ignite. page 10‑78. . They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (89,1)

Vehicle Care 10-89

Notice: Ignoring these steps 2. Get the vehicles close enough Notice: If the radio or other could result in costly damage to so the jumper cables can reach, accessories are left on during the the vehicle that would not be but be sure the vehicles are not jump starting procedure, they covered by the warranty. touching each other. If they could be damaged. The repairs Trying to start the vehicle by are, it could cause a ground would not be covered by the pushing or pulling it will not connection you do not want. warranty. Always turn off the work, and it could damage You would not be able to start radio and other accessories when the vehicle. your vehicle, and the bad jump starting the vehicle. grounding could damage the 3. Turn off the ignition on both 1. Check the other vehicle. It must electrical systems. have a 12-volt battery with a vehicles. Unplug unnecessary negative ground system. To avoid the possibility of the accessories plugged into the vehicles rolling, set the parking cigarette lighter or the accessory Notice: Only use a vehicle that brake firmly on both vehicles power outlet. Turn off the radio has a 12-volt system with a involved in the jump start and all lamps that are not negative ground for jump procedure. Put an automatic needed. This will avoid sparks starting. If the other vehicle does transmission in P (Park) or a and help save both batteries. not have a 12-volt system with a manual transmission in And it could save the radio! negative ground, both vehicles N (Neutral) before setting can be damaged. the parking brake. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (90,1)

10-90 Vehicle Care

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) terminal if the vehicle positive (+) and negative (−) WARNING (Continued) has one. Negative (−) will go to terminal locations of the an unpainted metal part or to a other vehicle. Battery fluid contains acid that remote negative (−) terminal if can burn you. Do not get it on On your van, use the unpainted the vehicle has one. On your you. If you accidentally get it in van, use the unpainted radio radio antenna bracket as a your eyes or on your skin, flush remote negative (−) terminal. antenna bracket as a remote the place with water and get negative (−) terminal. medical help immediately. { WARNING Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you will get a Using an open flame near a short that would damage the battery can cause battery gas to { WARNING battery and maybe other parts explode. People have been hurt too. And do not connect the doing this, and some have been Fans or other moving engine negative (−) cable to the blinded. Use a flashlight if you parts can injure you badly. Keep negative (−) terminal on the need more light. your hands away from moving dead battery because this can parts once the engine is running. cause sparks. Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not need to add water to the battery installed in 5. Check that the jumper cables do your new vehicle. But if a battery not have loose or missing has filler caps, be sure the right insulation. If they do, you could amount of fluid is there. If it is low, get a shock. The vehicles could add water to take care of that be damaged too. first. If you do not, explosive gas Before you connect the cables, could be present. here are some basic things you (Continued) should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a remote Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (91,1)

Vehicle Care 10-91

Do not let the other end touch the vehicle with the dead battery. anything until the next step. The On your van, use the unpainted other end of the negative (−) radio antenna bracket as a cable does not go to the dead remote negative (−) terminal. battery. It goes to a heavy, Notice: Your vehicle uses the unpainted metal engine part or unpainted radio antenna bracket to a remote negative (−) terminal as a remote negative (−) terminal. on the vehicle with the dead Move the antenna coax cable out battery. On your van, use the of the way before clamping the unpainted radio antenna bracket negative jumper cable to the fixed as a remote negative (−) antenna bracket. Avoid touching terminal. the negative cable clamp to the 6. Connect the red positive (+) air conditioning line. Failure to do cable to the positive (+) terminal either of these could damage of the dead battery. Use a your vehicle. The repairs would remote positive (+) terminal if the not be covered by the warranty. vehicle has one. Do not let the 9. Now start the vehicle with the other end touch metal. Connect good battery and run the engine it to the positive (+) terminal of for a while. the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the 10. Try to start the vehicle that had vehicle has one. the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it 7. Now connect the black probably needs service. negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote 8. Connect the other end of negative (−) terminal if the the negative (−) cable to the vehicle has one. negative (−) terminal location on Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (92,1)

10-92 Vehicle Care

Notice: If the jumper cables are To disconnect the jumper cables connected or removed in the from both vehicles, do the following: wrong order, electrical shorting 1. Disconnect the black may occur and damage the negative (−) cable from vehicle. The repairs would not be the vehicle that had the covered by the vehicle warranty. dead battery. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct 2. Disconnect the black order, making sure that the negative (−) cable from the cables do not touch each vehicle with the good battery. other or other metal. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the Jumper Cable Removal good battery. A. Unpainted Metal Part or 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) Remote Negative (−) Terminal cable from the other vehicle. B. Good Battery or 5. Return the remote positive (+) Remote Positive (+) and terminal cover to its original Remote Negative (−) Terminals position. C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (93,1)

Vehicle Care 10-93

Recreational Vehicle . What is the distance that will be Towing travelled? Some vehicles have Towing restrictions on how far and how Towing the Vehicle Recreational vehicle towing means long they can tow. Notice: To avoid damage, the towing the vehicle behind another . Is the proper towing equipment disabled vehicle should be vehicle – such as behind a motor going to be used? See your towed with all four wheels off the home. The two most common types dealer or trailering professional ground. Care must be taken with of recreational vehicle towing are for additional advice and vehicles that have low ground known as dinghy towing and dolly equipment recommendations. clearance and/or special towing. Dinghy towing is towing the . Is the vehicle ready to be equipment. Always flatbed vehicle with all four wheels on the towed? Just as preparing the on a car carrier. ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the vehicle for a long trip, make Consult your dealer or a ground and two wheels up on a sure the vehicle is prepared to professional towing service if the device known as a dolly. be towed. disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Assistance Program Here are some important things to (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or consider before recreational Roadside Assistance Program vehicle towing: (Mexico) on page 13‑10. . What is the towing capacity To tow the vehicle behind another of the towing vehicle? vehicle for recreational purposes, Be sure to read the tow such as behind a motor home, see vehicle manufacturer's “Recreational Vehicle Towing” in recommendations. this section. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (94,1)

10-94 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing Two-wheel-drive transmissions have Dolly Towing no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed. Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground) – Two‐Wheel‐Drive All‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles Vehicles The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four wheels on the ground. To properly tow these vehicles, they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground. Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of Two-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain components. Notice: If the vehicle is Do not tow an all-wheel-drive towed with all four wheels vehicle with any of its wheels on on the ground, the drivetrain the ground. Use the following procedure to components could be damaged. tow the vehicle from the rear: The repairs would not be 1. Attach the dolly to the tow covered by the vehicle warranty. vehicle following the dolly Do not tow the vehicle with all manufacturer's instructions. four wheels on the ground. 2. Drive the rear wheels onto Two-wheel-drive vehicles should the dolly. not be towed with all four wheels on the ground. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (95,1)

Vehicle Care 10-95

3. Firmly set the parking brake. Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive See Parking Brake on page 9‑34 the Ground) – All‐Wheel‐Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the for more information. Vehicles ground, or even with only two of 4. Put the transmission in P (Park). its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain components. 5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly Do not tow an all-wheel-drive following the manufacturer's vehicle with any of its wheels on instructions. the ground. 6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position. 7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for six weeks or more, remove the battery cable The vehicle was not designed from the negative terminal (post) to be towed with two wheels on of the battery to prevent the the ground. To properly tow these battery from draining while vehicles, they should be placed on towing. a platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (96,1)

10-96 Vehicle Care

Appearance Care vehicle or damage may occur and High pressure car washes may it would not be covered by the cause water to enter the vehicle. Exterior Care warranty. Avoid using high pressure washes Do not wash the vehicle in direct closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the If dirt and/or contaminants build up sunlight. Use a car washing soap. surface of the vehicle. Use of power in the glass seals, use a cloth and Do not use cleaning agents that are washers exceeding 8 274 kPa water to clean the glass seals. petroleum based or that contain (1,200 psi) can result in damage or Silicone grease on weatherstrips will acid or abrasives, as they can removal of paint and decals. make them last longer, seal better, damage the paint, metal or plastic Cleaning Exterior and not stick or squeak. Apply on the vehicle. Approved cleaning Lamps/Lenses silicone grease with a clean cloth. products can be obtained from your During very cold, damp weather dealer. Follow all manufacturers' Use only lukewarm or cold water, a frequent application may be directions regarding correct soft cloth and a car washing soap to required. See Recommended Fluids product usage, necessary safety clean exterior lamps and lenses. and Lubricants on page 11‑8. precautions and appropriate Follow instructions under Washing the Vehicle. Washing the Vehicle disposal of any vehicle care “ ” product. The best way to preserve the Finish Care finish is to keep it clean by Rinse the vehicle well, before Occasional waxing or mild polishing washing it often. washing and after to remove all of the vehicle by hand may be cleaning agents completely. If they Notice: Certain cleaners contain necessary to remove residue from are allowed to dry on the surface, the paint finish. Approved cleaning chemicals that can damage the they could stain. emblems or nameplates on the products can be obtained from vehicle. Check the cleaning Dry the finish with a soft, clean your dealer. product label. If it states that it chamois or an all-cotton towel to If the vehicle has a basecoat/ should not be used on plastic avoid surface scratches and clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat parts, do not use it on the water spotting. gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (97,1)

Vehicle Care 10-97

Always use waxes and polishes that To help keep the paint finish looking Wash the windshield thoroughly are non-abrasive and made for a new, keep the vehicle garaged or when cleaning the blades. Bugs, basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. covered whenever possible. road grime, sap and a buildup of Notice: Machine compounding or vehicle wash/wax treatments may Protecting Exterior Bright cause wiper streaking. Replace the aggressive polishing on a Metal Parts basecoat/clearcoat paint finish wiper blades if they are worn may damage it. Use only Bright metal parts should be or damaged. cleaned regularly to keep their non-abrasive waxes and Wipers can be damaged by: polishes that are made for a luster. Washing with water is all that . Extreme dusty conditions. basecoat/clearcoat paint finish is usually needed. However, chrome on the vehicle. polish may be used on chrome or . Sand and salt. stainless steel trim, if necessary. Foreign materials such as calcium . Heat and sun. chloride and other salts, ice melting Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging protective . Snow and ice, without proper agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, removal. bird droppings, chemicals from trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or caustic soap to industrial chimneys, etc., can Aluminum Wheels damage the vehicle's finish if they clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is Notice: Using strong soaps, remain on painted surfaces. Wash chemicals, abrasive polishes, the vehicle as soon as possible. recommended for all bright metal parts. cleaners, brushes, or cleaners If necessary, use non-abrasive that contain acid on aluminum or cleaners that are marked safe for Windshield and Wiper Blades chrome-plated wheels, could painted surfaces to remove damage the surface of the foreign matter. Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner. wheel(s). The repairs would not Exterior painted surfaces are be covered by the vehicle subject to aging, weather and Clean the rubber blades using a warranty. Use only approved chemical fallout that can take their lint free cloth or paper towel soaked cleaners on aluminum or toll over a period of years. with windshield washer fluid or a chrome-plated wheels. mild detergent. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (98,1)

10-98 Vehicle Care

Keep the wheels clean using a covered by the vehicle warranty. Original manufacturer replacement soft clean cloth with mild soap and Never drive a vehicle that has parts will provide the corrosion water. Rinse with clean water. aluminum or chrome-plated protection while maintaining the After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a wheels through an automatic car vehicle warranty. soft clean towel. A wax may then wash that uses silicone carbide be applied. tire cleaning brushes. Finish Damage Any stone chips, fractures or deep Notice: Using chrome polish on Tires aluminum wheels could damage scratches in the finish should be the wheels. The repairs would not To clean the tires, use a stiff brush repaired right away. Bare metal will be covered by the vehicle with tire cleaner. corrode quickly and may develop warranty. Use chrome polish on Notice: Using petroleum-based into major repair expense. chrome wheels only. tire dressing products on the Minor chips and scratches can be The surface of these wheels is vehicle may damage the paint repaired with touch-up materials similar to the painted surface of the finish and/or tires. When applying available from your dealer. Larger vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, a tire dressing, always wipe off areas of finish damage can be chemicals, abrasive polishes, any overspray from all painted corrected in your dealer's body and abrasive cleaners, cleaners with surfaces on the vehicle. paint shop. acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes Sheet Metal Damage Chemicals used for ice and snow on them because they could removal and dust control can collect damage the surface. Do not use If the vehicle is damaged and on the underbody. If these are not chrome polish on aluminum wheels. requires sheet metal repair or removed, corrosion and rust can replacement, make sure the body Notice: Driving the vehicle develop on the underbody parts repair shop applies anti-corrosion such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, through an automatic car wash material to parts repaired or that has silicone carbide tire and exhaust system even though replaced to restore corrosion they have corrosion protection. cleaning brushes, could damage protection. the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (99,1)

Vehicle Care 10-99

At least every spring, flush these Chemical Paint Spotting upholstery. It is important to keep materials from the underbody with the upholstery from becoming Some weather and atmospheric plain water. Clean any areas where and remaining heavily soiled. conditions can create a chemical mud and debris can collect. Dirt Soils should be removed as quickly fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall packed in close areas of the frame as possible. The interior may upon and attack painted surfaces on should be loosened before being experience extremes of heat that the vehicle. This damage can take flushed. Your dealer or an could cause stains to set rapidly. two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped underbody car washing system discolorations, and small, Lighter colored interiors may require can do this. irregular dark spots etched into more frequent cleaning. Use care Underbody Maintenance the paint surface. because newspapers and garments that transfer color to home Although no defect in the paint job Chemicals used for ice and snow furnishings may also transfer causes this, we will repair, at no removal and dust control can collect color to the interior. on the underbody. If these are not charge to the owner, the surfaces removed, corrosion and rust can of new vehicles damaged by this When cleaning the interior, develop on the underbody parts fallout condition within 12 months or only use cleaners specifically such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, 20 000 km (12,000 mi) of purchase, designed for the surfaces being and exhaust system even though whichever occurs first. cleaned. Permanent damage may they have corrosion protection. result from using cleaners on Interior Care surfaces for which they were not At least every spring, flush these intended. Use glass cleaner only on materials from the underbody with The interior will continue to look its glass. Remove any accidental plain water. Clean any areas where best if it is cleaned often. Although over-spray from other surfaces mud and debris can collect. Dirt not always visible, dust and dirt can immediately. To prevent over-spray, packed in close areas of the frame accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt apply cleaner directly to the should be loosened before being can damage carpet, fabric, leather, cleaning cloth. flushed. Your dealer or an and plastic surfaces. Regular underbody car washing system vacuuming is recommended to can do this. remove particles from the Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (100,1)

10-100 Vehicle Care

Notice: Using abrasive cleaners Do not clean the vehicle using: Fabric/Carpet when cleaning glass surfaces on . A knife or any other sharp object Use a vacuum cleaner with a the vehicle, could scratch the to remove a soil from any interior soft brush attachment frequently glass and/or cause damage to the surface. to remove dust and loose dirt. rear window defogger. When A canister vacuum with a beater bar cleaning the glass on the vehicle, . A stiff brush. It can cause in the nozzle may only be used on use only a soft cloth and damage to the interior surfaces. floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. glass cleaner. . Heavy pressure or aggressive For any soil, always try to remove it Many cleaners contain solvents that rubbing with a cleaning cloth. first with plain water or club soda. may become concentrated in the Use of heavy pressure can Before cleaning, gently remove as breathing space. Before using damage the interior and does much of the soil as possible using cleaners, read and adhere to all not improve the effectiveness of one of the following techniques: safety instructions on the label. soil removal. . For liquids: gently blot the While cleaning the interior, maintain . Laundry detergents or remaining soil with a paper adequate ventilation by opening the dishwashing soaps with towel. Allow the soil to absorb doors and windows. degreasers can leave residue into the paper towel until no Dust may be removed from small that streaks and attracts dirt. For more can be removed. buttons and knobs using a small liquid cleaners, about 20 drops . For solid dry soils: remove as brush with soft bristles. per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only mild, much as possible and then Products that remove odors from neutral-pH soaps. vacuum. the upholstery and clean the glass To clean: can be obtained from your dealer. . Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery. 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white . Cleaners that contain solvents cloth with water or club soda. can damage the interior. 2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (101,1)

Vehicle Care 10-101

3. Start on the outside edge of the Instrument Panel, Vinyl and Some commercial products may soil and gently rub toward the other Plastic Surfaces increase gloss on the instrument center. Continue cleaning, using panel. The increase in gloss may a clean area of the cloth each A soft cloth dampened with water cause annoying reflections in the time it becomes soiled. may be used to remove dust. windshield and even make it difficult If a more thorough cleaning is 4. Continue to gently rub the soiled to see through the windshield under necessary, a clean soft cloth certain conditions. area until the cleaning cloth dampened with a mild soap solution remains clean. can be used to gently remove dust Care of Safety Belts and dirt. Never use spot lifters or 5. If the soil is not completely Keep belts clean and dry. removed, use a mild soap removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and coatings solution and repeat the cleaning { WARNING process that was used with that are sold to preserve and protect plain water. soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If any of the soil remains, a appearance and feel of the interior It may severely weaken them. In commercial fabric cleaner or spot and are not recommended. Do not a crash, they might not be able to lifter may be necessary. When a use silicone or wax-based products, provide adequate protection. commercial upholstery cleaner or or those containing organic solvents Clean safety belts only with mild spot lifter is to be used, test a small to clean the interior because they soap and lukewarm water. hidden area for colorfastness first. can alter the appearance by If the locally cleaned area gives any increasing the gloss in a impression that a ring formation may non-uniform manner. result, clean the entire surface. After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (102,1)

10-102 Vehicle Care

Floor Mats Use the following guidelines for proper floor mat usage. { WARNING . The original equipment floor mats were designed for the If a floor mat is the wrong size or vehicle. If the floor mats need is not properly installed, it can replacing, it is recommended interfere with the accelerator that GM certified floor mats be pedal and/or brake pedal. purchased. Non-GM floor mats Interference with the pedals can may not fit properly and may cause unintended acceleration interfere with the accelerator or and/or increased stopping brake pedal. Always check that distance which can cause a crash the floor mats do not interfere and injury. Make sure the floor with the pedals. mat does not interfere with the . Use the floor mat with accelerator or brake pedal. the correct side up. Do not turn it over. . Do not place anything on top of the driver side floor mat. . Use only a single floor mat on the driver side. . Do not place one floor mat on top of another. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Service and Maintenance 11-1

General Information As the vehicle owner, you are Service and responsible for the scheduled Maintenance This maintenance section applies maintenance in this section. We to vehicles with a gasoline engine. recommend having your dealer For diesel engine vehicles, see the perform these services. Proper General Information maintenance schedule section in vehicle maintenance helps to keep General Information ...... 11-1 the Duramax Diesel Supplement. the vehicle in good working Notice: Maintenance intervals, condition, improves fuel economy, Scheduled Maintenance checks, inspections, and reduces vehicle emissions for Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-3 recommended fluids, and better air quality. Recommended Fluids, lubricants are necessary to keep Because of all the different ways Lubricants, and Parts this vehicle in good working people use vehicles, maintenance Recommended Fluids and condition. Damage caused by needs vary. The vehicle might need Lubricants ...... 11-8 failure to follow scheduled more frequent checks and services. Maintenance Replacement maintenance might not be Please read the information under Parts ...... 11-10 covered by the vehicle warranty. Scheduled Maintenance. To keep the vehicle in good condition, see Maintenance Records your dealer. Maintenance Records ...... 11-11 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

11-2 Service and Maintenance

The maintenance schedule is for The proper replacement parts, vehicles that: { WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and . Carry passengers and cargo Performing maintenance work can within recommended limits on Lubricants on page 11‑8 and be dangerous. Some jobs can Maintenance Replacement Parts on the Tire and Loading Information cause serious injury. Perform label. See Vehicle Load Limits page 11‑10. We recommend the use maintenance work only if you of genuine parts from your dealer. on page 9‑12. have the required know-how and . Are driven on reasonable the proper tools and equipment. Rotation of New Tires road surfaces within legal If in doubt, see your dealer to To maintain ride, handling, and driving limits. have a qualified technician do the performance of the vehicle, it is . Use the recommended fuel. work. See Doing Your Own important that the first rotation See Recommended Fuel on Service Work on page 10‑6. service for new tires be performed. page 9‑40. Tires should be rotated every 12 000 km/7,500 mi. See Tire At your dealer, you can be certain Rotation on page 10‑67. that you will receive the highest level of service available. Your dealer has specially trained service technicians, uses genuine replacement parts, as well as, up‐to‐date tools and equipment to ensure fast and accurate diagnostics. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

Service and Maintenance 11-3

Scheduled Your dealer has trained service . Engine cooling system technicians who will perform this inspection. Visual inspection Maintenance work and reset the system. If the of hoses, pipes, fittings, and engine oil life system is reset clamps and replacement, When the Change Engine Oil accidentally, service the vehicle if needed. Soon Message Displays within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since . Windshield washer fluid level Change engine oil and filter. the last service. check. See Washer Fluid on See Engine Oil on page 10‑10. Reset the oil life system whenever page 10‑29. the oil is changed. See Engine Oil An Emission Control Service. . Windshield wiper blade Life System on page 10‑13. When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL inspection for wear, cracking, SOON message displays, service is Every Engine Oil Change or contamination and windshield required for the vehicle as soon as and wiper blade cleaning, . Change engine oil and filter. if contaminated. See Exterior possible, within the next 1 000 km/ Reset oil life system. See Care on page 10 96. 600 mi. If driving under the best Engine Oil on page 10 10 and ‑ ‑ Worn or damaged wiper blade conditions, the engine oil life system Engine Oil Life System on replacement. See Wiper Blade might not indicate the need for page 10 13. An Emission ‑ Replacement on page 10 39. vehicle service for more than a year. Control Service. ‑ The engine oil and filter must be . Tire inflation pressures check. . Engine coolant level check. See changed at least once a year and See Tire Pressure on the oil life system must be reset. Engine Coolant on page 10‑22. page 10‑60. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

11-4 Service and Maintenance

. Tire wear inspection. See Tire . Lubricate the front suspension, . Restraint system component Inspection on page 10‑66. kingpin bushings, steering check. See Safety System linkage, and rear driveline Check on page 3 23. . Rotate tires if necessary. See ‑ center splines. Tire Rotation on page 10‑67. . Fuel system inspection for . Body hinges and latches, key damage or leaks. . Fluids visual leak check lock cylinders, folding seat (or every 12 months, whichever . Exhaust system and nearby occurs first). A leak in any hardware, and rear compartment heat shields inspection for loose system must be repaired and hinges, linkage, and handle pivot or damaged components. the fluid level checked. points lubrication. See Recommended Fluids and . Vehicles with diesel engine or . Engine air cleaner filter Lubricants on page 11‑8. More GVWR above 4 536 kg inspection. See Engine Air frequent lubrication may be (10,000 lbs) only: Shields Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑20. required when the vehicle is inspection for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as . Brake system inspection exposed to a corrosive (or every 12 months, whichever environment. Applying silicone required. This is a Noise occurs first). grease on weatherstrips with a Emission Control Service. clean cloth makes them last Applicable to vehicles sold in the . Steering and suspension longer, seal better, and not stick United States and recommended inspection. Visual inspection for or squeak. for vehicles sold in Canada. damaged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Service and Maintenance 11-5

Additional Required Services Once a Month . Accelerator pedal check for damage, high effort, or binding. At the First 160 km/100 Miles, . Tire inflation pressures check. Replace if needed. 1 600 km/1,000 Miles, and See Tire Pressure on . Underbody flushing service. 10 000 km/6,000 Miles page 10‑60. . Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass . For vehicles with dual wheels: . Tire wear inspection. See Tire Check dual wheel nut torque. Inspection on page 10‑66. Support Gas Strut Service: Visually inspect gas strut, For proper torque, see Once a Year Capacities and Specifications on if equipped, for signs of wear, . cracks, or other damage. Check page 12‑2. See Starter Switch Check on page 10‑36. the hold open ability of the gas Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles strut. Contact your dealer if . See Automatic Transmission service is required. . Rotate tires. Tires should be Shift Lock Control Function rotated every 12 000 km/ Check on page 10‑37. 7,500 mi. See Tire Rotation on . See Ignition Transmission Lock page 10‑67. Check on page 10‑38. At Each Fuel Stop . See Park Brake and P (Park) . Engine oil level check. Mechanism Check on See Engine Oil on page 10‑10. page 10‑38. . Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant on page 10‑22. . Windshield washer fluid level check. See Washer Fluid on page 10‑29. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

11-6 Service and Maintenance

First Engine Oil Change After . All‐wheel drive only: Transfer . Evaporative control system Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles case fluid change (severe inspection. Check all fuel and service) for vehicles mainly vapor lines and hoses for proper . Engine air cleaner filter driven when frequently towing a hook‐up, routing, and condition. replacement. See Engine Air trailer, or used for taxi, police, Check that the purge valve, Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑20. or delivery service. Check vent if the vehicle has one, works . Automatic transmission fluid hose at transfer case for kinks properly. Replace as needed. change (severe service) for and proper installation. Check to An Emission Control Service. vehicles mainly driven in heavy be sure vent hose is The U.S. Environmental city traffic in hot weather, in hilly unobstructed, clear, and free of Protection Agency or the or mountainous terrain, when debris. During any maintenance, California Air Resources Board frequently towing a trailer, if a power washer is used to has determined that the failure or used for taxi, police, clean mud and dirt from the to perform this maintenance item or delivery service. See underbody, care should be taken will not nullify the emission Automatic Transmission Fluid to not directly spray the transfer warranty or limit recall liability (4-Speed Transmission) on case output seals. High pressure prior to the completion of page 10‑13 or Automatic water can overcome the seals the vehicle's useful life. Transmission Fluid (6-Speed and contaminate the transfer We, however, urge that all Transmission) on page 10‑16. case fluid. Contaminated fluid recommended maintenance will decrease the life of the services be performed at the transfer case and should indicated intervals and the be replaced. maintenance be recorded. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

Service and Maintenance 11-7

First Engine Oil Change After During any maintenance, if a First Engine Oil Change After Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles power washer is used to clean Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles mud and dirt from the . Automatic transmission fluid . Engine cooling system drain, change (normal service). See underbody, care should be taken flush, and refill (or every five Automatic Transmission Fluid to not directly spray the transfer years, whichever occurs first). (4-Speed Transmission) on case output seals. High pressure See Engine Coolant on water can overcome the seals page 10‑13 or Automatic page 10‑22. An Emission Transmission Fluid (6-Speed and contaminate the transfer Control Service. case fluid. Contaminated fluid Transmission) on page 10‑16. will decrease the life of the . Engine drive belts inspection . All‐wheel drive only: Transfer transfer case and should for fraying, excessive cracks, case fluid change (normal be replaced. or obvious damage (or every service). Check vent hose at 10 years, whichever occurs . transfer case for kinks and Spark plug replacement and first). Replace, if needed. proper installation. Check to be spark plug wires inspection. sure vent hose is unobstructed, An Emission Control Service. clear, and free of debris. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

11-8 Service and Maintenance

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts Recommended Fluids and Lubricants This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the maintenance schedule section in the Duramax Diesel Supplement. Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer. Usage Fluid/Lubricant The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos™ specification. Oils meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos™ Engine Oil certification mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos™ certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on page 10‑10. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant. Engine Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 10‑22. DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, in Hydraulic Brake System Canada 89021320). Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent. Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or Parking Brake Cable Guides lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186). Automatic Transmission DEXRON®‐VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

Service and Maintenance 11-9

Usage Fluid/Lubricant Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in Key Lock Cylinders Canada 10953474). Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or Chassis Lubrication lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. Wheel bearing lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category GC or Front Wheel Bearings GC-LB (GM Part No. 1051344, in Canada 993037). SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, in Front and Rear Axle Canada 89021678). Transfer Case DEXRON®‐VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. One-Piece Propshaft Slip Yoke Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345879, in Spline, Two-Piece Propshaft Canada 10953511). Slip-in-Tube Spline Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in Hood Hinges Canada 10953474). Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or Weatherstrip Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887). Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, in Weatherstrip Squeaks Canada 10953437). Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

11-10 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Replacement Parts If the vehicle has the Duramax® diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information. Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer. Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15950115 A3097C Engine Oil Filter 4.3L V6 25010792 PF47 4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 89017524 PF48 Spark Plugs 4.3L V6 12568387 41-101 4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 12621258 41-110 Wiper Blades – 56.0 cm (22 in) 25949887 — Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

Service and Maintenance 11-11

Maintenance Records After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

11-12 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

Service and Maintenance 11-13

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (14,1)

11-14 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle engine, Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement Number (VIN) ...... 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications” Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications Label ...... 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle engine code. Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications ...... 12-2 Service Parts Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label This legal identifier is in the front corner of the instrument panel, on This label, on the rear edge of the the left side of the vehicle. It can be passenger side front door, has the seen through the windshield from following information: outside. The VIN also appears on . Vehicle Identification the Vehicle Certification and Service Number (VIN). Parts labels and certificates of title and registration. . Model designation. . Paint information. . Production options and special equipment. Do not remove this label from the vehicle. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information. The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑8 for more information. Capacities Application Metric English For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the hood. See your dealer for more information. Cooling System without Rear Heat 4.3L V6 9.5 L 10.0 qt 4.8L V8, 5.3L V8 11.8 L 12.4 qt 6.0L V8 13.1 L 13.8 qt Cooling System with Rear Heat 4.3L V6 12.3 L 13.0 qt 4.8L V8, 5.3L V8 14.6 L 15.4 qt 6.0L V8 16.1 L 17.0 qt Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

Technical Data 12-3

Capacities Application Metric English Engine Oil with Filter 4.3L V6 4.3 L 4.5 qt 4.8L V8, 5.3L V8, 6.0L V8 5.7 L 6.0 qt Fuel Tank Cutaway (Optional Tank)* 215.7 L 57.0 gal Cutaway (Standard Tank) 124.9 L 33.0 gal Passenger and Cargo 117.3 L 31.0 gal * 4 039 mm (159 inch) wheelbase or 4 496 mm (177 inch) wheelbase only Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement) 4-SPD 4L60-E 4.7 L 5.0 qt 6-SPD 6L90 6.0 L 6.3 qt Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 ft lb All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

12-4 Technical Data

Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap 4.3L V6 X Automatic 1.52 mm (0.060 in) 4.8L V8 A Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in) 5.3L V8 4 Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in) 6.0L V8 G Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing

V8 Engines V6 Engines If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

Customer Information 13-1

Courtesy Transportation Customer Information Customer Program Information (U.S. and Canada) ...... 13-11 Collision Damage Repair Customer Satisfaction (U.S. and Canada) ...... 13-13 Procedure Customer Information Service Publications (U.S. and Canada) Customer Satisfaction Ordering Information ...... 13-15 Your satisfaction and goodwill are Procedure Reporting Safety Defects important to your dealer and to (U.S. and Canada) ...... 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns Customer Satisfaction the United States Procedure (Mexico) ...... 13-4 with the sales transaction or the Government ...... 13-16 operation of the vehicle will be Customer Assistance Offices Reporting Safety Defects to (U.S. and Canada) ...... 13-5 resolved by the dealer's sales or the Canadian service departments. Sometimes, Customer Assistance Offices Government ...... 13-17 (Mexico) ...... 13-6 however, despite the best intentions Reporting Safety Defects to of all concerned, misunderstandings Customer Assistance for General Motors ...... 13-17 Text Telephone (TTY) Users can occur. If your concern has not (U.S. and Canada) ...... 13-7 Vehicle Data Recording and been resolved to your satisfaction, Online Owner Center ...... 13-7 Privacy the following steps should be taken: GM Mobility Reimbursement Vehicle Data Recording and STEP ONE: Discuss your concern Program Privacy ...... 13-17 with a member of dealership (U.S. and Canada) ...... 13-8 Event Data Recorders ...... 13-18 management. Normally, concerns Roadside Assistance Program OnStar® ...... 13-19 can be quickly resolved at that level. (U.S. and Canada) ...... 13-8 Radio Frequency If the matter has already been Roadside Assistance Identification (RFID) ...... 13-19 reviewed with the sales, service, Program (Mexico) ...... 13-10 Radio Frequency or parts manager, contact the Scheduling Service Statement ...... 13-19 owner of the dealership or the Appointments general manager. (U.S. and Canada) ...... 13-11 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, case will generally be heard within member of dealership management, remember that your concern will 40 days. If you do not agree with the it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's decision given in your case, you resolved by the dealership without facility. That is why we suggest may reject it and proceed with any further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. other venue for relief available Chevrolet Customer Assistance to you. STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your You may contact the BBB Auto Line Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making Program using the toll-free Canada Customer Communication sure you are completely satisfied telephone number or write them at Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However, the following address: or 1-800-263-7854 (French). if you continue to remain unsatisfied BBB Auto Line Program We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Council of Better Business toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you Bureaus, Inc. inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business ® 4200 Wilson Boulevard following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program Suite 800 give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838 representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 . Vehicle Identification Number out-of-court program administered www.dr.bbb.org/goauto (VIN). This is available from the by the Council of Better Business vehicle registration or title, or Bureaus to settle automotive This program is available in all the plate at the top left of the disputes regarding vehicle repairs or 50 states and the District of instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle Columbia. Eligibility is limited by through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may vehicle age, mileage, and other be required to resort to this informal factors. General Motors reserves . Dealership name and location. dispute resolution program prior to the right to change eligibility . Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the limitations and/or discontinue its present mileage. program is free of charge and your participation in this program. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

Customer Information 13-3

STEP THREE — Canadian The program provides for the review For further information concerning Owners: In the event that you do of the facts involved by an impartial eligibility in the Canadian Motor not feel your concerns have been third party arbiter, and may include Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), addressed after following the an informal hearing before the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call procedure outlined in Steps One arbiter. The program is designed so the General Motors Customer and Two, General Motors of Canada that the entire dispute settlement Communication Centre, Limited wants you to be aware of process, from the time you file your 1-800-263-3777 (English), its participation in a no-charge complaint to the final decision, 1-800-263-7854 (French), Mediation/Arbitration Program. should be completed in about or write to: General Motors of Canada Limited 70 days. We believe our impartial The Mediation/Arbitration Program has committed to binding arbitration program offers advantages over c/o Customer Communication of owner disputes involving courts in most jurisdictions Centre factory-related vehicle because it is informal, quick, and General Motors of Canada Limited service claims. free of charge. Mail Code: CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

13-4 Customer Information

Customer Satisfaction Customer Assistance STEP ONE Procedure (Mexico) Procedure Explain your case to the dealer Owner satisfaction and goodwill are service agent, service manager, very important to your dealer and dealer sales agent, or sales General Motors. manager, depending on your case. Normally, any problem with the Make sure that they have all transaction, sale, or usage of the necessary information. They are vehicle must be handled by your interested in your continual dealer sales or service departments. satisfaction. Did you get the Warranty Extension However, we recognize that despite STEP TWO Plan? This plan is recommended the good intentions of all parties by General Motors to supplement involved, sometimes a If you are not satisfied, please the warranty included with the misunderstanding may occur. contact the general manager or the new vehicle purchase. dealership owner to ask for their If you have a problem that has not help. If they are not able to resolve See your dealer for details. been satisfactorily handled through your case, ask them to contact the the normal means, we suggest the right people at General Motors for following steps: support, if needed. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

Customer Information 13-5

STEP THREE See Customer Assistance Offices From Puerto Rico: If your case is not resolved in a (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or 1-800-496-9992 (English) reasonable amount of time by your Customer Assistance Offices 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) (Mexico) on page 13‑6 for more dealer, please call the General From U.S. Virgin Islands: Motors Customer Assistance information. Center (CAC) and provide the 1-800-496-9994 Customer Assistance following information: Canada . Name Offices (U.S. and Canada) General Motors of Canada Limited . Address Chevrolet encourages customers Customer Communication Centre, to call the toll-free number for . Phone number Mail Code: CA1-163-005 assistance. However, if a customer 1908 Colonel Sam Drive . Model year wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 the letter should be addressed to: . Brand www.gm.ca . Vehicle Identification United States 1-800-263-3777 (English) Number (VIN) Chevrolet Motor Division 1-800-263-7854 (French) 1-800-263-3830 (For Text . Mileage Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center Telephone devices (TTYs)) . Delivery date P.O. Box 33170 Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800 . Description of the problem Detroit, MI 48232-5170 www.Chevrolet.com . Dealership name Overseas 1-800-222-1020 . Dealership address Please contact the local General 1-800-833-2438 (For Text Motors Business Unit. Telephone Devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-243-8872 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

13-6 Customer Information

Mexico, Central America, and Customer Assistance United States and Canada Caribbean Islands/Countries Offices (Mexico) 1-866-466-8190 (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) To contact the Customer Assistance Costa Rica Center (CAC), use the phone General Motors de Mexico, S. de numbers listed in this section. 00-800-052-1005 R.L. de C.V. Customer assistance is available Guatemala Customer Assistance Center Monday through Friday, 08:00 to Av. Ejercito Nacional #843 20:00 hours, and Saturdays from 1-800-999-5252 Col. Granada 08:00 to 15:00 hours. C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F. Panama All e-mail inquiries to the Customer 00-800-052-0001 01-800-466-0800 Assistance Center (CAC) should be Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800 sent to: [email protected]. Dominican Republic Mexico 1-888-751-5301 From Mexico City El Salvador 5329-0811 800-6273 From Other Mexico Locations Honduras 01-800-466-0811 800-0122-6101 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

Customer Information 13-7

Customer Assistance for . Chevrolet dealer locator for Here are a few of the valuable tools service nationwide. Text Telephone (TTY) and services you will have . access to: Users (U.S. and Canada) Exclusive privileges and offers. . Recall notices for your specific . My Showroom: Find and save To assist customers who are deaf, vehicle. information on vehicles and hard of hearing, or speech-impaired current offers in your area. and who use Text Telephones . OnStar and GM Cardmember . My Dealers: Save details such (TTYs), Chevrolet has Services Earnings summaries. as address and phone number TTY equipment available at its Other Helpful Links for each of your preferred Customer Assistance Center. GM dealers. Any TTY user in the U.S. can Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com communicate with Chevrolet by Chevrolet Merchandise — . My Driveway: Access quick links dialing: 1-800-833-2438. TTY users www.chevymall.com to parts and service estimates, in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. check trade-in values, Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/ or schedule a service Online Owner Center pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do appointment by adding the . FAQ vehicles you own to your Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.) driveway profile. . Contact Us www.chevyownercenter.com . My Preferences: Manage your Information and services My GM Canada www.gm.ca profile and use tools and forms customized for your specific My GM Canada is a with greater ease. vehicle — all in one convenient password-protected section of To sign up, visit the My GM.ca place. www.gm.ca where you can save section within www.gm.ca. . Digital owner manual, warranty information on GM vehicles, get information, and more. personalized offers, and use handy tools and forms with greater ease. . Store online service and maintenance records. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

13-8 Customer Information

GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also . Location of the vehicle. Reimbursement Program has a Mobility Program. Call . Model, year, color, and license 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for plate number of the vehicle. (U.S. and Canada) details. TTY users call . 1-800-263-3830. Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and Roadside Assistance delivery date of the vehicle. Program (U.S. and . Description of the problem. Canada) Coverage For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call Services are provided up to 5 years/ 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever This program is available to 1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone comes first. qualified applicants for cost (TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438). reimbursement of eligible For Canadian‐purchased vehicles, In the U.S., anyone driving the aftermarket adaptive equipment call 1-800-268-6800. vehicle is covered. In Canada, a required for the vehicle, such as person driving the vehicle without Service is available 24 hours a day, hand controls or a wheelchair/ permission from the owner is 365 days a year. scooter lift for the vehicle. not covered. For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance Roadside Assistance is not a part of offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or When calling Roadside Assistance, the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. call the GM Mobility Assistance have the following information Chevrolet and General Motors of Center at 1-800-323-9935. ready: Canada Limited reserve the right to Text Telephone (TTY) users, call make any changes or discontinue 1-800-833-9935. . Your name, home address, and the Roadside Assistance program at home telephone number. any time without notification. . Telephone number of your location. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

Customer Information 13-9

Chevrolet and General Motors of . Emergency Tow From a Public Services Not Included in Canada Limited reserve the right to Road or Highway: Tow to the Roadside Assistance limit services or payment to an nearest Chevrolet dealer for owner or driver if they decide the warranty service, or if the vehicle . Impound towing caused by claims are made too often, or was in a crash and cannot be violation of any laws. the same type of claim is made driven. Assistance is also given . Legal fines. many times. when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow. . Mounting, dismounting, Services Provided or changing of snow tires, . Flat Tire Change: Service to chains, or other traction devices. . Emergency Fuel Delivery: change a flat tire with the spare Delivery of enough fuel for the tire. The spare tire, if equipped, . Towing or services for vehicles vehicle to get to the nearest must be in good condition and driven on a non-public road service station. properly inflated. It is the owner's or highway. responsibility for the repair or . Lock‐Out Service: Service to unlock the vehicle if you are replacement of the tire if it is locked out. A remote unlock may not covered by the warranty. be available if you have OnStar. . Battery Jump Start: Service to For security reasons, the driver jump start a dead battery. must present identification before this service is given. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

13-10 Customer Information

Services Specific to Canadian . Trip Interruption Benefits and Roadside Assistance Purchased Vehicles Assistance: Must be over 250 kilometers from where your Program (Mexico) . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement trip was started to qualify. Roadside Assistance is available is approximately $5 Canadian. General Motors of Canada 24 hours a day, 365 days of Diesel fuel delivery may be Limited requires the year. restricted. Propane and other pre-authorization, fuels are not provided through original detailed receipts, For detailed information about this service. and a copy of the repair orders. Roadside Assistance, please see the brochure provided with your . Once authorization has been Lock-Out Service: Vehicle new vehicle or visit our website at: registration is required. received, the Roadside Assistance advisor will help to www.chevrolet.com.mx. Navigate . Trip Routing Service: Detailed make arrangements and explain the site and click on “Asistencia en maps of North America are how to receive payment. el Camino.” E-mail correspondence provided when requested either should be sent to: with the most direct route or the . Alternative Service: [email protected]. most scenic route. There is a If assistance cannot be provided right away, the Roadside To contact Roadside Assistance by limit of six requests per year. phone, use the following numbers: Additional travel information is Assistance advisor may give also available. Allow three permission to get local Mexico weeks for delivery. emergency road service. You will receive payment, up to $100, 01-800-466-0800 after sending the original receipt United States to Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be 1-866-466-8901 covered, however any cost for Canada parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the 1-800-268-6800 owner responsibility. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

Customer Information 13-11

Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation A separate booklet entitled Appointments Program “Warranty and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each (U.S. and Canada) (U.S. and Canada) new vehicle provides detailed When the vehicle requires warranty To enhance your ownership warranty coverage information. service, contact the dealer and experience, we and our participating Transportation Options request an appointment. By dealers are proud to offer Courtesy scheduling a service appointment Transportation, a customer support Warranty service can generally be and advising the service consultant program for vehicles with the completed while you wait. However, of your transportation needs, the Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty if you are unable to wait, GM helps dealer can help minimize your Coverage period in Canada), to minimize inconvenience by inconvenience. extended powertrain, and/or providing several transportation options. Depending on the If the vehicle cannot be scheduled hybrid‐specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada. circumstances, the dealer can into the service department offer one of the following: immediately, keep driving it until it The Courtesy Transportation can be scheduled for service, program is no longer available for Shuttle Service unless, of course, the problem is cutaway vehicles. Shuttle service is the preferred safety related. If it is, please call the Several Courtesy Transportation means of offering Courtesy dealership, let them know this, and options are available to assist in Transportation. Dealers may provide ask for instructions. reducing inconvenience when shuttle service to get you to your If the dealer requests you to bring warranty repairs are required. destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes the vehicle for service, you are Courtesy Transportation is urged to do so as early in the work one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service not a part of the New Vehicle within reasonable time and distance day as possible to allow for the Limited Warranty. same day-repair. parameters of the dealer's area. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

13-12 Customer Information

Public Transportation or Fuel Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program Reimbursement The dealer may arrange to provide Information If the vehicle requires overnight you with a courtesy rental vehicle or All program options, such as shuttle warranty repairs, and public reimburse you for a rental vehicle service, may not be available at transportation is used instead of the that you obtain if the vehicle is kept every dealer. Please contact the dealer's shuttle service, the expense for an overnight warranty repair. dealer for specific information must be supported by original Rental reimbursement will be limited about availability. All Courtesy receipts and can only be up to the and must be supported by original Transportation arrangements maximum amount allowed by GM receipts. This requires that you sign will be administered by appropriate for shuttle service. In addition, for and complete a rental agreement dealer personnel. U.S. customers, should you arrange and meet state/provincial, local, and transportation through a friend or rental vehicle provider requirements. General Motors reserves the relative, limited reimbursement for Requirements vary and may right to unilaterally modify, reasonable fuel expenses may be include minimum age requirements, change, or discontinue Courtesy available. Claim amounts should insurance coverage, credit card, Transportation at any time and to reflect actual costs and be etc. You are responsible for fuel resolve all questions of claim supported by original receipts. usage charges and may also be eligibility pursuant to the terms and See the dealer for information responsible for taxes, levies, usage conditions described herein at its regarding the allowance amounts fees, excessive mileage, or rental sole discretion. for reimbursement of fuel or other usage beyond the completion of transportation costs. the repair. It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (13,1)

Customer Information 13-13

Collision Damage Repair Recycled original equipment parts Aftermarket parts are not covered may also be used for repair. These by the GM New Vehicle Limited (U.S. and Canada) parts are typically removed from Warranty, and any vehicle failure If the vehicle is involved in a vehicles that were total losses in related to such parts is not covered collision and it is damaged, have prior crashes. In most cases, the by that warranty. the damage repaired by a qualified parts being recycled are from technician using the proper undamaged sections of the vehicle. Repair Facility equipment and quality replacement A recycled original equipment GM GM also recommends that you parts. Poorly performed collision part may be an acceptable choice to choose a collision repair facility that repairs diminish the vehicle resale maintain the vehicle's originally meets your needs before you ever value, and safety performance can designed appearance and safety need collision repairs. The dealer be compromised in subsequent performance; however, the history of may have a collision repair center collisions. these parts is not known. Such parts with GM-trained technicians and are not covered by the GM New state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be Collision Parts Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any able to recommend a collision repair Genuine GM Collision parts are new related failures are not covered by center that has GM-trained parts made with the same materials that warranty. technicians and comparable and construction methods as the Aftermarket collision parts are also equipment. parts with which the vehicle was available. These are made by originally built. Genuine GM companies other than GM and may Collision parts are the best choice to not have been tested for the vehicle. ensure that the vehicle's designed As a result, these parts may fit appearance, durability, and safety poorly, exhibit premature durability/ are preserved. The use of Genuine corrosion problems, and may not GM parts can help maintain the perform properly in subsequent GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty. collisions. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (14,1)

13-14 Customer Information

Insuring The Vehicle If the vehicle is leased, the leasing Gather the following information: company may require you to have Protect your investment in the . Driver name, address, and insurance that ensures repairs with GM vehicle with comprehensive telephone number. Genuine GM Original Equipment and collision insurance coverage. Manufacturer (OEM) parts or . Driver license number. There are significant differences in Genuine Manufacturer replacement the quality of coverage afforded by . Owner name, address, and parts. Read the lease carefully, as various insurance policy terms. telephone number. you may be charged at the end of Many insurance policies provide . the lease for poor quality repairs. Vehicle license plate number. reduced protection to the GM . vehicle by limiting compensation If a Crash Occurs Vehicle make, model, and for damage repairs by using model year. If there has been an injury, call aftermarket collision parts. Some . Vehicle Identification emergency services for help. Do not insurance companies will not Number (VIN). specify aftermarket collision parts. leave the scene of a crash until all . Insurance company and policy When purchasing insurance, we matters have been taken care of. number. recommend that you ensure that the Move the vehicle only if its position vehicle will be repaired with GM puts you in danger, or you are . General description of the original equipment collision parts. instructed to move it by a damage to the other vehicle. police officer. If such insurance coverage is Choose a reputable repair facility not available from your current Give only the necessary information that uses quality replacement parts. insurance carrier, consider switching to police and other parties involved See “Collision Parts” earlier in to another insurance carrier. in the crash. this section. For emergency towing see If the airbag has inflated, see What Roadside Assistance Program Will You See After an Airbag (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or Inflates? on page 3‑31. Roadside Assistance Program (Mexico) on page 13‑10. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (15,1)

Customer Information 13-15

Managing the Vehicle Damage If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions Repair Process company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and you are not obligated to accept a service of the vehicle. In the event that the vehicle requires repair valuation based on that damage repairs, GM recommends insurance company's collision policy Owner Information that you take an active role in its repair limits, as you have no Owner publications are written repair. If you have a pre-determined contractual limits with that company. specifically for owners and intended repair facility of choice, take the In such cases, you can have control to provide basic operational vehicle there, or have it towed there. of the repair and parts choices as information about the vehicle. Specify to the facility that any long as the cost stays within The Owner Manual includes the required replacement collision parts reasonable limits. Maintenance Schedule for be original equipment parts, either all models. new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Remember, Service Publications In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, recycled parts will not be covered by Ordering Information Owner Manual, and Warranty the GM vehicle warranty. Booklet. Service Manuals Insurance pays the bill for the repair, RETAIL SELL PRICE: but you must live with the repair. Service Manuals have the diagnosis $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Depending on your policy limits, and repair information on the shipping fees. your insurance company may engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, Without Portfolio: Owner initially value the repair using Manual only. aftermarket parts. Discuss this with steering, body, etc. the repair professional, and insist on Service Bulletins RETAIL SELL PRICE: Genuine GM parts. Remember, $25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and if the vehicle is leased, you may be Service Bulletins give additional shipping fees. obligated to have the vehicle technical service information repaired with Genuine GM parts, needed to knowledgeably service even if your insurance coverage General Motors cars and trucks. does not pay the full cost. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (16,1)

13-16 Customer Information

Current and Past Models Reporting Safety To contact NHTSA, you may call Technical Service Bulletins and Defects the Vehicle Safety Hotline Manuals are available for current toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 and past model GM vehicles. (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to Reporting Safety Defects http://www.safercar.gov; or ORDER TOLL FREE: to the United States write to: 1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time Government Administrator, NHTSA For Credit Card Orders Only If you believe that your vehicle 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), has a defect which could cause Washington, D.C. 20590 visit Helm, Inc. at: a crash or could cause injury or You can also obtain www.helminc.com. death, you should immediately other information about Or write to: inform the National Highway motor vehicle safety from Helm, Incorporated Traffic Safety Administration http://www.safercar.gov. P.O. Box 07130 (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Detroit, MI 48207 General Motors. Prices are subject to change If NHTSA receives similar without notice and without incurring complaints, it may open an obligation. Allow ample time investigation, and if it finds that for delivery. a safety defect exists in a group All listed prices are quoted in of vehicles, it may order a recall U.S. funds. Make checks payable and remedy campaign. in U.S. funds. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (17,1)

Customer Information 13-17

Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data to the Canadian to General Motors Recording and Government In addition to notifying NHTSA Privacy If you live in Canada, and you (or Transport Canada) in a situation believe that the vehicle has a safety like this, notify General Motors. This GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that record defect, notify Transport Canada Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: immediately, and notify General information about the vehicle’s Chevrolet Motor Division Motors of Canada Limited. Call performance and how it is driven. Chevrolet Customer them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to: For example, the vehicle uses Assistance Center computer modules to monitor and Transport Canada P.O. Box 33170 control engine and transmission Road Safety Branch Detroit, MI 48232-5170 performance, to monitor the 2780 Sheffield Road In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 conditions for airbag deployment Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 and deploy airbags in a crash, and, (French), or write: if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the General Motors of Canada Limited vehicle. These modules may store Customer Communication Centre, data to help the dealer technician Mail Code: CA1-163-005 service the vehicle. Some modules 1908 Colonel Sam Drive may also store data about how you Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (18,1)

13-18 Customer Information

Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better GM will not access this data or understanding of the circumstances share it with others except: with the This vehicle has an Event Data in which crashes and injuries occur. consent of the vehicle owner or, Recorder (EDR). The main purpose Important: EDR data is recorded if the vehicle is leased, with the of an EDR is to record, in certain consent of the lessee; in response crash or near crash-like situations, by the vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is to an official request by police or such as an airbag deployment or similar government office; as part of hitting a road obstacle, data that will recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal GM's defense of litigation through assist in understanding how a the discovery process; or, as vehicle's systems performed. The data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded. required by law. Data that GM EDR is designed to record data collects or receives may also be related to vehicle dynamics and However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine used for GM research needs or may safety systems for a short period of be made available to others for time, typically 30 seconds or less. the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data research purposes, where a need is The EDR in this vehicle is designed shown and the data is not tied to a to record such data as: routinely acquired during a crash investigation. specific vehicle or vehicle owner. . How various systems in the vehicle were operating. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and . Whether or not the driver and access to the vehicle or the EDR is passenger safety belts were needed. In addition to the vehicle buckled/fastened. manufacturer, other parties, such as . How far, if at all, the driver was law enforcement, that have the pressing the accelerator and/or special equipment, can read the brake pedal. information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. . How fast the vehicle was traveling. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (19,1)

Customer Information 13-19

OnStar® Radio Frequency Radio Frequency If the vehicle is equipped with an Identification (RFID) Statement active OnStar system, that system RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that may also record data in crash or vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that near crash‐like situations. The pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal OnStar Terms and Conditions system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC) provides information on data connection with conveniences rules and with Industry Canada collection and use and is available such as key fobs for remote door Standards RSS‐210/220/310. in the OnStar glove box kit, at locking/unlocking and starting, and www.onstar.com (U.S.) or Operation is subject to the following in-vehicle transmitters for garage two conditions: www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by door openers. RFID technology in pressing the Q button and GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause speaking to an advisor. personal information or link with any interference. other GM system containing 2. The device must accept personal information. any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (20,1)

13-20 Customer Information

2 NOTES Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

INDEX i-1

A Airbags Audio Players ...... 7-13 Adding Equipment to the CD ...... 7-13 Accessories and Vehicle ...... 3-41 Audio System Modifications ...... 10-3 On-Off Light ...... 5-18 Fixed Mast Antenna ...... 7-12 Accessory Power ...... 9-21 On-Off Switch ...... 3-32 Radio Reception ...... 7-12 Add-On Electrical Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-20 Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 7-2 Equipment ...... 9-57 Readiness Light ...... 5-18 Automatic Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-20 Servicing Airbag-Equipped Door Locks ...... 2-8 Air Vents ...... 8-6 Vehicles ...... 3-40 Headlamp System ...... 6-4 Airbag System Check ...... 3-25 Automatic Light On-Off ...... 5-18 All-Wheel Drive ...... 10-33, 9-32 Transmission ...... 9-25, 9-28 Airbag System AM-FM Radio ...... 7-8 Fluid ...... 10-13, 10-16 Check ...... 3-42 Anti-Theft Manual Mode ...... 9-30 How Does an Airbag Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-39 Automatic Transmission Restrain? ...... 3-30 Antilock Brake Shift Lock Control Passenger Sensing System (ABS) ...... 9-32 Function Check ...... 10-37 System ...... 3-35 Warning Light ...... 5-25 Auxiliary Devices ...... 7-18 What Makes an Airbag Appearance Care Axle, Front ...... 10-34 Inflate? ...... 3-30 Exterior ...... 10-96 Axle, Rear ...... 10-35 What Will You See After Interior ...... 10-99 an Airbag Inflates? ...... 3-31 Ashtrays ...... 5-10 When Should an Airbag Assistance Program, Inflate? ...... 3-28 Roadside ...... 13-8, 13-10 Where Are the Airbags? ...... 3-27 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (2,1)

i-2 INDEX

B Bulb Replacement (cont.) Charging Headlamps ...... 10-40 System Light ...... 5-21 Battery ...... 10-32 License Plate Lamps ...... 10-44 Check Jump Starting ...... 10-88 Taillamps ...... 10-42 Engine Light ...... 5-21 Load Management ...... 6-7 Buying New Tires ...... 10-70 Ignition Power Protection ...... 6-7 Transmission Lock ...... 10-38 Voltage and Charging Child Restraints Messages ...... 5-34 C Infants and Young Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-39 Calibration ...... 5-5 Children ...... 3-46 Bluetooth ...... 7-23 California Lower Anchors and Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-24 Fuel Requirements ...... 9-41 Tethers for Children ...... 3-52 Brakes ...... 10-30 Perchlorate Materials Older Children ...... 3-43 Antilock ...... 9-32 Requirements ...... 10-3 Securing ...... 3-60, 3-62, 3-65 Fluid ...... 10-31 Warning ...... 10-3 Systems ...... 3-48 Parking ...... 9-34 Canadian Vehicle Owners ...... iii Cigarette Lighter ...... 5-10 System Messages ...... 5-34 Capacities and Circuit Breakers ...... 10-45 Braking ...... 9-3 Specifications ...... 12-2 Cleaning Break-In, New Vehicle ...... 9-16 Carbon Monoxide Exterior Care ...... 10-96 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-44 Engine Exhaust ...... 9-24 Interior Care ...... 10-99 Center High-Mounted Winter Driving ...... 9-9 Climate Control System Stoplamp (CHMSL) ...... 10-43 Cargo Door Relocking ...... 2-8 Rear Heating System ...... 8-3 Front Turn Signal, Cautions, Danger, and Climate Control Systems ...... 8-1 Sidemarker, and Warnings ...... iv Air Conditioning ...... 8-1 Parking Lamps ...... 10-41 CD Player ...... 7-13 Heating ...... 8-1 Halogen Bulbs ...... 10-40 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ...... 10-43 Rear ...... 8-4 Chains, Tire ...... 10-75 Clock ...... 5-6 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1)

INDEX i-3

Cluster, Instrument ...... 5-12 D Driving Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-13 Characteristics and Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-13 Compass ...... 5-5 Towing Tips ...... 9-46 Danger, Warnings, and Compass Messages ...... 5-34 Defensive ...... 9-2 Cautions ...... iv Control of a Vehicle ...... 9-3 Drunk ...... 9-2 Data Recorders, Event ...... 13-18 Convex Mirrors ...... 2-14 Highway Hypnosis ...... 9-7 Daytime Running Coolant Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 9-8 Lamps (DRL) ...... 6-3 Engine ...... 10-22 If the Vehicle is Stuck ...... 9-11 Defensive Driving ...... 9-2 Engine Temperature Loss of Control ...... 9-5 Delayed Locking ...... 2-8 Gauge ...... 5-16 Off-Road Recovery ...... 9-5 Devices, Auxiliary ...... 7-18 Cooling System ...... 10-21 Vehicle Load Limits ...... 9-12 Dome Lamps ...... 6-6 Engine Messages ...... 5-35 Wet Roads ...... 9-6 Door Courtesy Transportation Winter ...... 9-9 Ajar Messages ...... 5-34 Program ...... 13-11 Driving for Better Fuel Cargo Door Relocking ...... 2-8 Cruise Control ...... 9-37 Economy ...... 1-22 Delayed Locking ...... 2-8 Light ...... 5-28 Dual Tire Locks ...... 2-7 Customer Assistance ...... 13-7 Rotation ...... 10-68 Power Locks ...... 2-8 Offices ...... 13-5, 13-6 Rear Doors ...... 2-12 Text Telephone (TTY) Side ...... 2-10 Users ...... 13-7 Sliding ...... 2-11 Customer Information Drive Systems Service Publications All-Wheel Drive ...... 10-33, 9-32 Ordering Information ...... 13-15 Driver Information Customer Satisfaction Center (DIC) ...... 5-28 Procedure ...... 13-1, 13-4 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1)

i-4 INDEX

E Engine (cont.) Flat Tire ...... 10-76 Power Messages ...... 5-37 Flat Tire, Changing ...... 10-78 E85 Fuel ...... 9-42 Pressure Light ...... 5-27 Floor Mats ...... 10-102 Electrical Equipment, Running While Parked ...... 9-24 Fluid Add-On ...... 9-57 Starting ...... 9-18 Automatic Electrical System Engine Heater ...... 9-20 Transmission ...... 10-13, 10-16 Engine Compartment Engine Oil Brakes ...... 10-31 Fuse Block ...... 10-46 Life System ...... 10-13 Power Steering ...... 10-28 Floor Console Fuse Block . . 10-50 Messages ...... 5-36 Washer ...... 10-29 Fuses and Circuit Enhanced Technology Front Axle ...... 10-34 Breakers ...... 10-45 Glass ...... 2-19 Front Seats Overload ...... 10-45 Entry/Exit Lighting ...... 6-7 Adjustment ...... 3-2 Engine Equipment, Towing ...... 9-54 Front Storage ...... 4-1 Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 10-20 Event Data Recorders ...... 13-18 Front Turn Signal Check and Service Engine Extender, Safety Belt ...... 3-23 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-41 Soon Light ...... 5-21 Exterior Lamp Controls ...... 6-1 Fuel ...... 9-40 Compartment Overview ...... 10-8 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2 Additives ...... 9-41 Coolant ...... 10-22 E85 (85% Ethanol) ...... 9-42 Coolant Temperature Filling a Portable Fuel Gauge ...... 5-16 F Container ...... 9-45 Cooling System ...... 10-21 Fan Filling the Tank ...... 9-44 Cooling System Messages . . .5-35 Engine ...... 10-27 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-41 Drive Belt Routing ...... 12-4 Fast Idle System ...... 9-20 Gasoline Specifications ...... 9-41 Exhaust ...... 9-24 Filter Gauge ...... 5-14 Fan ...... 10-27 Engine Air Cleaner ...... 10-20 Oil Pressure Gauge ...... 5-15 Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-3 Overheating ...... 10-25 Flashers, Hazard Warning ...... 6-4 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (5,1)

INDEX i-5

Fuel (cont.) Gauges (cont.) Heated Mirrors ...... 2-16 Recommended ...... 9-40 Trip Odometer ...... 5-13 Heater Requirements, California . . . . .9-41 Voltmeter ...... 5-16 Engine ...... 9-20 System Messages ...... 5-37 Warning Lights and Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1 Fuel Economy Indicators ...... 5-11 High-Beam On Light ...... 5-28 Driving ...... 1-22 General Information Highway Hypnosis ...... 9-7 Full-Size Spare Tire ...... 10-88 Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 9-8 Fuses Towing ...... 9-46 Hood ...... 10-6 Engine Compartment Vehicle Care ...... 10-2 Horn ...... 5-4 Fuse Block ...... 10-46 Glass, Enhanced How to Wear Safety Belts Floor Console Fuse Block . . 10-50 Technology ...... 2-19 Properly ...... 3-12 Fuses and Circuit GM Mobility Reimbursement Breakers ...... 10-45 Program ...... 13-8 I Idle System G H Fast ...... 9-20 Gasoline Halogen Bulbs ...... 10-40 Ignition Positions ...... 9-17 Specifications ...... 9-41 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 6-4 Ignition Transmission Lock Gauges Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Check ...... 10-38 Engine Coolant Headlamps ...... 10-40 Immobilizer ...... 2-13 Temperature ...... 5-16 Automatic ...... 6-4 Infants and Young Children, Engine Oil Pressure ...... 5-15 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-40 Restraints ...... 3-46 Fuel ...... 5-14 Daytime Running Infotainment ...... 7-1 Odometer ...... 5-13 Lamps (DRL) ...... 6-3 Instrument Cluster ...... 5-12 Speedometer ...... 5-13 Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-3 Introduction ...... iii High-Beam On Light ...... 5-28 High/Low Beam Changer ...... 6-3 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (6,1)

i-6 INDEX

J LATCH System Locking Rear Axle ...... 9-36 Replacing Parts After a Locks Jump Starting ...... 10-88 Crash ...... 3-59 Automatic Door ...... 2-8 Latch, Lower Anchors and Cargo Door Relocking ...... 2-8 K Tethers for Children ...... 3-52 Delayed Locking ...... 2-8 Key and Lock Messages ...... 5-37 Lighter, Cigarette ...... 5-10 Door ...... 2-7 Keyless Entry Lighting Lockout Protection ...... 2-9 Remote (RKE) System ...... 2-3 Entry/Exit ...... 6-7 Power Door ...... 2-8 Keys ...... 2-2 Illumination Control ...... 6-5 Safety ...... 2-9 Lights Loss of Control ...... 9-5 L Airbag On-Off ...... 5-18 Lower Anchors and Tethers Labeling, Tire Sidewall ...... 10-54 Airbag Readiness ...... 5-18 for Children (LATCH Lamp Messages ...... 5-37 Antilock Brake System SYSTEM) ...... 3-52 Lamps (ABS) Warning ...... 5-25 Daytime Running (DRL) ...... 6-3 Brake System Warning ...... 5-24 M Dome ...... 6-6 Charging System ...... 5-21 Maintenance Exterior Controls ...... 6-1 Cruise Control ...... 5-28 Records ...... 11-11 Exterior Lamps Off Engine Oil Pressure ...... 5-27 Maintenance Schedule Reminder ...... 6-2 Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-3 Recommended Fluids and License Plate ...... 10-44 High-Beam On ...... 5-28 Lubricants ...... 11-8 Malfunction Indicator ...... 5-21 High/Low Beam Changer ...... 6-3 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 11-3 Reading ...... 6-6 Safety Belt Reminders ...... 5-17 Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-21 Taillamps ...... 10-42 Security ...... 5-27 ® Manual Mirrors ...... 2-15 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 3-18 StabiliTrak Indicator ...... 5-25 Manual Mode ...... 9-30 Tire Pressure ...... 5-26 Manual Windows ...... 2-17 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 5-25 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (7,1)

INDEX i-7

Messages Mirrors (cont.) Online Owner Center ...... 13-7 Airbag System ...... 5-39 Manual Rearview ...... 2-16 OnStar® System ...... 1-23 Anti-Theft Alarm System ...... 5-39 Power ...... 2-15 Operation, Infotainment Battery Voltage and Trailer Tow ...... 2-15 System ...... 7-3 Charging ...... 5-34 Monitor System, Tire Outlets Brake System ...... 5-34 Pressure ...... 10-62 Power ...... 5-9 Compass ...... 5-34 Overheating, Engine ...... 10-25 Door Ajar ...... 5-34 N Engine Cooling System ...... 5-35 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 9-16 P Engine Oil ...... 5-36 Noise Control System ...... 10-35 Park Engine Power ...... 5-37 Noise Control System, Shifting Into ...... 9-22 Fuel System ...... 5-37 Tampering ...... 10-4 Shifting Out of ...... 9-23 Key and Lock ...... 5-37 Parking Lamp ...... 5-37 O Brake ...... 9-34 Ride Control System ...... 5-38 Brake and P (Park) Service Vehicle ...... 5-40 Odometer ...... 5-13 Trip ...... 5-13 Mechanism Check ...... 10-38 Tire ...... 5-40 Over Things That Burn ...... 9-23 Transmission ...... 5-41 Off-Road Recovery ...... 9-5 Parking Lamps Vehicle ...... 5-33 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-41 Vehicle Reminder ...... 5-41 Oil Engine ...... 10-10 Passenger Airbag Status Mirrors Indicator ...... 5-20 Convex ...... 2-14 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13 Engine Oil Pressure Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-35 Heated ...... 2-16 Perchlorate Materials Manual ...... 2-15 Gauge ...... 5-15 Messages ...... 5-36 Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 Pressure Light ...... 5-27 Personalization Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-43 Vehicle ...... 5-42 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (8,1)

i-8 INDEX

Phone R Reimbursement Program, Bluetooth ...... 7-23 GM Mobility ...... 13-8 Radio Frequency Power Remote Keyless Entry Identification (RFID) ...... 13-19 Door Locks ...... 2-8 (RKE) System ...... 2-2, 2-3 Statement ...... 13-19 Mirrors ...... 2-15 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 2-5 Radios Outlets ...... 5-9 Replacement Bulbs ...... 10-44 AM-FM Radio ...... 7-8 Protection, Battery ...... 6-7 Replacement Parts Reception ...... 7-12 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-21 Airbags ...... 3-42 Satellite ...... 7-10 Seat Adjustment ...... 3-3 Maintenance ...... 11-10 Reading Lamps ...... 6-6 Steering Fluid ...... 10-28 Replacing Airbag System ...... 3-42 Rear Axle ...... 10-35 Windows ...... 2-17 Replacing LATCH System Locking ...... 9-36 Pregnancy, Using Safety Parts After a Crash ...... 3-59 Rear Climate Control System . . . 8-4 Belts ...... 3-23 Replacing Safety Belt Rear Doors ...... 2-12 Privacy System Parts After a Rear Heating System ...... 8-3 Radio Frequency Crash ...... 3-24 Rear Seats ...... 3-5 Identification (RFID) ...... 13-19 Reporting Safety Defects Rearview Mirrors ...... 2-16 Program Canadian Government ...... 13-17 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 3-3 Courtesy Transportation . . . . .13-11 General Motors ...... 13-17 Recommended Fluids and Proposition 65 Warning, U.S. Government ...... 13-16 Lubricants ...... 11-8 Restraints California ...... 10-3 Recommended Fuel ...... 9-40 Where to Put ...... 3-50 Records Retained Accessory Maintenance ...... 11-11 Power (RAP) ...... 9-21 Recreational Vehicle Ride Control Systems Towing ...... 10-93 Messages ...... 5-38 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (9,1)

INDEX i-9

Roads Satellite Radio ...... 7-10 Service (cont.) Driving, Wet ...... 9-6 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 11-3 Publications Ordering Roadside Assistance Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-11 Information ...... 13-15 Program ...... 13-8, 13-10 Seats Scheduling Appointments . . . .13-11 Rotation, Tires ...... 10-67 Adjustment, Front ...... 3-2 Vehicle Messages ...... 5-40 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4 Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Servicing the Airbag ...... 3-40 Running the Vehicle While Power Adjustment, Front ...... 3-3 Shift Lock Control Function Parked ...... 9-24 Rear ...... 3-5 Check, Automatic Reclining Seatbacks ...... 3-3 Transmission ...... 10-37 S Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-86 Shifting Safety Belts ...... 3-8 Securing Child Into Park ...... 9-22 Care ...... 3-24 Restraints ...... 3-60, 3-62, 3-65 Out of Park ...... 9-23 Extender ...... 3-23 Security Side Door ...... 2-10 How to Wear Safety Belts Light ...... 5-27 Sidemarker Properly ...... 3-12 Vehicle ...... 2-13 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-41 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 3-18 Service Signals, Turn and Reminders ...... 5-17 Accessories and Lane-Change ...... 6-5 Replacing After a Crash ...... 3-24 Modifications ...... 10-3 Sliding Door ...... 2-11 Use During Pregnancy ...... 3-23 Doing Your Own Work ...... 10-6 Specifications and Safety Defects Reporting Engine Soon Light ...... 5-21 Capacities ...... 12-2 Canadian Government ...... 13-17 Maintenance Records ...... 11-11 Speedometer ...... 5-13 Maintenance, General StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . 5-25 General Motors ...... 13-17 ® U.S. Government ...... 13-16 Information ...... 11-1 StabiliTrak System ...... 9-34 Safety Locks ...... 2-9 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Start Vehicle, Remote ...... 2-5 Safety System Check ...... 3-23 Starter Switch Check ...... 10-36 Starting the Engine ...... 9-18 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (10,1)

i-10 INDEX

Steering ...... 9-4 T Tires (cont.) Fluid, Power ...... 10-28 Messages ...... 5-40 Taillamps ...... 10-42 Wheel Adjustment ...... 5-2 Pressure Light ...... 5-26 Tampering with Noise Wheel Controls ...... 5-2 Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-62 Control System Prohibited . . . 10-4 Storage Areas Rotation ...... 10-67 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-7 Front ...... 4-1 Secondary Latch System . . . 10-86 Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 2-13 Stuck Vehicle ...... 9-11 Sidewall Labeling ...... 10-54 Immobilizer ...... 2-13 Sun Visors ...... 2-19 Terminology and Time ...... 5-6 Swing-Out Windows ...... 2-18 Definitions ...... 10-58 Tires Switches Uniform Tire Quality Buying New Tires ...... 10-70 Airbag On-Off ...... 3-32 Grading ...... 10-72 Chains ...... 10-75 Symbols ...... iv Wheel Alignment and Tire Changing ...... 10-78 System Balance ...... 10-74 Designations ...... 10-56 Infotainment ...... 7-1 Wheel Replacement ...... 10-74 Different Size ...... 10-71 Noise Control ...... 10-35 When It Is Time for New Dual Rotation ...... 10-68 Tires ...... 10-69 Full-Size Spare ...... 10-88 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 9-31 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 10-76 Tow/Haul Mode Light ...... 5-25 Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-63 Inspection ...... 10-66 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (11,1)

INDEX i-11

Towing U Vehicle (cont.) Driving Characteristics ...... 9-46 Reminder Messages ...... 5-41 Uniform Tire Quality Equipment ...... 9-54 Remote Start ...... 2-5 Grading ...... 10-72 General Information ...... 9-46 Security ...... 2-13 Using this Manual ...... iv Recreational Vehicle ...... 10-93 Towing ...... 10-93 Trailer ...... 9-50 Vehicle Care Vehicle ...... 10-93 V Tire Pressure ...... 10-60 Trailer Vehicle Vehicle Identification Tow Mirrors ...... 2-15 Canadian Owners ...... iii Service Parts Identification Trailer Towing ...... 9-50 Control ...... 9-3 Label ...... 12-1 Transmission Identification Ventilation, Air ...... 8-6 Automatic ...... 9-25, 9-28 Number (VIN) ...... 12-1 Visors ...... 2-19 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . 10-13, 10-16 Load Limits ...... 9-12 Voltmeter Gauge ...... 5-16 Messages ...... 5-41 Messages ...... 5-33 Transportation Program, Personalization ...... 5-42 Courtesy ...... 13-11 Trip Odometer ...... 5-13 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...... 6-5 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (12,1)

i-12 INDEX

W When It Is Time for New Tires ...... 10-69 Warning Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-50 Brake System Light ...... 5-24 Windows ...... 2-16 Warning Lights, Gauges, Enhanced Technology and Indicators ...... 5-11 Glass ...... 2-19 Warnings ...... iv Manual ...... 2-17 Cautions and Danger ...... iv Power ...... 2-17 Hazard Flashers ...... 6-4 Swing-Out Windows ...... 2-18 Washer Fluid ...... 10-29 Windshield Wheels Wiper/Washer ...... 5-4 Alignment and Tire Winter Driving ...... 9-9 Balance ...... 10-74 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-39 Different Size ...... 10-71 Replacement ...... 10-74